NEAX2400 IMX Installation Manual PDF NEC

NEAX2400 IMX Installation Manual NEAX2400 IMX Installation Manual

NEC NEAX2400 IMX Installation Manual NEC_NEAX2400_IMX_Installation_Manual www.TelecomUserGuides.com Access User Guides, Manuals and Brochures

User Manual: PDF T E X T F I L E S

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 410

DownloadNEAX2400 IMX Installation Manual PDF NEC
Open PDF In BrowserView PDF
NDA-24234
ISSUE 3
STOCK # 200865

®

Installation Manual

NOVEMBER, 1999

NEC America, Inc.

LIABILITY DISCLAIMER
The information contained in this document is specific to Dterm Series E only.
Minimum firmware may be required. Contact NEC Engineering for additional
information.
NEC America, Inc. reserves the right to change the specifications, functions, or
features, at any time, without notice.
NEC America, Inc. has prepared this document for use by its employees and
customers. The information contained herein is the property of NEC America,
Inc. and shall not be reproduced without prior written approval from NEC
America, Inc.
NEAX and Dterm are registered trademarks of NEC Corporation.
Copyright 1999
NEC America, Inc.
Printed in the U.S.A

PAGE No.

ISSUE No.

PAGE No.

ISSUE No.

1

2

3

1

2

3

i

1

2

3

19

1

2

3

ii

1

2

3

20

1

2

3

iii

1

2

3

21

1

2

3

1

2

3

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

iv

1

2

3

22

v

1

2

3

23

vi

1

2

3

24

1

2

3

vii

1

2

3

25

1

2

3

1

2

3

viii

1

2

3

26

ix

1

2

3

27

1

2

3

1

2

3

1

2

3

x

1

2

3

28

xi

1

2

3

29

xii

1

2

3

30

1

2

3

xiii

1

2

3

31

1

2

3

1

2

3

1

2

3

xiv

1

2

3

32

xv

1

2

3

33

xvi

1

2

3

34

1

2

3

xvii

1

2

3

35

1

2

3

xviii

1

2

3

36

1

2

3

xix

1

2

3

37

1

2

3

1

2

3

1

2

3

xx

1

2

3

38

1

1

2

3

39

2

1

2

3

40

1

2

3

3

1

2

3

41

1

2

3

4

1

2

3

42

1

2

3

5

1

2

3

43

1

2

3

1

2

3

1

2

3

6

1

2

3

44

7

1

2

3

45

8

1

2

3

46

1

2

3

9

1

2

3

47

1

2

3

10

1

2

3

48

1

2

3

11

1

2

3

49

1

2

3

1

2

3

1

2

3

12

1

2

3

50

13

1

2

3

51

14

1

2

3

52

1

2

3

15

1

2

3

53

1

2

3

16

1

2

3

54

1

2

3

17

1

2

3

55

1

2

3

3

56

1

2

3

18

1

2

ISSUE 1
DATE

SEPTEMBER, 1997

ISSUE 2
DATE

ISSUE 5
DATE

NEAX2400 IMX
Installation Manual

JULY, 1998

ISSUE 3
DATE

ISSUE 6
DATE

4

NOVEMBER, 1999

6

7

8

ISSUE 4
DATE

ISSUE 7
DATE

5

ISSUE 8
DATE

Revision Sheet 1/6

NDA-24234

PAGE No.

ISSUE No.

PAGE No.

1

2

3

57

1

2

3

95

58

1

2

3

96

4

5

6

7

8

ISSUE No.
1

2

3

1

2

3

1

2

3

59

1

2

3

97

1

2

3

60

1

2

3

98

1

2

3

61

1

2

3

99

1

2

3

62

1

2

3

100

1

2

3

63

1

2

3

101

1

2

3

64

1

2

3

102

1

2

3

65

1

2

3

103

1

2

3

66

1

2

3

104

1

2

3

67

1

2

3

105

1

2

3

68

1

2

3

106

1

2

3

69

1

2

3

107

1

2

3

70

1

2

3

108

1

2

3

71

1

2

3

109

1

2

3

72

1

2

3

110

1

2

3

73

1

2

3

111

1

2

3

74

1

2

3

112

1

2

3

75

1

2

3

113

1

2

3

76

1

2

3

114

1

2

3

77

1

2

3

115

1

2

3

78

1

2

3

116

1

2

3

79

1

2

3

117

1

2

3

80

1

2

3

118

1

2

3

81

1

2

3

119

1

2

3

82

1

2

3

120

1

2

3

83

1

2

3

121

1

2

3

84

1

2

3

122

1

2

3

85

1

2

3

123

1

2

3

86

1

2

3

124

1

2

3

87

1

2

3

125

1

2

3

88

1

2

3

126

1

2

3

89

1

2

3

127

1

2

3

90

1

2

3

128

1

2

3

91

1

2

3

129

1

2

3

92

1

2

3

130

1

2

3

93

1

2

3

131

1

2

3

94

1

2

3

132

1

2

3

ISSUE 1
DATE

SEPTEMBER, 1997

ISSUE 2
DATE

ISSUE 5
DATE

NEAX2400 IMX
Installation Manual

JULY, 1998

ISSUE 3
DATE

ISSUE 6
DATE

4

NOVEMBER, 1999

6

7

8

ISSUE 4
DATE

ISSUE 7
DATE

5

ISSUE 8
DATE

Revision Sheet 2/6

NDA-24234

PAGE No.

ISSUE No.

PAGE No.

1

2

3

133

1

2

3

171

134

1

2

3

172

4

5

6

7

8

ISSUE No.
1

2

3

1

2

3

1

2

3

135

1

2

3

173

1

2

3

136

1

2

3

174

1

2

3

137

1

2

3

175

1

2

3

138

1

2

3

176

1

2

3

139

1

2

3

177

1

2

3

140

1

2

3

178

1

2

3

141

1

2

3

179

1

2

3

142

1

2

3

180

1

2

3

143

1

2

3

181

1

2

3

144

1

2

3

182

1

2

3

145

1

2

3

183

1

2

3

146

1

2

3

184

1

2

3

147

1

2

3

185

1

2

3

148

1

2

3

186

1

2

3

149

1

2

3

187

1

2

3

150

1

2

3

188

1

2

3

151

1

2

3

189

1

2

3

152

1

2

3

190

1

2

3

153

1

2

3

191

1

2

3

154

1

2

3

192

1

2

3

155

1

2

3

193

1

2

3

156

1

2

3

194

1

2

3

157

1

2

3

195

1

2

3

158

1

2

3

196

1

2

3

159

1

2

3

197

1

2

3

160

1

2

3

198

1

2

3

161

1

2

3

199

1

2

3

162

1

2

3

200

1

2

3

163

1

2

3

201

1

2

3

164

1

2

3

202

1

2

3

165

1

2

3

203

1

2

3

166

1

2

3

204

1

2

3

167

1

2

3

205

1

2

3

168

1

2

3

206

1

2

3

169

1

2

3

207

1

2

3

170

1

2

3

208

1

2

3

ISSUE 1
DATE

SEPTEMBER, 1997

ISSUE 2
DATE

ISSUE 5
DATE

NEAX2400 IMX
Installation Manual

JULY, 1998

ISSUE 3
DATE

ISSUE 6
DATE

4

NOVEMBER, 1999

6

7

8

ISSUE 4
DATE

ISSUE 7
DATE

5

ISSUE 8
DATE

Revision Sheet 3/6

NDA-24234

PAGE No.

ISSUE No.
1

2

3

209

1

2

3

210

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

PAGE No.

ISSUE No.
1

2

3

247

2

3

248

2

3

211

1

2

3

249

2

3

212

1

2

3

250

2

3

213

1

2

3

251

2

3

214

1

2

3

252

2

3

215

1

2

3

253

2

3

216

1

2

3

254

2

3

217

1

2

3

255

2

3

218

1

2

3

256

2

3

219

1

2

3

257

2

3

220

1

2

3

258

2

3

221

1

2

3

259

2

3

222

1

2

3

260

2

3

223

1

2

3

261

2

3

224

1

2

3

262

2

3

225

1

2

3

263

2

3

226

1

2

3

264

2

3

227

1

2

3

265

2

3

228

1

2

3

266

2

3

229

1

2

3

267

2

3

230

1

2

3

268

2

3

231

1

2

3

269

2

3

232

1

2

3

270

2

3

233

1

2

3

271

2

3

234

1

2

3

272

2

3

235

1

2

3

273

2

3

236

1

2

3

274

2

3

237

1

2

3

275

2

3

238

1

2

3

276

2

3

239

1

2

3

277

2

3

240

1

2

3

278

2

3

241

2

3

279

2

3

242

2

3

280

2

3

243

2

3

281

2

3

244

2

3

282

2

3

245

2

3

283

2

3

246

2

3

284

2

3

ISSUE 1
DATE

SEPTEMBER, 1997

ISSUE 2
DATE

ISSUE 5
DATE

NEAX2400 IMX
Installation Manual

JULY, 1998

ISSUE 3
DATE

ISSUE 6
DATE

4

NOVEMBER, 1999

6

7

8

ISSUE 4
DATE

ISSUE 7
DATE

5

ISSUE 8
DATE

Revision Sheet 4/6

NDA-24234

PAGE No.

ISSUE No.
1

2

3

285

2

3

286

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

PAGE No.

ISSUE No.
1

2

3

323

2

3

324

2

3

287

2

3

325

2

3

288

2

3

326

2

3

289

2

3

327

2

3

290

2

3

328

2

3

291

2

3

329

3

292

2

3

330

3

293

2

3

331

3

294

2

3

332

3

295

2

3

333

3

296

2

3

334

3

297

2

3

335

3

298

2

3

336

3

299

2

3

337

3

300

2

3

338

3

301

2

3

339

3

302

2

3

340

3

303

2

3

341

3

304

2

3

342

3

305

2

3

343

3

306

2

3

344

3

307

2

3

345

3

308

2

3

346

3

309

2

3

347

3

310

2

3

348

3

311

2

3

349

3

312

2

3

350

3

313

2

3

351

3

314

2

3

352

3

315

2

3

353

3

316

2

3

354

3

317

2

3

355

3

318

2

3

356

3

319

2

3

357

3

320

2

3

358

3

321

2

3

359

3

322

2

3

360

3

ISSUE 1
DATE

SEPTEMBER, 1997

ISSUE 2
DATE

ISSUE 5
DATE

NEAX2400 IMX
Installation Manual

JULY, 1998

ISSUE 3
DATE

ISSUE 6
DATE

4

NOVEMBER, 1999

6

7

8

ISSUE 4
DATE

ISSUE 7
DATE

5

ISSUE 8
DATE

Revision Sheet 5/6

NDA-24234

PAGE No.

ISSUE No.
1

2

3

361

3

362

3

363

3

364

3

365

3

366

3

367

3

368

3

369

3

370

3

371

3

372

3

373

3

374

3

375

3

376

3

377

3

378

3

379

3

380

3

4

ISSUE 1
DATE

SEPTEMBER, 1997

NEAX2400 IMX
Installation Manual

6

7

8

PAGE No.

ISSUE 2
DATE

ISSUE 5
DATE

5

JULY, 1998

2

3

4

ISSUE 3
DATE

ISSUE 6
DATE

ISSUE No.
1

NOVEMBER, 1999

6

7

8

ISSUE 4
DATE

ISSUE 7
DATE

5

ISSUE 8
DATE

Revision Sheet 6/6

NDA-24234

NDA-24234
ISSUE 3
NOVEMBER, 1999

NEAX2400 IMX
Installation Manual
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
LIST OF FIGURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii
LIST OF TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii
SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv
REGULATORY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii
1. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii
2. FCC PART 15 REQUIREMENTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii
3. FCC PART 68 REGISTRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii
3.1 Company Notification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii
3.2 Service Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xviii
3.3 Location of FCC Compliance Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xviii
4. DIRECT-INWARD DIALING (DID) CALLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xviii
5. REGULATORY INFORMATION ON SINGLE-LINE ANALOG TELEPHONES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix
6. HEARING AID COMPATIBILITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix
7. INDUSTRY CANADA CS-03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix
8. SAFETY LISTING/CERTIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xx
8.1 Safety Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xx
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1. GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
2. HOW TO FOLLOW THE MANUAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1 Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2 How to Follow NAPs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3 How To Follow Trees . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4 Figure and Table Numbers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5 Essential/Critical Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1
1
2
4
6
6

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION DESIGN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1. GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
2. ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
2.1 Temperature And Humidity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
2.2 Heat Generation From Switching Equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
3. FLOOR SPACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
4. FLOOR LOAD REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
5. EQUIPMENT ROOM REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

NDA-24234

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page i
Revision 3.0

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED)

5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4

Page
Floor Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Ceiling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Lighting Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

6. POWER SUPPLY REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1 Main Source Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2 Current Consumption. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.3 Power Distribution Box Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.4 Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10
10
11
12
12

7. MDF REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
8. INSTALLATION TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
9. SYSTEM ACCOMMODATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.1 System Accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.2 Circuit Card Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.3 Preparation Of Trunking Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.4 Preparation Of Module Group Face Layout And Port Accommodation Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.5 Preparation Of Circuit Card Switch Setting Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14
14
22
26
26
26

10. INSTALLATION CABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
10.1 AC Input, DC Power, And Ground Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
10.2 Cables Between The PBX And MDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
1. GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
2. PRECAUTIONS BEFORE BEGINNING INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
2.1 Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
3. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
NAP-200-001 Installation Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
NAP-200-002 Marketing, Leveling, and Drilling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
1. WHEN SECURING THE PBX DIRECTLY ONTO THE FLOOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
2. WHEN SECURING THE PBX WITH THE SPECIAL STAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
3. WHEN SECURING PBX WITH FLOOR ELEVATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
4. MARKING, LEVELING AND DRILLING FOR MDF, POWER EQUIPMENT, AND PERIPHERAL
EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
NAP-200-003 Unpacking and Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
1. UNPACKING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
2. INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
NAP-200-004 Installation of the Base Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
1. INSTALLING THE BASE UNIT DIRECTLY ONTO THE FLOOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
2. INSTALLING THE BASE UNIT USING A SPECIAL STAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
NAP-200-005 Mounting of Units and Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
1. MOUNTING OF UNITS AND MODULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
2. INSTALLATION OF FANU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
3. PROCEDURE FOR FANU ON THE TOPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
4. PROCEDURE FOR FANU IN THE FAN BOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
5. ATTACHING THE ADDITIONAL NOISE FILTER UNIT (NFILU) TO THE BASEU . . . . . . . . . 67

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page ii
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED)
Page
NAP-200-006 Installation of Power Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
NAP-200-007 Installation of the MDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
NAP-200-008 Connection of Power and Ground Cables from the Power Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
1. CONNECTION OF THE POWER AND GROUND CABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
2. CONNECTION OF DC-DC CONVERTER FOR TELEPHONE SETS EQUIPPED WITH
MESSAGE WAITING LAMPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
3. END JOINTING OF POWER AND GROUND CABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
4. BRANCHING OF POWER CABLES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
NAP-200-009 Setting of Switch Positions and Mounting of Circuit Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
1. PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
2. EXTRACTION OF MOUNTED CIRCUIT CARDS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
3. MOUNTING OF CIRCUIT CARDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
4. SETTING OF SWITCH POSITIONS ON CIRCUIT CARDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
5. INSTALLATION OF CPR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
NAP-200-010 Internal Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
NAP-200-011 Inter-Frame Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
NAP-200-012 Front Cable Connections between Circuit Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
NAP-200-013 Cable Running from the PBX to MDF, ATTCON, MAT, and SMDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
1. CABLE RUNNING FROM THE PBX TO THE MDF AND ATTCON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
2. CABLE RUNNING FROM THE PBX TO THE MAT AND SMDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
3. CONNECTIONS AT THE PBX SIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
4. CABLE TYING AT THE PBX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
5. TERMINATION OF THE CABLES BETWEEN THE PBX AND THE MDF OR ATTCON ONTO
THE CABLE SUPPORT ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
NAP-200-014 Termination of Cables on MDF (Wire Accommodation of Each Cable) . . . . . . . . . . 199
NAP-200-015 Cable Termination and Cross Connections from MDF to Peripheral Equipment, C. O.
Lines, and Tie Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
1. CROSS CONNECTION OF STATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
2. CROSS CONNECTION OF TRUNKS (C.O. LINES AND TIE LINES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
3. CROSS CONNECTIONS FOR PFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
4. CROSS CONNECTION OF ALARM INDICATING PANEL AND MUSIC ON HOLD . . . . . . . 207
5. CROSS CONNECTIONS FOR TAS INDICATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
6. CROSS CONNECTIONS FOR EXTERNAL SWITCHES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
7. CONNECTION OF ANNOUNCEMENT MACHINE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
8. CONNECTION OF PAGING EQUIPMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
9. CROSS CONNECTIONS FOR Dterm Series E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
10. CROSS CONNECTIONS FOR DIGITAL INTERFACES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
NAP-200-016 Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and Cable Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
1. CABLE CONNECTION DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
2. CALCULATION OF THE DISTANCE BETWEEN THE ATI CIRCUIT CARD AND MODULAR
ROSETTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
3. MOUNTING OF HEADSET (OPTIONAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
4. MOUNTING OF HANDSET (OPTIONAL). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
5. CONNECTION OF RECORDING EQUIPMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
6. 8-CORE LINE CABLE (INSTALLATION CABLE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
7. CONNECTION OF AC-DC ADAPTER (OPTIONAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
8. MOUNTING OF ADD-ON CONSOLE (FOR HOTEL SYSTEM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
9. MOUNTING OF ADD-ON CONSOLE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

NDA-24234

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page iii
Revision 3.0

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED)

10. CONNECTION OF AC-DC ADAPTER FOR ADD-ON CONSOLE (OPTIONAL) . . . . . . . . . .
11. CONFIGURATION MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12. SELECTION OF CONFIGURATION ITEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13. ASSIGNMENT OF CONFIGURATION DATA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14. HEADSET/HANDSET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15. HEADSET TYPE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16. MUTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17. REC CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18. SUP CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19. REC VOLUME ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20. BLF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21. HOLD/START/RELEASE/SWAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
22. UPDATING CONFIGURATION DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NAP-200-017 Installation of Maintenance Administration Terminal (MAT) and Cable Connections
1. INSTALLATION OF MAT AND CABLE CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2. INSTALLATION OF MAT AND CABLE CONNECTION BY USING MODEM . . . . . . . . . . . .
3. INSTALLATION OF SYSTEM MESSAGE PRINTER AND CABLE CONNECTIONS . . . . . .
NAP-200-018 Connections of SMDR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Page
257
258
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
272
275
277
281

CHAPTER 4 SYSTEM STARTUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
1. GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
2. PRECAUTIONS BEFORE BEGINNING SYSTEM STARTUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
3. SYSTEM STARTUP PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NAP-200-019 Power ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NAP-200-020 Program Install and Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NAP-200-021 Assignment of Office Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NAP-200-022 Check of Lamp Indications and System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NAP-200-023 Check of Alarm Lamps of the TOPU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

288
289
291
297
299
304

CHAPTER 5 INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
1. HOW TO ENTER DATA IN THE TEST CHECK COLUMN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
2. BASIC CONNECTION TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1 Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2 Basic Connection Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NAP-200-024 DT (Dial Tone) Connection Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NAP-200-025 Station to Station Connection Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

309
309
309
310
311

3. SYSTEM INITIALIZED TEST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1 Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2 System Initialized Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NAP-200-026 System Changeover Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NAP-200-027 System Initialization Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NAP-200-028 Circuit Card Initialization Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

312
312
312
313
321
323

4. PORT CONNECTION TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1 Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2 Port Connection Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NAP-200-029 ORT (RST Card) Connection Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

324
324
324
325

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page iv
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED)

NAP-200-030
NAP-200-031
NAP-200-032
NAP-200-033
NAP-200-034
NAP-200-035
NAP-200-036
NAP-200-037
NAP-200-038
NAP-200-039
NAP-200-040
NAP-200-041
NAP-200-042

ATTCON (ATI Card) Connection Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Line (LC, ELC, DLC, Card) Connection Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outgoing Trunk (COT, TLT, DTI Card) Connection Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Incoming Trunk (COT, TLT, DTI Card) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Direct-In Termination Trunk (COT Card). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SND (RST Card) Connection Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-party Conference Trunk Function Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connection Test-Announcement Trunk for Announcement Service . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connection Test-Digital Announcement Trunk for Announcement Service . . . . . . .
Connection Test-Paging Trunk for Paging Access Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connection Test-Paging Trunk for Paging Transfer Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radio Paging Trunk (COT Card) Connection Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Howler & Ringing Signal Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5. OVERALL TEST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1 Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2 Overall Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NAP-200-043 Overall Test for C.O. Line Outgoing Call. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NAP-200-044 Overall Test for C.O. Line Incoming Call. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NAP-200-045 Overall Test of CCIS Tie Line Outgoing Call. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NAP-200-046 Overall Test of CCIS Tie Line Incoming Call. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NAP-200-047 Test of Connection and Alternate Routing to All Tie Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NAP-200-048 Test of Tandem Connection to Tie Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NAP-200-049 PAD Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Page
327
328
329
332
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
342
343
345
345
345
346
347
348
350
351
353
355

CHAPTER 6 FAULT RECOVERY DURING TESTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
1. GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
2. OUTLINE OF PROCEDURE FOR FAULT RECOVERY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NAP-200-050 Abnormal Lamp Indications After System Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NAP-200-051 DT (Dial Tone) Connection Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NAP-200-052 Station to Station Connection Fault. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

357
358
360
361

CHAPTER 7 WORK AFTER INSTALLATION TESTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
1. OFFICE DATA MANAGEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
1.1 Preservation of Office Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
2. PREPARATION OF TEST RESULT REPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
3. MOUNTING OF THE FRONT AND REAR COVERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
4. ATTACHMENT OF INTER-FRAME BRACKETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
5. SITE CLEANING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379

NDA-24234

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page v
Revision 3.0

This page is for your notes.

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page vi
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

LIST OF FIGURES
Figure

Title

Page

Figure 1-1
Figure 1-2
Figure 1-3
Figure 1-4
Figure 2-1
Figure 2-2
Figure 2-3
Figure 2-4
Figure 2-5
Figure 2-6
Figure 2-7

Example of NAP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Example of a Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Static Caution Indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
3M Model 8012 Portable Field Service Kit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Heat Generation from Switching Equipment for the PBX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Current Consumption of the PBX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
System Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Time Slot, Group Number Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Face Layout (Single IMG Configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Face Layout of IMG0 (Multiple IMG Configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Location of Terminating Resistors on the TSWM Back Plane
(Multiple IMG Configuration)
19
Figure 2-8
Face Layout of IMG1 Front View (Multiple IMG Configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Figure 2-9
Face Layout of IMG2, 3 (Multiple IMG Configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Figure 2-10
Controlling Circuit Cards in LPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Figure 2-11
Controlling Circuit Cards in PIM 0 (Single IMG Configuration Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Figure 2-12
Controlling Circuit Cards in PIM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Figure 2-13
Controlling Circuit Cards in TSWM (Multiple IMG Configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Figure 2-14
DC Main Power Cable and Main Ground Cable (1- or 2-PIM System)
(Single IMG Configuration)
27
Figure 2-15
DC Main Power Cable and Main Ground Cable (3- or 4-PIM System)
(Single IMG Configuration)
28
Figure 2-16
DC Main Power Cable and Main Ground Cable (Multiple IMG Configuration) . . . . . . . . . 29
Figure 2-17
Calculation Method for Sectional Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Figure 2-18
Outline of Cables from Module Group to the Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Figure 3-1
Scope of Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Figure 3-2
Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Figure 002-1 Locations of Base Unit Securing Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Figure 002-2 Cable Hole on a Free-Access or Computer Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Figure 002-3 Example of Special Stand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Figure 002-4 Special Stand Installation Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Figure 002-5 Example of Elevation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Figure 004-1 Mounting the Base Unit on an Ordinary Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Figure 004-2 Mounting the Base Unit on a Free-Access or Computer Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Figure 004-3 Mounting the Base Unit on a Free-Access or Computer Floor via Elevation . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Figure 004-4 Setting the BASEU via Special Stand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Figure 005-1 Procedure for Mounting Units and Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Figure 005-2 Locations of FANU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Figure 005-3 Mounting of FANU (on TOPU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Figure 005-4 Attachment of FAN Fuse (PZ-M369) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Figure 005-5 Cable Connections for FANU on TOPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Figure 005-6 Connection of “FAN” Connector Cable (TOPU-PIM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Figure 005-7 Attachment of the Top Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Figure 005-8 Relocation of FANU and Insertion into FAN BOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Figure 005-9 FAN Cable Connections for FC0/FC1/FC2 Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Figure 005-10 Cable Connections for FANU in FAN BOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

NDA-24234

LIST OF FIGURES
Page vii
Revision 3.0

LIST OF FIGURES (CONTINUED)
Figure

Title

Figure 005-11
Figure 005-12
Figure 005-13
Figure 005-14
Figure 008-1
Figure 008-2
Figure 008-3
Figure 008-4
Figure 008-5
Figure 008-6
Figure 008-7
Figure 008-8
Figure 008-9
Figure 008-10
Figure 008-11
Figure 008-12
Figure 009-1
Figure 009-2
Figure 009-3
Figure 009-4
Figure 009-5
Figure 009-6
Figure 009-7
Figure 009-8
Figure 010-1
Figure 010-2
Figure 010-3
Figure 010-4
Figure 010-5
Figure 010-6
Figure 010-7
Figure 010-8
Figure 010-9
Figure 010-10
Figure 010-11
Figure 010-12
Figure 010-13
Figure 010-14
Figure 010-15
Figure 010-16
Figure 010-17
Figure 010-18
Figure 010-19
Figure 010-20
Figure 010-21
Figure 010-22
Figure 010-23
Figure 010-24

Connection of “FAN” Connector Cable (FAN BOX-PIM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Insertion of NFILU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Attaching of NFILU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Cabling Diagram of NFILU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Detail of Cable Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Detail of Cable Running (Multiple IMG Configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Connection of Power and Ground Cables to Power Receiving Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Example Connection Diagram-DC-DC Converter for Message Waiting Lamps . . . . . . . . . 77
Removal of Shorting Piece and Cable Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Placing the Clamp Terminal on the Die . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Clamping Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Stripped Length of Main and Branch Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Inserting of Cables into Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Clamping for Branch Jointing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Taping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Covering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Removal of Card Stopper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Extraction of Circuit Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Circuit Card Mounting (Partial Insertion) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Removal of Front Panel and Top Cover from CPR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Insertion of ISAGT and LANI Cards into CPR Slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Reattachment of CPR Top Cover and Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Accommodation of New CPR into LPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Insertion of New HFD into CPR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Locations of Connectors on the PIM Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Locations of Connectors on the LPM Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Location of Connectors on the TSWM Backplane (Multiple IMG Configuration) . . . . . . . 105
Locations of Connectors on the Power Distribution Terminal Board (PZ-M371) . . . . . . . 106
Power Cable Connections for 1-PIM System (Single IMG Configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Details on Power Cable Connections (for 1-PIM System) (Single IMG Configuration) . . . 108
Power Cable Connections for 2-PIM System (Single IMG Configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Details on Power Cable Connections (for 2-PIM System) (Single IMG Configuration) . . . 111
Power Cable Connections for 3-PIM System (Single IMG Configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Details on Power Cable Connections (for 3-PIM System) (Single IMG Configuration) . . . 114
Power Cable Connections for 4-PIM System (Single IMG Configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Details on Power Cable Connections (for 4-PIM System) (Single IMG Configuration) . . . 117
Power Cable Connection for IMG0 (Multiple IMG Configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Power Cable Connection for IMG1 (1-PIM System) (Multiple IMG Configuration) . . . . . . 121
Power Cable Connection for IMG1 (2-PIM System) (Multiple IMG Configuration) . . . . . . 123
Power Cable Connection for IMG1 (3-PIM System) (Multiple IMG Configuration) . . . . . . 125
Power Cable Connection for IMG1 (4-PIM System) (Multiple IMG Configuration) . . . . . . 127
Power Cable Connection for IMG2/3 (1-PIM System) (Multiple IMG Configuration) . . . . 129
Power Cable Connection for IMG2/3 (2-PIM System) (Multiple IMG Configuration) . . . . 131
Power Cable Connection for IMG2/3 (3-PIM System) (Multiple IMG Configuration) . . . . 133
Power Cable Connection for IMG2/3 (4-PIM System) (Multiple IMG Configuration) . . . . 135
Bus Cable Connections for 1-PIM System (Single IMG Configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Details on Bus Cable Connections (for 1-PIM System) (Single IMG Configuration) . . . . . 138
Bus Cable Connections for 2-PIM System (Single IMG Configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

LIST OF FIGURES
Page viii
Revision 3.0

Page

NDA-24234

LIST OF FIGURES (CONTINUED)
Figure

Title

Page

Figure 010-25
Figure 010-26
Figure 010-27
Figure 010-28
Figure 010-29
Figure 010-30
Figure 010-31
Figure 010-32
Figure 010-33
Figure 010-34
Figure 010-35
Figure 010-36
Figure 010-37
Figure 011-1
Figure 011-2
Figure 011-3
Figure 011-4
Figure 011-5
Figure 011-6
Figure 011-7
Figure 011-8
Figure 011-9
Figure 011-10
Figure 011-11
Figure 011-12
Figure 011-13
Figure 012-1
Figure 013-1
Figure 013-2
Figure 013-3
Figure 013-4
Figure 013-5
Figure 013-6
Figure 015-1
Figure 015-2
Figure 015-3
Figure 015-4
Figure 015-5
Figure 015-6
Figure 015-7
Figure 015-8
Figure 015-9
Figure 015-10
Figure 015-11
Figure 015-12
Figure 015-13
Figure 015-14
Figure 015-15

Details on Bus Cable Connections (for 2-PIM System) (Single IMG Configuration) . . . . . 141
Bus Cable Connections for 3-PIM System (Single IMG Configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Details on Bus Cable Connections (for 3-PIM System) (Single IMG Configuration) . . . . . 144
Bus Cable Connections for 4-PIM System (Single IMG Configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Details on Bus Cable Connections (for 4-PIM System) (Single IMG Configuration) . . . . . 147
Internal Bus Cable Connection for IMG0 (Multiple IMG Configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Internal Bus Cable Connection for IMG1 (1-PIM System) (Multiple IMG Configuration) . 151
Internal Bus Cable Connection for IMG1 (2-PIM System) (Multiple IMG Configuration) . 152
Internal Bus Cable Connection for IMG1 (3-PIM System) (Multiple IMG Configuration) . 154
Internal Bus Cable Connection for IMG1 (4-PIM System) (Multiple IMG Configuration) . 156
Internal Bus Cable Connection for IMG2/3 (2-PIM System) (Multiple IMG Configuration) 158
Internal Bus Cable Connection for IMG2/3 (3-PIM System) (Multiple IMG Configuration) 159
Internal Bus Cable Connection for IMG2/3 (4-PIM System) (Multiple IMG Configuration) 160
Inter-Frame ISA Bus Cable Connection for IMG0-IMG1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Inter-Frame Bus Cable Connection for IMG0-IMG1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Inter-Frame Bus Cable Connection for IMG1-IMG2 (1-PIM System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Inter-Frame Bus Cable Connection for IMG1-IMG2 (2-PIM System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Inter-Frame Bus Cable Connection for IMG1-IMG2 (3-PIM System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Inter-Frame Bus Cable Connection for IMG1-IMG2 (4-PIM System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Inter-Frame Bus Cable Connection for IMG1-IMG3 (1-PIM System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Inter-Frame Bus Cable Connection for IMG1-IMG3 (2-PIM System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Inter-Frame Bus Cable Connection for IMG1-IMG3 (3-PIM System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Inter-Frame Bus Cable Connection for IMG1-IMG3 (4-PIM System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Inter-Frame Alarm Bus Cable Connection for IMG0-IMG1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Inter-Frame Alarm Bus Cable Connection for IMG0-IMG2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Inter-Frame Alarm Bus Cable Connection for IMG0-IMG3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Front Cable Connections between Circuit Cards for CCIS/ISDN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
LT Cable Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Cable Routing of Circuit Card Front Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Example of Cable Tying Using Tie-Wrap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Cable Support Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Clamp Winding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Termination of Installation Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Cross Connection of Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Cross Connection of Trunks (C.O. Lines and Tie Lines) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Mounting Locations of PFT (PA-M53) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Cross Connection for PFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Connection of Alarm Indicating Panel and Music on Hold (Single IMG Configuration) . . 208
Connection of Alarm Indicating Panel (Multiple IMG Configuration) (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Connection of Music on Hold (Multiple IMG Configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Cable Connection Diagram for TAS (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Outer View of External Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Connection of External Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Connection of Announcement Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Connection of Paging Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Outer View of Dterm Series E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Cable Connection for Dterm Series E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
PLO Pin Assignments for Receiving Clock (Single IMG Configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

NDA-24234

LIST OF FIGURES
Page ix
Revision 3.0

LIST OF FIGURES (CONTINUED)
Figure

Title

Page

Figure 015-16 PLO Pin Assignments for Receiving Clock (Multiple IMG Configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Figure 015-17 Cable Connection Diagram for Accepting Synchronization Clocks
from an External High-Stability Oscillator (Single IMG Configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Figure 015-18 Cable Connection Diagram for Accepting Synchronization Clocks
from an External High-Stability Oscillator (Multiple IMG Configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Figure 015-19 Cable Connection Diagram for Distributing Clock from a Digital Interface
(Single IMG Configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Figure 015-20 Cable Connection Diagram for Distributing Clock from a Digital Interface
(Multiple IMG Configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Figure 016-1 Outer View of Desk Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Figure 016-2 Cable Connection Diagram for Desk Console (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Figure 016-3 Cable Connection Diagram (When the Power Is Supplied from the PBX) . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Figure 016-4 Cable Connection Diagram (When Using Local Power Supply) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Figure 016-5 Cable Connection Diagram for DESK CONSOLE Modular Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Figure 016-6 Headset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Figure 016-7 Mounting of Handset (Left Side of DESK CONSOLE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Figure 016-8 Mounting of Handset (Right Side of DESK CONSOLE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Figure 016-9 RECC Card Cable Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Figure 016-10 Three DESK CONSOLEs and One Recording Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Figure 016-11 Six DESK CONSOLEs and One Recording Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Figure 016-12 8-core Line Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Figure 016-13 Connection of AC-DC Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Figure 016-14 Add-On Console Cable Connection Diagram
(When the Power Is Supplied from the PBX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Figure 016-15 Add-On Console Cable Connection Diagram (When Using Local Power Supply) . . . . . . 251
Figure 016-16 Cable Connection Diagram for Add-On Console Modular Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Figure 016-17 Mounting of Add-On Console (Right Side of DESK CONSOLE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Figure 016-18 Mounting of Add-On Console (Left Side of DESK CONSOLE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Figure 016-19 Connection of AC-DC Adapter for Add-On Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Figure 016-20 Displaying the Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Figure 016-21 Selecting a Configuration Item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Figure 016-22 Assigning Configuration Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Figure 016-23 Updating Configuration Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Figure 017-1 Cabling of MAT when Using Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Figure 017-2 Cable Connection Diagram for the MAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Figure 017-3 Cabling of MAT Using Modems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Figure 017-4 Connection of System Message Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Figure 017-5 Detail of RS-232C CA-(0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Figure 017-6 Detail of RS-232C CA-(1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Figure 017-7 Detail of RS-232C CA-(3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Figure 018-1 I/O Port Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Figure 018-2 Cable Connection Diagram for the SMDR Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Figure 018-3 Connection of SMDR by Using MODEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Figure 022-1 LED Indications in Normal Operation (Single IMG Configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Figure 022-2 LED Indications of IMG0 in Normal Operation (Multiple IMG Configuration) . . . . . . . . . . 301
Figure 022-3 LED Indications of IMG1 in Normal Operation (Multiple IMG Configuration) . . . . . . . . . . 302
Figure 022-4 LED Indications of IMG 2/3 in Normal Operation (example) (Multiple IMG Configuration) 303
Figure 023-1 Alarm Lamps on the TOPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304

LIST OF FIGURES
Page x
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

LIST OF FIGURES (CONTINUED)
Figure

Title

Page

Figure 5-1
Figure 026-1
Figure 026-2
Figure 026-3
Figure 026-4
Figure 026-5
Figure 026-6
Figure 026-7
Figure 027-1
Figure 032-1
Figure 032-2
Figure 032-3
Figure 047-1
Figure 047-2
Figure 048-1
Figure 049-1
Figure 049-2
Figure 7-1
Figure 7-2
Figure 7-3
Figure 7-4
Figure 7-5
Figure 7-6
Figure 7-7
Figure 7-8
Figure 7-9
Figure 7-10
Figure 7-11

Example of Entry to Test Check Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
How to Perform a Control System Changeover (Single IMG Configuration) . . . . . . . . . . 314
How to Perform a Control System Changeover (Multiple IMG Configuration) . . . . . . . . . 314
LEDs and Switches on TSW/MUX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
LEDs and Switches for System Changeover (Multiple IMG Configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . 317
System Block Diagram (TSW and MUX) (Multiple IMG Configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
System Block Diagram (GT and Other Controlling Blocks) (Multiple IMG Configuration) 319
System Block Diagram (Speech Path) (Multiple IMG Configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
System Initialization via ‘Start’ Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
COT Test Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
TLT Test Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
DTI Test Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Combination of Tie Line Network and Public Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Tie Line Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Test of Tandem Connection to Tie Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Example of PAD Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Example of PAD Setting for CCIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Mounting of the Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Side Cover Mounting Method (BASEU+LPR+PIM0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Side Cover Mounting Method (PIM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Rear Cover Mounting Method (BASEU+LPR+PIM0). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Rear Cover Mounting Method (PIM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Rear Cover Mounting Method (FANU). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Front Cover Mounting Method (BASEU+LPR+PIM0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Front Cover Mounting Method (PIM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Front Cover Mounting Method (FANU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Locations of Inter-frame Brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
How to Attach Inter-frame Brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376

NDA-24234

LIST OF FIGURES
Page xi
Revision 3.0

This page is for your notes.

LIST OF FIGURES
Page xii
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

LIST OF TABLES
Table

Title

Page

Table 2-1
Table 2-2
Table 2-3
Table 2-4
Table 2-5
Table 2-6
Table 2-7
Table 2-8
Table 2-9
Table 2-10
Table 2-11
Table 002-1
Table 008-1
Table 010-1
Table 010-2
Table 010-3
Table 010-4
Table 010-5
Table 010-6
Table 010-7
Table 010-8
Table 010-9
Table 010-10
Table 010-11
Table 010-12
Table 010-13
Table 010-14
Table 010-15
Table 010-16
Table 010-17
Table 010-18
Table 010-19
Table 010-20
Table 010-21
Table 010-22
Table 010-23
Table 011-1
Table 011-2
Table 011-3
Table 011-4
Table 011-5
Table 011-6
Table 011-7
Table 011-8
Table 011-9
Table 011-10
Table 011-11
Table 011-12

Temperature and Humidity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Typical Installation Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Conditions for Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Controlling Circuit Cards in LPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Controlling Circuit Cards in PIM 0 (Single IMG Configuration Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Controlling Circuit Cards in PIM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Controlling Circuit Cards in TSWM (Multiple IMG Configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Clamp Terminal Shape and Purpose. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Selection of T-type Clamp Terminal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Clamping Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Calculation of Number of Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Specification of Anchor Bolts-Sleeve Expansion Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Stripped Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Quick Reference Table (1/6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Power Cable Connection for IMG0 (Single IMG Configuration). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Power Cable Connections for 2-PIM System (Single IMG Configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Power Cable Connections for 3-PIM System (Single IMG Configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Power Cable Connections for 4-PIM System (Single IMG Configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Power Cable Connection for IMG0 (Multiple IMG Configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Power Cable Connection for IMG1 (1-PIM System) (Multiple IMG Configuration) . . . . . 122
Power Cable Connection for IMG1 (2-PIM System) (Multiple IMG Configuration) . . . . . 124
Power Cable Connection for IMG1 (3-PIM System) (Multiple IMG Configuration) . . . . . 126
Power Cable Connection for IMG1 (4-PIM System) (Multiple IMG Configuration) . . . . . 128
Power Cable Connection for IMG2/3 (1-PIM System) (Multiple IMG Configuration) . . . . 130
Power Cable Connection for IMG2/3 (2-PIM System) (Multiple IMG Configuration) . . . . 132
Power Cable Connection for IMG2/3 (3-PIM System) (Multiple IMG Configuration) . . . . 134
Power Cable Connection for IMG2/3 (4-PIM System) (Multiple IMG Configuration) . . . . 136
Bus Cable Connections for 1-PIM System (Single IMG Configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Bus Cable Connections for 2-PIM System (Single IMG Configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Bus Cable Connections for 3-PIM System (Single IMG Configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Bus Cable Connections for 4-PIM System (Single IMG Configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Internal Bus Cable Connection for IMG0 (Multiple IMG Configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Internal Bus Cable Connection for IMG1 (1-PIM System) (Multiple IMG Configuration) . 151
Internal Bus Cable Connection for IMG1 (2-PIM System) (Multiple IMG Configuration) . 153
Internal Bus Cable Connection for IMG1 (3-PIM System) (Multiple IMG Configuration) . 155
Internal Bus Cable Connection for IMG1 (4-PIM System) (Multiple IMG Configuration) . 157
Inter-Frame ISA Bus Cable Connection for IMG0-IMG1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Inter-Frame Bus Cable Connection for IMG0-IMG1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Inter-Frame Bus Cable Connection for IMG1-IMG2 (1-PIM System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Inter-Frame Bus Cable Connection for IMG1-IMG2 (2-PIM System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Inter-Frame Bus Cable Connection for IMG1-IMG2 (3-PIM System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Inter-Frame Bus Cable Connection for IMG1-IMG2 (4-PIM System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Inter-Frame Bus Cable Connection for IMG1-IMG3 (1-PIM System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Inter-Frame Bus Cable Connection for IMG1-IMG3 (2-PIM System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Inter-Frame Bus Cable Connection for IMG1-IMG3 (3-PIM System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Inter-Frame Bus Cable Connection for IMG1-IMG3 (4-PIM System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Inter-Frame Alarm Bus Cable Connection for IMG0-IMG1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Inter-Frame Alarm Bus Cable Connection for IMG0-IMG2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
NDA-24234

LIST OF TABLES
Page xiii
Revision 3.0

LIST OF TABLES (CONTINUED)
Table

Title

Page

Table 011-13 Inter-Frame Alarm Bus Cable Connection for IMG0-IMG3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Table 013-1
Cable Support Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

LIST OF TABLES
Page xiv
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS
IMPORTANT — SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS
(1)

Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm.

(2)

Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is specifically designed for wet locations.

(3)

Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been disconnected at the network interface.

(4)

Use caution when installing or moving telephone lines.

When using your telephone equipment, basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce the
risk of fire, electric shock and injury, including the following:
(5)

Read and understand all instructions.

(6)

Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the product.

(7)

Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners. Use a damp cloth for cleaning.

(8)

Do not use this product near water; for example, under water pipes near a bath tub, sink, or laundry
tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool.

(9)

Do not place this product on an unstable cart, stand, or table. The product may fall, causing serious
damage to the product.

(10) Slots and openings in the cabinet and the back or bottom are provided for ventilation, to protect it
from overheating. These openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings should never be
blocked by placing the product on a bed, sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This product should never be placed near or over a radiator or heat register. This product should not be placed in a built-in
installation unless proper ventilation is provided.
(11) This product should be operated only from the type of power source indicated on the marking label.
If you are not sure of the type of power source available, consult with your local power company.
(12) This product normally connected with a three wire grounding type plug, a plug having a third
(grounding) pin. This plug will only fit into a grounding type power outlet. This is a safety feature. If
you are unable to insert the plug into the outlet, contact an electrician to replace your obsolete outlet.
Do not defeat the safety purpose of the grounding type plug.
(13) Do not allow anything to rest on the power cord. Do not locate this product where the cord will be
abused by persons walking on it.
(14) Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords as this can result in the risk of fire or electric shock.
NDA-24234

SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS
Page xv
Revision 3.0

(15) Never push objects of any kind into this product through cabinet slots as they may touch dangerous
voltage points or short out parts that could result in a risk of fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid
of any kind on the product.
(16) To reduce the risk of electric shock, do not disassemble this product, but take it to a qualified serviceman when some service or repair work is required. Opening or removing covers may expose
you to dangerous voltages or other risks. Incorrect reassembly can cause electric shock when the
appliance is subsequently used.
(17) Unplug this product from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the
following conditions:
(a)

When the power supply cord or plug is damaged or frayed.

(b)

If liquid has been spilled into the product.

(c)

If the product has been exposed to rain or water.

(d)

If the product does not operate normally by following the operating instructions. Adjust only
those controls, that are covered by the operating instructions because improper adjustment of
other controls may result in damage and will often require extensive work by a qualified technician to restore the product to normal operation.

(e)

If the product has been dropped or the cabinet has been damaged.

(f)

If the product exhibits a distinct change in performance.

(18) Avoid using a telephone (other than a cordless type) during an electrical storm. There may be a remote risk of electric shock from lightning.
(19) Do not use the telephone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak.

SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS
Page xvi
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

REGULATORY INFORMATION
1. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) has established rules that permit the NEAX2400 IMX to be
directly connected to the telephone network. A jack is provided on party lines or coin lines.
The telephone company may make changes in its technical operations and procedures. If such changes affect
the compatibility or use of the NEAX2400 IMX, the telephone company is required to give adequate notice of
the changes.
This equipment complies with the requirements in Part 15 of FCC Rules for a Class A computing device. Operation of this equipment in a residential area may cause unacceptable interference to radio and TV reception
requiring the operator to take whatever steps are necessary to correct this interference.
2. FCC PART 15 REQUIREMENTS
In compliance with FCC Part 15 Rules, the following statement is provided:
WARNING
This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and if
not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause interference to radio communications. It has been tested and found to comply with
the limits for a Class A computing device pursuant to Subpart J of Part 15 of FCC
Rules, which are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference when operated in a commercial environment. Operation of this equipment
in a residential area is likely to cause interference in which case the user at his
own expense will be required to take whatever measures may be required to correct the interference.

3. FCC PART 68 REGISTRATION
3.1 Company Notification

Before installing the NEAX2400 IMX to the telephone network, the telephone company must be provided with
the following:
•

Your telephone number

•

The FCC registration numbers:
• PBX:
• Hybrid:

JAPAN
AY5JPN-74906-PF-E
AY5JPN-74904-MF-E

USA
AY5USA-74905-PF-E
AY5USA-74913-MF-E

The Ringer Equivalence Number is 2.1B; the required USOC jacks are RJ21X, RJ2EX, and RJ2GX.

NDA-24234

REGULATORY INFORMATION
Page xvii
Revision 3.0

3.2 Service Requirements

In the event of equipment malfunction, all repairs will be performed by NEC or an authorized distributor of
NEC. It is the responsibility of users requiring service to report the need for service to NEC or to one of their
authorized distributors.
If the equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that
temporary discontinuance of service may be required. If advance notice is not practical, the telephone company
will notify the customer as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the
FCC if you believe it is necessary.
The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that affect the
operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you
to make necessary modifications in order to maintain uninterrupted service.
If trouble is experienced with this equipment, please contact NEC America, Inc.’s Oregon plant at (503) 6485000 for repair and/or warranty information. If the trouble is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you remove the equipment from the network until the problem is resolved.
NO REPAIRS CAN BE DONE BY THE CUSTOMER.
3.3 Location of FCC Compliance Labels

Labels stating the NEAX2400 IMX FCC registration number and compliance with FCC Parts 15 and 68 are attached to the Base Unit. If the unit is in a table-top configuration, the labels are located on the side of the enclosure. The appearance of the labels is as shown below:
COMPLIES WITH PART 68 FCC RULES
NEAX2400 IMX
FCC registration numbers:

AY5USA-74905-PF-E
AY5USA-74913-MF-E

Ringer Equivalence:

2.1B

NEC
NEC America
Made In U.S.A.
4. DIRECT-INWARD DIALING (DID) CALLS
Allowing this equipment to be operated in such a manner as to not provide for proper answer supervision is a
violation of Part 68 of the FCC’s rules.
PROPER ANSWER SUPERVISION IS WHEN:
(a) This equipment returns answer supervision to the PSTN when DID calls are:
• Answered by the called station
• Answered by the attendant

REGULATORY INFORMATION
Page xviii
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

• Routed to a recorded announcement that can be administered by the CPE user
• Routed to a dial prompt
(b) This equipment returns answer supervision on all DID calls forwarded to the PSTN. Permissible exceptions are:
• A call is unanswered
• A busy tone is received
• A reorder tone is received.
EQUAL ACCESS REQUIREMENTS
This equipment is capable of providing users access to interstate providers of operator services through the use
of access codes. Modification of this equipment by call aggregators to block access dialing codes is a violation
of the Telephone Operator Consumers Act of 1990.
5. REGULATORY INFORMATION ON SINGLE-LINE ANALOG TELEPHONES
NEC single-line telephones comply with Part 68 of FCC Rules. On the bottom of the equipment is a label that
states, among other information, the FCC registration number and ringer equivalence number (REN) for the
equipment. If requested, this information should be provided to the telephone company.
The equipment uses the following USOC jacks: RJ11C.
The equipment should be used only behind a PBX or KTS. The REN is used to determine the quantity of devices
that may be connected to the telephone line. Excessive RENs on the telephone line may result in the devices not
ringing in response to an incoming call. In most, but not all, areas, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0).
To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to the line as determined by the total RENs, contact
the telephone company to determine the maximum REN for the calling area.
6. HEARING AID COMPATIBILITY
The Dterm terminals provided for the NEAX2400 IMX are hearing aid compatible. FCC rules prohibit the use
of non-hearing aid compatible telephones.
NEC-type single-line telephone sets used in conjunction with the NEAX2400 IMX are hearing aid compatible.
If other than NEC-type single-line telephone sets are to be used with this system, ensure that these are hearing
aid compatible.
CAUTION: The act of monitoring or recording telephone conversations under certain circumstances may vi-

olate federal or state statutes. Consultation with your legal counsel prior to engaging in such practices would be advisable.
7. INDUSTRY CANADA CS-03
Certification number: 140 5452A
Load Number of the equipment: 100
NOTICE: The Industry Canada label identifies certified equipment. The certification means that the equipment
meets certain telecommunications network protective operational and safety requirements. The department does
not guarantee the equipment will operate to the user’s satisfaction.
NDA-24234

REGULATORY INFORMATION
Page xix
Revision 3.0

Before installing the equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the
local telecommunications company. The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection. In some cases, the company’s inside wiring associated with a single line individual service may be extended by means of a certified connector assembly (telephone extension cord). The customer should be aware
that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations.
Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance facility designated by
the supplier. Any repairs or installations made by the user to this equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may
give the telecommunications company cause to request that the user disconnect the equipment.
Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility, telephone lines, and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are connected together. This protection may be
particularly important in rural areas.
CAUTION: Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but should contact the appropri-

ate electric inspection authority, or electrician, as appropriate.
NOTICE: The Load Number assigned to each terminal device denotes the percentage of the total load to be connected to a telephone loop which is used by the device, to prevent overloading. The termination on a loop may
consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the total of the load numbers of all
the devices does not exceed 100.
8. SAFETY LISTING/CERTIFICATIONS
This equipment has been listed by Underwriters Laboratories and found to comply with all the applicable requirements of the standard for telephone equipment U.L. 1459. This equipment complies with Canadian Standards Association standard C 22.2 No. 225.
8.1 Safety Considerations

When using your telephone equipment, basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce the risk of
fire, electric shock and injury, including the following:
1.

Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm.

2.

Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is specifically designed for wet locations.

3.

Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been disconnected at
the network interface.

4.

Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines.

NOTICE: Also follow the precautionary items listed under “Safety Considerations” on the previous pages.

REGULATORY INFORMATION
Page xx
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 1

INTRODUCTION

1. GENERAL
During the period from equipment carry-in of the NEAX2400 IMX – referred to in the remainder of this manual
as “the PBX”– till it is placed in service, the following must be performed:
•

Installation of the system and its peripheral equipment

•

System startup

•

Installation test

•

Miscellaneous jobs

This manual explains how to proceed with these activities, and related precautions. It is recommended that the
installer thoroughly read Section 2., “HOW TO FOLLOW THE MANUAL” before engaging in any phase of
the installation.
2. HOW TO FOLLOW THE MANUAL
2.1 Outline

The work required to be performed is divided into the following chapters. Basically, the work is performed in
the order of these chapters:
•

Chapter 2, “INSTALLATION DESIGN”
This chapter explains installation design and preparation of the required installation materials.

•

Chapter 3, “INSTALLATION PROCEDURE”
This chapter explains the procedures pertaining to equipment carry-in, installation, power supply (cabling,
wiring), etc., of the system, and also explains the installation procedures concerning peripheral equipment
(MDF, Rectifier, Terminal Equipment.).

•

Chapter 4, “SYSTEM STARTUP”
This chapter explains the procedures for initial power-on and office data entry upon completion of the system installation.

•

Chapter 5, “INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE”
This chapter explains the test procedures to be performed, upon completion of the system startup, to determine:
• If the system operates as directed by the office data.
• Whether reinitialization or system changeover can be performed.
• Whether the interface with the associated distant office is normal.

•

Chapter 6, “FAULT RECOVERY DURING TESTS”
This chapter explains the recovery procedure which the installer needs to follow in case of a fault occurrence while engaging in work pertaining to system startup and basic connections.

•

Chapter 7, “WORK AFTER INSTALLATION TESTS”
This chapter explains various kinds of work and site cleaning, etc. which must be performed after completion of installation tests so that the system can be cut over normally.
NDA-24234

CHAPTER 1
Page 1
Revision 3.0

INTRODUCTION

2.2 How to Follow NAPs

This manual categorizes the work contents of installation, system startup and installation tests into detailed work
items, and an NEC Action Procedure (NAP) number is assigned to each of such work item.
The following shows how to interpret a NAP number.
NAP- XXX-XXX
Serial Number (000-999) Note
Work Category Number
200: Installation
215: System Startup, Installation Test, Fault Recovery
Note:

Performing NAPs in sequential order by serial numbers is recommended.

Figure 1-1 shows an example of an NAP.

CHAPTER 1
Page 2
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INTRODUCTION

NAP Number
Sheet Number of NAP
Title of NAP

NAP- 200-004
Sheet 3/3
Installation of the Base Unit

1.

INSTALLING THE BASE UNIT USING A SPECIAL STAND

START
Securing the Base Unit

Secure the Base Unit onto the special stand as per Figure
004-4.

Level Check

Check the level of the Base Unit. If necessary, adjust the
level by inserting spacers beneath the Base Unit.

END

BASE U
BOLT (M-10)
LOCK WASHER
PLAIN WASHER

SPECIAL STAND

Figure 1-1 Example of NAP

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 1
Page 3
Revision 3.0

INTRODUCTION

2.3 How To Follow Trees

This manual explains performance of a predetermined procedure (work contents covered in each NAP) in a
“Tree” format as shown in Figure 1-2. Before engaging in the intended work, be sure to understand the work
contents by tracing the given tree.

START
On the MDF, make temporary cross connections between the Trunk for Direct-In Termination (DIT)
and an LC.
C.O. Line Incoming Call

Station “B” dials the number of LC “C” (Station “C”).

Incoming Call to Station via
DIT Trunk

The call terminates to Station “A”; Station “A” rings.
Confirm that the ringing is distinct from that of an intraoffice call or ordinary C.O. call.
• The ringing signal for Direct-In Termination calls can
be the same as that used for C.O. calls if the related
Office Data is assigned.
System Data SYS1, INDEX 72, SYS3, INDEX 0, and
parameter DR of Command “ARTD”.

Answer and Talk

Station “A” goes off-hook.
Station “A” and “B” talk with each other.

Release

Station “A” and “B” both go on-hook.

Remove the temporary cross connections.

END
Figure 1-2 Example of a Tree

CHAPTER 1
Page 4
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INTRODUCTION

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

Figure 1-3 Static Caution Indication

This manual provides “Static Caution” indicators (see Figure 1-3) on pages where work involving static-sensitive components is described.
The 3M Model 8012 Portable Field Service Kit, shown in Figure 1-4, is recommended as an effective countermeasure against static electricity.

Connect ground wire to the Earth
terminal of the Module Group.

Place the Circuit
Card on a
conductive sheet.

Wrist Strap

Figure 1-4 3M Model 8012 Portable Field Service Kit
Note:

3M is a registered trademark of Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing, Inc.

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 1
Page 5
Revision 3.0

INTRODUCTION

2.4 Figure and Table Numbers

Each Figure and Table within this manual are numbered as shown below.
1.

Figure and table in NAP
Figure XXX-X
Serial number of Figures in each NAP
Serial number (000-999) of the NAP in which the Figure exists.

2.

Other figure and table
Table X-X
Serial number of Table in each Chapter
Number of the Chapter in which the Table exists.

Understanding this numbering rule will help you when looking for the desired Figure or Table.
2.5 Essential/Critical Information

To prevent accidents or equipment damage from occurring while work is being performed, each manual provides WARNING, CAUTION, and Note: indications to draw the technician’s attention to specific matters.
1.

Note:

2.

Meaning
WARNING:

Personal injury may result if the warning is not heeded.

CAUTION:

Damage to the equipment and/or the system may result if the caution is not heeded.

Indicates an item which requires special attention.
Locations of Indicators
WARNING and CAUTION indications are located at the top of the page. Notes are included as part of the

work procedures on the page.

CHAPTER 1
Page 6
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 2

INSTALLATION DESIGN

1. GENERAL
This chapter provides information pertaining to installation design and preparation of the required installation
materials. The following topics are discussed:
•

Environmental Requirements

•

Floor Space

•

Floor Load Requirements

•

Equipment Room Requirements

•

Power Supply Requirements

•

MDF Requirements

•

Installation Tools

•

System Accommodation

•

Installation Cables

2. ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
The PBX is sensitive to the same rises in temperature and humidity as a computer. Air conditioning may be required, depending on the installation environment. The following paragraphs address the following environmental conditions.
•

Temperature and Humidity

•

Heat Generation from Switching Equipment

2.1 Temperature And Humidity

Table 2-1 shows the environmental conditions required in the switching equipment room.
If the switching system is operated in an environment that does not meet these specifications, the reliability of
the switching equipment may be impaired. Improper operating conditions can cause circuit boards, etc., to deteriorate. Therefore, to enable the equipment to operate for the extent of its expected lifetime, careful consideration must be given to the location of the equipment, and to proper ventilation and air conditioning.
If no equipment is provided to remove the heat generated by the system, or if the temperature or humidity fluctuates repeatedly, the system’s electronic parts can be adversely affected. Such conditions will promote corrosion of metal parts and deterioration of insulation, thereby lowering the overall reliability of the system.

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 2
Page 7
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION DESIGN

Table 2-1 Temperature and Humidity

During
Operations

TEMPERATURE

RELATIVE
HUMIDITY

Normal Operations

5°C - 30°C (41°F -86°F)

15% - 65%

Short Period Note

0°C - 40°C (32°F-104°F)

15% - 90%

–18°C - 50°C (0°F -122°F)

8% - 90%

Max. 5°C/30 Min. (9°F/30 Min.)

90%

During Storage & In Transit
Temperature Change
Note:

REMARKS

A short period means a period not exceeding three consecutive days (72 hours) or 15 days (360 hours) in
a year.

2.2 Heat Generation From Switching Equipment

Figure 2-1 shows heat generation from the switching equipment with respect to current consumption.

BTU/HT
(2.1 m)

(1.8 m)

(1.5 m)

(1.2 m)

(.9 m)

(.6 m)

100

200

300

400

500

600

700

800

900

No. of PORTS

Note:

BTU; British Thermal Unit (1 BTU=1058.4J)
Figure 2-1 Heat Generation from Switching Equipment for the PBX

CHAPTER 2
Page 8
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

1000

INSTALLATION DESIGN

3. FLOOR SPACE
1.

The PBX requires floor space for the following system equipment:
• Switching Equipment (Module Group)
• Maintenance Administration Terminal (MAT)
• MDF
• Rectifier
• Batteries
• Attendant Console

2.

3.

The required floor space for the various equipment rooms is as follows.
• Switching Equipment Room:

For installing the Module Group, MAT, MDF and Rectifier

• Battery Room:

For installing Batteries

• Operator Room:

For installing an Attendant Console with desk and chair

Equipment Room: Free Access Floor or Computer Floor

4. FLOOR LOAD REQUIREMENTS
Required floor capacities are as follows:
• Switching Equipment Room:

More than 3430 Pa (71.6 pounds per square foot)

• Operator Room:

More than 2940 Pa (61.4 pounds per square foot)

5. EQUIPMENT ROOM REQUIREMENTS
The following floor conditions should be considered prior to installation:
5.1 Floor Surface

1.

Switching Equipment Room
• The maximum difference in floor level at each point within the room should be less than +5mm (0.2
inch).
• An elevated-type floor such as Free Access floor or computer room floor should be constructed.

2.

Battery Room
• It is recommended that the floor have a slope (1/1000) and drain at the end of the slope.
• The floor surface should be made of acid-resistant materials.

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 2
Page 9
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION DESIGN

5.2 Wall

Switching Equipment Room
• A Concrete wall is necessary so that cable racks can be installed (unless a free-access floor is used).
• It is recommended that the walls be painted so that the wall materials do not generate dust, etc.
• The maximum difference in level at the wall surface should be less than +5 mm (0.2 inch).
5.3 Ceiling

Switching Equipment Room
• The required ceiling height is more than 2.3 meters (7.5 feet).
5.4 Lighting Facilities

1.

Switching Equipment Room
• Fluorescent lamps are recommended.
• No less than 200 lux at the floor level is necessary.

2.

Operator Room
• Fluorescent lamps are recommended.
• No less than 200 lux at the floor level is necessary.

3.

Battery Room
• Anti-explosion type lamps must be utilized.
• No less than 150 lux at the floor level is necessary.

6. POWER SUPPLY REQUIREMENTS
6.1 Main Source Power

The PBX requires an operating power of -48 V DC ±5V DC. This DC operating power is supplied from the
rectifier which receives AC power from the commercial AC power source. For greater system reliability, it is
recommended that the PBX be supplied with backup DC operating power for a predetermined duration from the
batteries installed as the auxiliary power supply source.
The batteries for the PBX must be connected in parallel with the -48 V DC output of the rectifier. Also, when
installing batteries, an EMF panel must be placed in-line (series) with the input -48 V DC supplied to the PBX.
This panel is necessary when changing the state of the rectifier from float to equalize and vice versa.

CHAPTER 2
Page 10
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION DESIGN

Note 1: When the rectifier is in the equalize state (charging the batteries), the output DC voltage should be 1.5 to

2 volts higher than the float voltage. For example: the voltages for floating and equalizing are listed below:
Float: 50.5 V DC
Equalize: 52 V DC (Refer to Note 2.)
Note 2: The Equalize voltage is 1.5 to 2 V higher when an EMF panel (Diode Drop) is utilized. When an EMF panel

is not provided, the Float and Equalize Voltage must be the same (50.5 V).
Note 3: The main source power is AC input.
Note 4: Noise present in the -48 V output from the rectifier should be less than 5 mV.
6.2 Current Consumption

The PBX operates on -48 V ±5 V DC which is supplied from external power equipment (the rectifier and the
battery).
Various DC voltages required within the system are provided by the DC-DC converter in each module. The DCDC converter, upon receiving the -48 V DC source power, converts it into various DC voltages and supplies
them to the associated circuits.
Figure 2-2 shows the current consumption of the PBX.

(AMPS)
35

30

25

DC
-48V

20

15

10

5

100

200

300

400

500

600

700

800

900

1000

No. of PORTS

Figure 2-2 Current Consumption of the PBX
NDA-24234

CHAPTER 2
Page 11
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION DESIGN

6.3 Power Distribution Box Requirements

1.

The Power Distribution Box (PDB) should be installed with the following considerations:

2.

The AC power source service outlet and the fuse for the junction box should be provided independently of
any equipment other than the switching equipment.

3.

A warning notice should be attached to be PDB circuit breaker so that it will not be turned off accidentally.

4.

The Power Distribution Box should be installed at a location that is easy to reach.

5.

The Power Distribution Box should be installed at a location where the connecting cables extending to the
switching equipment will not be broken accidentally.

6.

The PDB cables should be run in such a way that they do not hamper the technician performing the installation.

7.

The Personal Computer (MAT) must have a separate AC service outlet.

6.4 Grounding

System grounding must have a specific ground resistance and AC noise level and is to be connected to a predetermined terminal in the PBX.
Standard grounding requirements are shown below.
•

Communication grounding:

Less than 1 ohm

•

Security ground for Module Group:

Less than 1 ohm

•

Grounding for the line protector of the MDF:

Less than 1 ohm

Note:

The AC ripple of various types of grounding should be less than 1/2 V-pp.

7. MDF REQUIREMENTS
Either a self-standing or wall-mounted type MDF can be used. The MDF must be equipped with the following
types of terminal blocks.
•

Arrester board for C.O. lines and external lines

•

Test spring terminals for localization tests

•

Local Block terminals

The number of terminals is to be determined according to the circuit configuration of the PBX and the number
of local lines.

CHAPTER 2
Page 12
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION DESIGN

8. INSTALLATION TOOLS
Table 2-2 shows the tools used in a typical NEAX2400 IMX installation.
Table 2-2 Typical Installation Tools
FUNCTION

TOOLS

PURPOSE

Marking

•
•
•
•

Steel Tape Measure
L-Square
Iron Square
Iron Level

• Center Punch
• Step Ladder
• Scriber

For Leveling and
Marking Plumb
Line

Drilling

•
•
•
•
•

Electric Drill
Electric Vibration Drill
Hammer
Point Drill
Drill Bit for Concrete

•
•
•
•

Concrete Chisel
Drill Bit for Metal
Power Cable Drum
Extension Cable

Drilling

Module Group and • Plump Bob
Rack Installation
• Jigsaw
• Hacksaw Frame
• Hacksaw Blade
• Flat File
• Half Round File
• Set File
• Adjustable Angle Wrench

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Frame Cart
Cutter
Set Wrench
Socket Wrench Set
Step Ladder
Phillips Screwdriver
Screwdriver
Plastic Hammer

Module Group and
Rack Installation

Power Cable
Installation

• Clamping Tool
(for End Terminal,
Branch Terminal)

• Phillips Screwdriver
• Screwdriver
• Cutter

Miscellaneous

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Circuit Tester
Pocket Measure
Scissors
Wire Clipper
Cable Cutter
Nipper
Wire Stripper
Round Nose Pliers
Non-Metallic Stick
Solder-Helper
Solder Sucker
IC Clip
Mini Test Probe

Power Cable
Installation
See Note.

Telephone Set
Working Lamp
Wrapping Tool
Unwrapping Tool
Soldering Iron
Soldering Iron Stand
Connector Clamping Tool
Logic Checker and Counter
Pen Light
Precision Screwdriver (+)(-)
IC Buzzer
Tweezer
Portable Field Service Kit

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 2
Page 13
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION DESIGN

9. SYSTEM ACCOMMODATION
9.1 System Accommodation

Module Group Configuration and Conditions for Configuration
The module group configuration of the PBX is shown in Figure 2-3, and the conditions for configuration are
shown in Table 2-3.
Single IMG Configuration
4-PIM
TOPU
3-PIM
PIM3

BSCM

TOPU

PIM2

PIM2

2-PIM

FANU

FANU

TOPU/FANU

PIM1

PIM1

PIM1

PIM0

PIM0

PIM0

LPR

BSCM

BASEU
max. 1536 ports
(2048 time slots)

BSCM

LPR

LPR

BASEU

BASEU
max. 768 ports
(1024 time slots)

max. 1152 ports
(1536 time slots)

1-PIM
TOPU/FANU
PIM0
BSCM

LPR
BASEU
max. 384 ports
(512 time slots)

FRONT VIEW
Fully Expanded System
IMG0

IMG1

IMG2

IMG3

TOPU

TOPU

TOPU

TOPU

PIM3

PIM3

PIM3

PIM3

PIM2

PIM2

PIM2

PIM2

FANU

FANU

FANU

FANU

PIM1

PIM1

PIM1

PIM1

PIM0

PIM0

PIM0

PIM0

LPM

TSWM

DUMMY

DUMMY

BASEU

BASEU

BASEU

BASEU

FRONT VIEW
TOPU:
PIM
FANU
LPR/LPM
BASEU
TSWM

Top Unit
Port Interface Module
Fan Unit
Local Processor Rack/Module
Base Unit
Time Division Switch Module

Figure 2-3 System Configuration
CHAPTER 2
Page 14
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION DESIGN

Table 2-3 Conditions for Configuration
UNIT NAME

FANU
(Fan Unit)

2nd NFILU
(Noise Filter)

NUMBER OF MODULES

PIM
Less than two modules

Mounted in TOPU

PIM
Three or more modules

Mounted in between the 2nd PIM and
the 3rd PIM

Less than two modules

Not required

Three or more modules

Mounted in BASEU

TOPU
(Top Unit)
Note:

CONDITIONS

REMARKS

Equipped with PZ-DK222 (KEY) and
PZ-DK223 (DSP) Cards

A NFILU is mounted in BASEU.

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 2
Page 15
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION DESIGN

Time Slots are allocated for a PIM as shown below:

TS/Physical ports

Slot No.

00

02 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 1516 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Number
of
Time Slots

PWR

PWR

PIM

192 TS

192 TS

16 16 16 16 16 16 32 32 32

16 16 16 16 16 16 32 32 32

16

16

(16) (16)
16

16

16

16
48 TS/SW

48 TS/SW

TS/SW ports

Group Numbers are allocated
for a PIM as follows:

Slot No.

00

02 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 1516 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
01 03 05 07 09 11

Group No.

15 19 23

01 03 05 07 09 11

14 18 22

14 18 22

13 17 21
00 02 04 06 08 10
(24) (25)

Extended
Group No.

15 19 23

00 02 04 06 08 10
12 16 20

PIM

13 17 21
12 16 20

27

29

31

27

29

31

26

28

30

26

28

30

Note 1: Extended Group No. can be used by FCH (PA-FCHA) card. For more detailed information, see

the “Fusion Network System Manual.”
Note 2: A PIM consists of 384 physical ports (512 total ports).

Figure 2-4 Time Slot, Group Number Assignment

CHAPTER 2
Page 16
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION DESIGN

TOPU

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PH-PC36 (MUX1)
PH-PC36 (MUX0)

PA-PW54-A (PWR1)

PA-PW55-A (PWR0)

PIM 3

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PH-PC36 (MUX1)
PH-PC36 (MUX0)

PA-PW54-A (PWR1)

PA-PW55-A (PWR0)

PIM 2

FANU
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PH-PC36 (MUX1)
PH-PC36 (MUX0)

PA-PW54-A (PWR1)

PA-PW55-A (PWR0)

PIM 1

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PH-SW10 (TSW1)
PH-SW10 (TSW0)

PA-PW54-A (PWR1)

PA-PW55-A (PWR0)

PIM 0

00 01 02 03 04
PH-PC40 (EMA)
PH-IO24 (IOC)
Note

LPM

BASEU

Figure 2-5 Face Layout (Single IMG Configuration)
NDA-24234

CHAPTER 2
Page 17
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION DESIGN

TOPU

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
P H -P C 36 (M U X 1)
P H -P C 36 (M U X 0)

PA-PW54-A (PWR1)

PA-PW55-A (PWR0)

PIM 3

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
P H -P C 36 (M U X 1)
P H -P C 3 6 (M U X 0 )

PA-PW54-A (PWR1)

PA-PW55-A (PWR0)

PIM 2

FANU

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
P H -P C 3 6 (M U X 1 )
P H -P C 3 6 (M U X 0 )

PA-PW54-A (PWR1)

PA-PW55-A (PWR0)

PIM 1

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

P H -P C 3 6 (M U X 1)
P H -P C 3 6 (M U X 0 )

PA-PW54-A (PWR1)

PA-PW55-A (PWR0)

PIM 0

00 01 02 03 04

LPM

BASEU

Figure 2-6 Face Layout of IMG0 (Multiple IMG Configuration)
CHAPTER 2
Page 18
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION DESIGN

PWRA

MISC2B
MISC3B
MISC4B
MISC5B

MUX132

MUX122

MUX112

MUX102

MUX032

MUX022

MUX012

MUX002

MIO30

MISC1B

PZ-M497 PKG SIDE1

MIO31
IOP0
IOP1
MUX003
MUX013
MUX023
MUX033
MUX103
MUX113
MUX123
MUX133

EXCLK0

PZ-M497 PKG SIDE1
EXCLK1

PZ-M497 PKG SIDE0
MISC1A
MISC2A
MISC3A
MISC4A

MUX021

MUX011

MUX001

MIO21

MIO20

MUX030

MUX020

MUX010

MUX000

MIO1

MIO0

MISC5A

MUX031

MUX100

MUX120

MUX101

MUX121

MUX130

MUX110

FALM
MUX111

MUX131

EMAFH

PZ-M497 PKG SIDE0

CHAPTER 2
Page 19
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

EMA
ALM

PWRB

REAR VIEW

Figure 2-7 Location of Terminating Resistors on the TSWM Back Plane (Multiple IMG Configuration)

INSTALLATION DESIGN

TOPU

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PH-PC36 (MUX)
PH-PC36 (MUX)

PA-PW54-A (PWR1)

PA-PW55-A (PWR0)

PIM 3

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PH-PC36 (MUX)
PH-PC36 (MUX)

PA-PW54-A (PWR1)

PA-PW55-A (PWR0)

PIM 2

FANU
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PH-PC36 (MUX)
PH-PC36 (MUX)

PA-PW54-A (PWR1)

PA-PW55-A (PWR0)

PIM 1

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PH-PC36 (MUX)
PH-PC36 (MUX)

PA-PW54-A (PWR1)

PA-PW55-A (PWR0)

PIM 0

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PLO1

PLO0

TSW13
TSW12
TSW11
TSW10
TSW03
TSW02
TSW01
TSW00
GT1
GT0
DLKC1
DLKC0
MISC
MISC
MISC
MISC
MISC

PWRSW1
PWRSW0

TSWM

Note

BASEU

Note:

No circuit card is accommodated in Slot No. 02 of TSWM.
Figure 2-8 Face Layout of IMG1 Front View (Multiple IMG Configuration)

CHAPTER 2
Page 20
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION DESIGN

IMG2, 3
TOPU

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PH-PC36 (MUX)
PH-PC36 (MUX)

PA-PW54-A (PWR1)

PA-PW55-A (PWR0)

PIM 3

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PH-PC36 (MUX)
PH-PC36 (MUX)

PA-PW54-A (PWR1)

PA-PW55-A (PWR0)

PIM 2

FANU
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PH-PC36 (MUX)
PH-PC36 (MUX)

PA-PW54-A (PWR1)

PA-PW55-A (PWR0)

PIM 1

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PH-PC36 (MUX)
PH-PC36 (MUX)

PA-PW54-A (PWR1)

PA-PW55-A (PWR0)

PIM 0

DUMMY

BASEU

Figure 2-9 Face Layout of IMG2, 3 (Multiple IMG Configuration)

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 2
Page 21
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION DESIGN

9.2 Circuit Card Locations

This section explains the main function of controlling circuit cards on a module basis. For more detailed information on each card, please refer to the NEAX2400 IMX Circuit Card Manual.

00 01 02 03 04

PH-PC40 (EMA)

PH-IO24 (IOC)
PH-IO24 (IOC) Note

LPM

CPU-1

CPU-0

PWR FDD/HDD DSP

Note:

CPR

This IOC card is optional.
Figure 2-10 Controlling Circuit Cards in LPM
Table 2-4 Controlling Circuit Cards in LPM

Slot No.

Circuit Card

Symbol

Functions, Mounting Conditions

02, 03

PH-IO24

IOC
(Input/
Output
Controller)

This circuit card supplies the system with a serial interface, which
conforms to RS-232C, between external equipment such as the MAT,
SMDR, and MCI. One card is equipped with four I/O ports. The system
maximum is eight ports (two cards).

04

PH-PC40

EMA
(Emergency
Alarm
Controller)

This card detects various kinds of alarms which might occur in the
system, and sends out the information of the detected alarm to the circuits
concerned. In addition, this card has the following functions:
• Music-On-Hold sending function (Single IMG configuration only)
• active/stand-by changeover function

CPR (Central Processor Rack)

CHAPTER 2
Page 22
Revision 3.0

CPR consists of the following components.
• CPU Board: Includes the Main Processor Unit (MPU), flash ROM,
and 64 MB or 128 MB - Random Access Memory (RAM). (128 MBRAM is used for a system using FUSION features.) In addition, the
board is equipped with GT (PZ-GT16) (Single IMG Configuration)/
GT (PZ-GT13) (Multiple IMG Configuration) card, and LANI (PZPC19) card.
• DSP: Equipped with switches and 7-seg LEDs on the panel.
• FDD/HDD: Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) and Hard Disk Drive (HDD)
• PWR: Supplies the operating power to the LPM.

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION DESIGN

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PH-SW10 (TSW1)

PH-SW10 (TSW0)

PA-PW54-A (PWR1)

PA-PW55-A (PWR0)

Figure 2-11 Controlling Circuit Cards in PIM 0 (Single IMG Configuration Only)
Table 2-5 Controlling Circuit Cards in PIM 0 (Single IMG Configuration Only)
Slot No.

Circuit Card

Symbol

Functions, Mounting Conditions

01

PA-PW55-A

PWR

This circuit card supplies operating power to circuit cards accommodated
in the PIM.

03

PA-PW54-A

DPWR

This circuit card supplies operating power to circuit cards accommodated
in the PIM.

13, 14

PH-SW 10

TSW

This circuit card combines the Time Division Switch (TSW) INT, PLO,
MUX, and CFT. The TSW capacity is 2048 × 2048 time slots, and it
allows non-block switching for the maximum configuration of
NEAX2400 IMX. This card is mounted within the PIM0 only.

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 2
Page 23
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION DESIGN

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PH-PC36 (MUX1)

PH-PC36 (MUX0)

PA-PW54-A (PWR1)

PA-PW55-A (PWR0)

Figure 2-12 Controlling Circuit Cards in PIM
Table 2-6 Controlling Circuit Cards in PIM
Slot No.

Circuit Card

Symbol

Functions, Mounting Conditions

01

PA-PW55-A

PWR

This circuit card supplies operating power to circuit cards accommodated
in the PIM.

03

PA-PW54-A

DPWR

This circuit card supplies operating power to circuit cards accommodated
in the PIM.

13, 14

PH-PC36

MUX

This circuit card is an interface card for mounting line circuits and/or
trunks. In between the CPR and the Port Microprocessor (PM) of the line/
trunk circuit, this card provides an interface for multiplexing/demultiplexing of voice PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) information and
digital data information.

CHAPTER 2
Page 24
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION DESIGN

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PH-CK16/17/16-A/17-A
(PLO1)

PH-CK16/17/16-A/17-A
(PLO0)

PH-SW12 (TSW0)

PH-SW12 (TSW0)

PH-SW12 (TSW1)

PH-SW12 (TSW0)

PH-SW12 (TSW0)

PH-SW12 (TSW1)

PH-SW12 (TSW0)

PH-SW12 (TSW0)

PH-GT09 (GT1)

PH-GT09 (GT0)

PH-PC20 (DLKC1)

PH-PC20 (DLKC0)

PH-PW14 (PWRSW1)

PH-PW14 (PWRSW0)

TSWM

Figure 2-13 Controlling Circuit Cards in TSWM (Multiple IMG Configuration)
Table 2-7 Controlling Circuit Cards in TSWM (Multiple IMG Configuration)
Slot No.

Circuit Card

Symbol

Functions, Mounting Conditions

00, 01

PH-PW14

PWRSW

This circuit card supplies operating power to circuit cards accommodated
in the TSWM.

08, 09

PH-PC20

DLKC

This circuit card provides the Attendant Consoles (ATTs) with
information such as ATT call termination/answer/release (abandoned
call) via the Data Link which is established in the TSW card. In addition,
station idle/busy information is sent to the ATTs via the same Data Link.

10, 11

PH-GT09

GT

This circuit card permits the CPU to directly control the TSW, PLO,
DLKC, and MISC circuit cards via TSW I/O Bus and MISC I/O Bus.

12-19

PH-SW12

TSW

This circuit card supplies the Time Division Switch (TSW) and INT
function for the system. The TSW capacity is 8192 × 2048 TS (time slots)
for an IMG, and 4 cards achieves 8192 × 8192 TS switching for 4 IMG
configuration.

21, 23

PH-CK16/
16-A

PLO

This circuit card, used together with a direct digital interface circuit card,
sets up network synchronization with the network concerned. With this
circuit card, the IMX 4IMG system can be a clock subordinate office of
the digital network.

21, 23

PH-CK17/
17-A

PLO

This circuit card, used together with a direct interface circuit card, sets up
network synchronization with the network concerned. Since this circuit
card provides high precision base clock oscillator, the IMX 4 IMG system
can be a clock source office of the digital network.

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 2
Page 25
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION DESIGN

9.3 Preparation Of Trunking Diagram

Prepare the trunking diagram according to the customer’s specifications. Since there are different kinds of
switching offices such as a single office, network offices, etc. are involved, the trunking diagram must be prepared per the customer’s specifications.
9.4 Preparation Of Module Group Face Layout And Port Accommodation Diagram

When mounting of various circuit cards in the PBX have been finalized, the installation company concerned
should prepare the module group face layout and port accommodation diagram.
9.5 Preparation Of Circuit Card Switch Setting Sheets

Regarding the circuit cards to be mounted in the PBX, prepare the circuit card switch setting sheets. Some of
the circuit cards may not properly operate by the initial switch settings arranged at the factory before shipping
or may not meet the customer’s specifications. Referring to the Circuit Card Manual denote the switch settings
in the Switch Setting Sheets provided in the explanations of each of the circuit cards. Make the switch setting
entries with respect to all the circuit cards.
It should be remembered that use of a circuit card varies with the switch setting on that card.
10. INSTALLATION CABLES
The following installation cables are required for the PBX:
•

DC Power Cable:

For connections between the Rectifier and battery and between the Rectifier and the PBX

•

AC Power Cable:

For supplying AC source power to the Rectifier

•

Ground Cable:

Communication, Security and Line Protector grounding

•

25P Shielded Cable with CHAMP

•

(Amphenol) connector at one end:

•

25P Shielded Cable with CHAMP

•

(Amphenol) connector at both ends:

For connections between the MAT and the PBX, and between peripheral equipment and the PBX

•

House Cable:

For connections between terminals (telephone sets, etc.) and
the MDF

•

Cables for C.O. lines and Tie Lines

•

Others:

CHAPTER 2
Page 26
Revision 3.0

For connections between the MDF and the PBX

For connections between Alarm Indicators and the MDF

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION DESIGN
10.1 AC Input, DC Power, And Ground Cables

1.

For AC input cable, VCT (Polyvinyl Chloride Cabtyre Cable) is to be used. However, if shielding is necessary, as is the case when the AC input cable is to be installed in parallel with a low-voltage power cable,
etc., be sure to use VCT-S (Shielded Polyvinyl Chloride Cabtyre Cable).

2.

For the power receiving terminals of the PBX, -48 V and G terminals are provided in dual (A side and B
side). For two PIMs or less, the DC main power cable is connected only to A side terminals. For three PIMs
or more, the cable is branched out. A side supplies power to LPM/TSWM, PIM0 and PIM1, and B side to
PIM2 and PIM3.

3.

For the main ground cable, an IV or CV cable of more than 14 mm2 (6 AWG) is to be used. (See Figures
2-14 through 2-16).
As the security ground cable for the MAT and externally installed equipment, IV cable of 2 mm2 (14 AWG)
is to be used. For the ground cable for the line protector of the MDF, an IV cable of 14 mm2 (6 AWG) is to
be used.
BATTERY
CABLES

PBX
(For 1/2 PIM Configuration)

RECTIFIER

BATTERY
IV (R)
IV (BL)

POWER AND
GROUND CABLES
CV or IV

-48V
G

-48V
A B

AC POWER
DISTRIBUTION
BOARD

G
A B FE

-48V
G
E
FE

MAT
AC SERVICE
OUTLET

VCT CABLE

MDF

Earth Bar
G

IV (G)
(ex. 6 AWG)

CABLE

DC Main Power Cable
Main Ground Cable
Note:

GROUND
TERMINAL

SPECIFICATION

Calculate the sectional area of cable referring to Figure 2-17.
More than 14 mm2 (6AWG)

If the cover of CV Cable to be used is black, use the following clamp cover terminals so they can be
easily identified.
-48V: Red cover
G: Black cover
E: Green cover

Figure 2-14 DC Main Power Cable and Main Ground Cable (1- or 2-PIM System) (Single IMG Configuration)
NDA-24234

CHAPTER 2
Page 27
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION DESIGN

BATTERY
CABLES

PBX
(For 3/4 PIM Configuration)

RECTIFIER

BATTERY
IV (R)
IV (BL)

-48V
G

POWER AND
GROUND CABLES
CV or IV

-48V
A B

G
A B FE

IV (BL)

IV (R)

AC POWER
DISTRIBUTION
BOARD

-48V
G
E
FE

MAT
AC SERVICE
OUTLET
IV (G) (ex. 14 AWG)

VCT CABLE

MDF

Earth Bar
G

IV (G)
(ex. 6 AWG)

CABLE

DC Main Power Cable Main Cable
Branch Cable
Main Ground Cable

GROUND
TERMINAL

SPECIFICATION

Calculate the sectional area of cable referring to
Figure 2-17.
IV cable: more than 14 mm2 (6 AWG)
More than 14 mm2 (6 AWG)

Note 1: If the cover of CV Cable to be used is black, use the following clamp cover terminals so they can be

easily identified.
-48V: Red cover
G: Black cover
E: Green cover
Note 2: Extension jointing is usually performed with a T-type terminal for wires of the same size. Refer to Tables

2-8 through 2-10.
Note 3: It is recommended that the -48V leads of A and B be connected to separate circuit breakers at the recti-

fier.

Figure 2-15 DC Main Power Cable and Main Ground Cable (3- or 4-PIM System) (Single IMG Configuration)

CHAPTER 2
Page 28
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION DESIGN

NFB
DFB

CV or IV
CV or IV
CV or IV
CV or IV

IMG 0

IMG 1

IMG 2

IMG 3

-48V GND
-48V GND
-48V GND
-48V GND
A B A B FE A B A B FE A B A B FE A B A B FE
IV (R)

IV (BL)

BATTERY

IV (R)

BATTERY
CABLES

IV (BL)

RECTIFIER
IV (R)
IV (BL)

-48V
G
-48V

AC POWER
DISTRIBUTION
BOARD

VCT
CABLES

POWER AND GROUND CABLES

G
E
FE

MAT
AC SERVICE
OUTLET
IV (G)
(ex. 14AWG)

iv(g)

MDF

Earth Bar
GROUND
TERMINAL

G
IV (G)
(ex. 6AWG)

Note 1: Do not make a multiple connection across “A” terminal and “B” terminal of -48V. Likewise, do not

make a multiple connection across “A” terminal and “B” terminal of GND.
Note 2: It is recommended that each -48V lead from the PBX be connected to a separate circuit breaker at the

rectifier.
Figure 2-16 DC Main Power Cable and Main Ground Cable (Multiple IMG Configuration)

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 2
Page 29
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION DESIGN

Table 2-8 Clamp Terminal Shape and Purpose

TYPE

SHAPE

PURPOSE
End terminal

A

Branching or extension of power
cable
T

CHAPTER 2
Page 30
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

REMARKS

INSTALLATION DESIGN

Table 2-9 Selection of T-type Clamp Terminal
14 AWG/

12 AWG/

10 AWG/

8 AWG/

6 AWG/

2 mm2

3.5 mm2

5.5 mm2

8 mm2

14 mm2

CURRENT

10 AWG

*T-20

*T-20

*T-20

-

-

51A

8 AWG

*T-20

*T-20

*T-20

T-20

-

63 A

6 AWG

T-20

T-20

T-20

T-26

T-44

90 A

3 AWG

T-26

T-26

T-44

T-44

T-44

115A

2 AWG

*T-44

T-44

T-44

T-44

T-44

139A

1 AWG

*T-44

*T-44

T-44

T-66

T-60

162A

1ø

*T-60

T-60

T-60

T-60

T-76

190A

2ø

*T-76

T-76

T-76

T-76

T-76

217A

3ø

*T-98

*T-98

*T-98

T-98

T-98

257A

4ø

*T-122

*T-122

*T-122

*T-122

T-122

298A

250 mcm

*T-154

*T-154

*T-154

T-154

T-154

344A

300 mcm

*T-154

*T-190

*T-190

*T-190

T-190

395A

400 mcm

*T-240

*T-240

*T-240

*T-240

T-240

439A

BRANCH
MAIN

Note:

REMARKS

Selection of T-Type Clamp Terminal
The asterisk (*) in Table 2-9 indicates that an auxiliary conductor is needed when using a main power wire
and a branch power wire of a thinner diameter, and the clamp terminal of the type indicated in the selected
columns.

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 2
Page 31
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION DESIGN

Table 2-10 Clamping Tool
APPLICABLE CROSS

ACCESSORIES

*TOOL TYPE

SECTION OF WIRE (mm2)

No. 1

0.25 ~ 6.64

No. 2

6.64 ~ 10.25

No. 9

6.64 ~ 42.42

Convex die 2 pieces

No. 10

6.64 ~ 117.02

Convex die 4
Convex die 8

No. 11

6.64 ~ 117.02

Convex die 4
Convex die 8

No. 12

117.02 ~ 325

Convex die 4
Convex die 4

REMARKS

Manual type For A and C type
terminal

No. 13

Handle type hydraulic tool For A, C,
D, type terminal
Pedal type hydraulic tool
For all terminal types
No. 11 and No. 12 tool are used with
No. 13.

Rubber hose

No. 15

14 ~ 122

Convex die 7 pairs

Handle type hydraulic tool For T type
terminal

No. 16

123 ~ 365

Convex die 5 pairs

Use with No. 13 for T type terminal

RECTIFIER

BATTERY

PBX

I 2 M2

I1M1
S = 0.018x(I1M1+I2M2)
V
where,
S : Sectional area required (mm2)
I1 : Max. current passing between battery and rectifier
M1 : Two-way cable length between battery and rectifier
I2 : Max. current passing between rectifier and PBX
M2 : Two-way cable length between rectifier and PBX
V : Voltage drop

Figure 2-17 Calculation Method for Sectional Area

CHAPTER 2
Page 32
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION DESIGN
10.2 Cables Between The PBX And MDF

Regarding lines, trunks, and NCU (PFT), 25P shielded the PBX and the MDF are connected using cables with
a CHAMP (Amphenol) connector at one end.
Table 2-11 shows the procedure for calculating the required number of cables. Figure 2-18 also shows an outline
of cable connections from the Module Group to the outside.
Table 2-11 Calculation of Number of Cables
CABLE NAME

CALCULATION

LT Cable

Number of PIMs × 12

NCU Cable

Number of PFT Circuit Cards × 2

16 PH EXALM CA

One cable

ODT Cable

Number of TLT circuit cards × 1

SUB TOTAL

TOTAL

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 2
Page 33
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION DESIGN

CONNECTOR
DESIGNATION

CONNECTOR
DESIGNATIION LEAD
DESIGNATION

LEAD
DESIGNATION

MDF

PBX

MDF

LT-X Axx
LT-X Bxx

LT-X Axx
COT

LC

LT-X Bxx
LT-X Axx

INST.
CABLE

TO C.O.
OR
DISTANT
PABX

LT-X Bxx
TLT

LT-X Bxx
LT-X Mxx

SWITCHING
FACILITIES

INST.
CABLE
LT-X Axx
LT-X Bxx

INST.
CABLE
COT

LC

NCU-X-AOx
NCU-X-BOx
NCU-X-Alx

LT-X Axx
LT-X Bxx

NCU-X ROx
NCU-X TOx
NCU-X Rlx
NCU-X Tlx

NCU-X-Blx
PFT

ALM MJ
ALM MN

TO ALARM
INDICATOR

ALM E

INST.
CABLE

Note 1: Legend
Note 2:

16PH EXALMCA/
20FLT EXALMCA

: Male CONNECTOR

: Female CONNECTOR.

or
in the above drawing indicates the CONNECTOR ended.
Cable to be connected between module connector and MDF.
Figure 2-18 Outline of Cables from Module Group to the Outside

CHAPTER 2
Page 34
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

1. GENERAL
This chapter explains the procedures for installing the PBX, the Maintenance Administration Terminal (MAT),
Desk Consoles, and various types of terminal equipment (single line telephones, Dterms, Data Modules, etc.).
The procedures explained in this chapter are shown in Figure 3-1.
Before beginning the installation, thoroughly read Section 2., “PRECAUTIONS BEFORE BEGINNING INSTALLATION” and observe the precautions while performing the installation.
Installation of Peripheral
Equipment (NAP-200-015)

Installation Preparation-Basic Procedures
(NAP-200-001, 002, 003)

C.O./Tie Line
Single-line TEL

Assembly and Installation of the Module
Group
(NAP-200-004, 005)

Digital Interface
Cable Termination
(NAP-200-014)
Paging/Announcement
ALM IND./TAS IND./External
Key Box

CHAMP Connector
Cable Running
(NAP-200-013)

Installation of MDF
(NAP-200-007)
Desk Console

Circuit Card
Related
Procedures

(NAP-200-016)
Maintenance
Administration
Terminal

(NAP-200-009)
(NAP-200-017)

SMDR Interface
(NAP-200-018)
Power & Ground Cabling
(NAP-200-008)

RECT/
BATT
Cabling within the Module Group
(NAP-200-010, 011, 012)
Mounting of Covers and
Post-Installation Procedures
Refer to Chapter 7.

Note:

Power Equipment Installation
(NAP-200-006)

Work procedures are explained in detail in each NAP. Refer to the procedures by number (NAP-200XXX).
Figure 3-1 Scope of Installation Procedure

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 35
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

2. PRECAUTIONS BEFORE BEGINNING INSTALLATION
2.1 Outline

1.

Before beginning the installation, check to see if the installation requirements (grounding, the quantity and
kind of installation cables, etc.) are all present by referring to Chapter 2 of this manual.

2.

For a standard installation, the system is installed on a free-access floor, so no explanations are provided
pertaining to cable racks and cable ducts.

3.

The PBX is connected to the MDF by use of 25-pair shielded cables as the installation cables. Each of these
installation cables is grounded at the cable support assembly of the BASEU as shown below. By this arrangement, noise radiation from each cable is prevented. For the installation method, refer to NAP-200013: “Cable Running from the Module Group to MDF, MAT, and SMDR.”

INST CABLE (25P AC-BUS CABLE)
LTX

LTX

PIM

BASEU

E

To MDF

To MDF

CABLE SUPPORT ASSEMBLY
: CHAMP Connector

CHAPTER 3
Page 36
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

4.

Note:

As the cable to be run between the PBX and the Rectifier, use a CV cable (600 V Crosslinked Polyethylene
Insulated PVC Sheathed Cable) as the circumstance permits. Compared with an ordinary IV cable (600 V
PVC Insulated Cable) the CV cable is stronger because of its thicker cover. Thus, it is suitable to run along
the free-access floor where it is difficult to protect the cable from damage.
Also, for easy identification of different cables, use cables of different colors as follows:
• –48 V:

Blue (White)

• GND:

Red (Black)

• E:

Green

The color shown in ( ) is applicable to the UL Specification.

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 37
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

3. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
The flowchart in Figure 3-2 shows the steps of the installation procedure. Each step is assigned a NAP number.
NAPs NAP-200-001 through NAP-200-018 follow Figure 3-2. These NAPs should be followed sequentially
when performing the installation. Individual steps, such as installation of SMDR, can be performed independently by referring to the corresponding NAP.

START
(NAP - 200-001)
Installation Preparation
(NAP - 200-002)
Marking, Leveling, and Drilling
(NAP - 200-003)
Unpacking and Inspection

(NAP - 200-007)
Installation of the MDF

(NAP - 200-006)
Installation of Power Equipment

(NAP - 200-004)
Installation of the Base Unit
(NAP - 200-005)
Mounting of Units and Modules

(NAP - 200-008)
(NAP - 200-013)

Connection of Power and Ground
Cables from the Power Equipment

Cable Running from the PBX
to MDF, ATTCON, MAT, and
SMDR
(NAP - 200-014)

(NAP - 200-009)

(NAP - 200-016)

Setting of Switch Positions and
Mounting of the Circuit Cards
(NAP - 200-010)

Termination of Cables on
MDF (Wire Accommodation of Each
Cables)
(NAP - 200-015)
Cable Termination and Cross
Connection from MDF to
Peripheral Equipment, C.O. Lines,
and Tie Lines

Installation of the Desk
Console and Cable Connections
(NAP - 200-017)
Installation of the Maintenance
Administration Terminal (MAT) and
Cable Connections
(NAP - 200-018)
Connection of SMDR

Cleaning and Visual Check

END

Figure 3-2 Installation Procedure

CHAPTER 3
Page 38
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

Internal Cable Connections
(NAP - 200-011)
Inter-frame Cable Connections

(4 IMG type)
(NAP - 200-012)
Front Cable Connections between
Circuit Cards

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-001
Sheet 1/2
Installation Preparation

This NAP explains the following work items:
•

Confirmation of Equipment Locations

•

Confirmation of Floor Layout

•

Confirmation of Power and Ground Supply

•

Check of Quantity of Equipment Packages

Note 1: Confirmation procedures are discussed in Chapter 2 of this manual.
Note 2: Be sure to correct any abnormal conditions encountered during installation preparation (missing hard-

ware, floor not level, etc.) before proceeding to the next step.

START
Confirmation of Equipment
Locations

Environmental
Floor Space

Confirmation of temperature and
humidity.

Floor Load
Equipment Room

Floor surface
Wall
Ceiling
Lighting facilities

According to the floor layout,
confirm that the equipment
locations are appropriate.

A

B

Improper Locations:
• An open aisle or place where sprinklers are provided.
• A place where there is a water pipeline.
• A place where there is a pipeline generating heat and an
exhaust for such heat.
• A location near an exhaust port for corrosive fumes or gas
generated from a facility machine.
• A location near a copying machine or apparatus which dissipates heat.
• A location where the switch will be exposed to direct sunlight.
• A location near a kitchen facility, etc., from which vapor is
generated.
• A high EMI environment; for example, a location near an
elevator motor or X-ray equipment.

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 39
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-001
Sheet 2/2
Installation Preparation

A

B
Proper Locations:
• A dry and clean place.
• A place that is well ventilated.
• A sufficiently illuminated room. (200 lux at floor level).
• A location around which there are no obstructing objects,
thus allowing easy maintenance.
• A place where C.O. lines can be brought in, or local
cables can be brought up to the MDF easily.
• A place where communication and security ground can
be obtained as required
Confirmation of Power and
Ground Supply

Confirm AC voltage and current capacity.
Confirm that a Circuit Breaker (NFB) is provided
exclusively for the system.
Confirm that ground terminals are provided separately from
those of the power supply system.

Check the Quantity of
Packages

Check the quantity of packages to see if there is a
discrepancy with the Packing List.
If any equipment is missing, report it to the supplier
immediately.

END

CHAPTER 3
Page 40
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-002
Sheet 1/8
Marketing, Leveling, and Drilling

This NAP explains the procedures for marking, drilling and other necessary work when the PBX is to be installed
on a free-access floor by either one of the following three methods.
•

Securing the PBX directly onto the floor

•

Securing the PBX with the special stand

•

Securing the PBX with the floor elevation

This NAP also explains the procedures for marking, leveling and drilling for MDF, Power Equipment, and Peripheral
Equipment (See Section 4.)
Note:

Kinds of Anchor Bolts
Various types of anchor bolts are available; the type of bolt to be used depends on the application. Sleeve
expansion-type anchor bolts are generally preferred for the PBX installation. Table 002-1 shows anchor
bolt specifications.
Table 002-1 Specification of Anchor Bolts-Sleeve Expansion Type

SCREW

M10

SLEEVE

Ø17.3

BOLT
LENGTH

SLEEVE
LENGTH

mm

inch

mm

inch

50

2

38

1.5

70

2.8

58

80

3.1

68

DRILL
DIA.

DRILLING
DEPTH

MAX. THICKNESS
OF ITEM TO BE
FIXED

APPLICATION

mm

inch

50

2

2.3

70

2.8

Concrete + Mortar
(20 mm/0.8 in
thick)

2.7

80

3.1

Concrete + Mortar
(30 mm/1.2 in
thick)

Ø17.5

15 mm/0.6 in

For concrete

COMPONENTS

Bolts,
Washers,
Nuts

* Pull out Strength = 1,900 Kg (4185 lb)
(Concrete Strength = more than 20, 580, 000 Pa (2984.871 PSI))

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 41
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-002
Sheet 2/8
Marking, Leveling, and Drilling

1. WHEN SECURING THE PBX DIRECTLY ONTO THE FLOOR

START
Marking

Referring to Figure 002-1, mark the holes for the
anchor bolts of the base unit.

Drilling

Drill holes at the locations marked for base unit.

Cutting of Free-Access Floor

Referring to Figure 002-2, cut the free-access floor at
the marked cable locations by using a jigsaw.

Leveling

Measure the level of floor surface of the free-access
floor.
When it is not level, adjust the support of the freeaccess floor until it is level.

END

CHAPTER 3
Page 42
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-002
Sheet 3/8
Marking, Leveling, and Drilling

Single IMG Configuration

55(2.17")

550
(1'9.65")

410(1'4.14")

85(3.35")
40
(1.57")

520
(1'8.47")
600
(1'11.62")

40(1.57")

Unit: mm(inch)

Multiple IMG Configuration
IMG0

IMG1

520
(1'8.47")
600
(1'11.62")

520
(1'8.47")
600
(1'11.62")

IMG2

IMG3

55(2.17")
550
(1'9.65") 410(1'4.14")

85(3.35")
40
(1.57")

120
(4.72")

120
(4.72")

520
(1'8.47")
600
(1'11.62")

120
(4.72")

520
(1'8.47")
600
(1'11.62")

40(1.57")

Unit: mm(inch)

Figure 002-1 Locations of Base Unit Securing Holes

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 43
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-002
Sheet 4/8
Marking, Leveling, and Drilling

FRONT

PBX

550
(1'9.65")

370
(1'2.57")

115(4.53")

REAR
100(3.94")
115(4.53")

600
(1'11.62")
CABLE HOLE
FREE-ACCESS FLOOR
Unit: mm(inch)

Figure 002-2 Cable Hole on a Free-Access or Computer Floor

CHAPTER 3
Page 44
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-002
Sheet 5/8
Marking, Leveling, and Drilling

2. WHEN SECURING THE PBX WITH THE SPECIAL STAND

START
Marking and Drilling of Special
Stand

Drill the Special Stand for securing the PBX.
(See Figure 002-3.)

Marking, Drilling and Cutting of
Free-Access Floor

Mark, drill, and cut the free-access floor according to
the size of the special stand to be used.

Installing the Special Stand

Secure the special stand onto the floor.
(See Figure 002-4.)

Level Check

Check the level of the special stand. If necessary,
adjust the level by inserting spacers beneath the stand.

END

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 45
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-002
Sheet 6/8
Marking, Leveling, and Drilling

HOLE FOR SECURING
BASE UNIT

520
(1'8.47")
55
(2.17")
550
(1'9.65")

410
(1'4.14")

40
(1.57")
85
(3.35")

Unit: mm(inch)

Figure 002-3 Example of Special Stand

PBX

TOPU
PIM

LPM

FRONT
FREE-ACCESS
OR COMPUTER FLOOR

SPECIAL STAND
ANCHOR BOLT

Figure 002-4 Special Stand Installation Method

CHAPTER 3
Page 46
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-002
Sheet 7/8
Marking, Leveling, and Drilling

3. WHEN SECURING PBX WITH FLOOR ELEVATIONS

START
Installing the Floor Elevation

Secure the Floor Elevation on the concrete floor.
(See Figure 002-5.)

Marking

Mark the locations of the anchor bolt holes for the Base Unit.
(See Figure 002-1.)

Drilling

Drill holes in the locations.

Cutting of Free-Access Floor

Cut the Free-Access Floor with a jigsaw. (See Figure 002-2.)

END

HOLE FOR SECURING
BASEU

CONCRETE FLOOR
520
(1’8.47”)
410
(1’4.14”)

ANCHOR BOLT

ELEVATION

Figure 002-5 Example of Elevation

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 47
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-002
Sheet 8/8
Marking, Leveling, and Drilling

4. MARKING, LEVELING AND DRILLING FOR MDF, POWER EQUIPMENT, AND PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT

START
Leveling

Measure the level of floor surface and determine the reference
level.
ROOM

HIGHEST LEVEL

WALL
REFERENCE LEVEL

FLOOR

Marking

Mark the holes for securing
equipment

Power Equipment
MDF
Peripheral Equipment

Drilling

Drill holes locations marked for power equipment, MDF, and
peripheral equipment.
Secure the anchor bolts to the floor.
(Embed nuts and sleeves)
Remove the anchor bolts temporarily.
(Remove anchor bolts and washers)

END

CHAPTER 3
Page 48
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-003
Sheet 1/2

CAUTION: Equipment may become damaged if

not handled properly during unpacking and inspection.

Unpacking and Inspection

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

This NAP explains the procedure for unpacking and inspection.
Note 1: If any equipment is missing or damaged, report it to the supplier immediately.
Note 2: Save all packing materials and boxes so that they can be used to return damaged equipment to the supplier.
1. UNPACKING

START
Quantity check

Check the quantity of packages received against the
Packing List.

Check for external damage

Check the packaging for external damage.

Carry-In

Carry the packages containing the Module Group into
the switching equipment room.

Unpacking Note 2

Module Group, Modules, and Units
Covers
Circuit Cards
ATTCON
Cables

END

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 49
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-003

CAUTION: Equipment may become damaged

Sheet 2/2

if not handled properly during
unpacking and inspection.

Unpacking and Inspection

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

2. INSPECTION

START
Visually Inspect Modules and Units

Overall distortion.
Scratches or dents on the surface.
Distortion of shelves.
Cracks to connectors on the backplane.
Broken or bent pins on the backplane.

Circuit Cards
Provide protection from static
electricity.

Scratches and cracks.
Loose wires and parts.
Damage to card puller tabs.

Desk Console and MAT

Scratches and dents on the body.
Damage to keys and lamps.

END

CHAPTER 3
Page 50
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-004
Sheet 1/3
Installation of the Base Unit

This NAP explains the procedure for securing the Base Unit onto the floor directly or using special stand.
1. INSTALLING THE BASE UNIT DIRECTLY ONTO THE FLOOR

START
Securing the Base Unit

Secure the Base Unit onto the floor as per Figure 004-1 and
004-2.
When the floor elevation is in use, secure the Base Unit by
referring to Figures 004-1 and 004-3.

Level Check

Check the level of the Base Unit. If necessary, adjust the level
by inserting spacers beneath the Base Unit.

END

BASE
UNIT

BOLT
LOCK WASHER
PLAIN WASHER

Figure 004-1 Mounting the Base Unit on an Ordinary Floor

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 51
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-004
Sheet 2/3
Installation of the Base Unit

BOLT

BASE UNIT
FREE-ACCESS
FLOOR
FLAT WASHER
COMPRESSED PIPE

FLAT WASHER

CONCRETE
FLOOR
ANCHOR BOLT

Figure 004-2 Mounting the Base Unit on a Free-Access or Computer Floor

Example: The floor elevation is higher
than 150 mm (5.9 inches).

FLOOR ELEVATION

BASE UNIT
FREE-ACCESS
FLOOR

Figure 004-3 Mounting the Base Unit on a Free-Access or Computer Floor via Elevation

CHAPTER 3
Page 52
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-004
Sheet 3/3
Installation of the Base Unit

2. INSTALLING THE BASE UNIT USING A SPECIAL STAND

START
Securing the Base Unit

Secure the Base Unit onto the special stand as per Figure 004-4.

Level Check

Check the level of the Base Unit. If necessary, adjust the level by
inserting spacers beneath the Base Unit.

END

BASEU

BOLT
LOCK WASHER
PLAIN WASHER

SPECIAL STAND

Figure 004-4 Setting the BASEU via Special Stand

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 53
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-005
Sheet 1/16
Mounting of Units and Modules

1. MOUNTING OF UNITS AND MODULES

START
Mounting of Modules, FAN
BOX and TOPU

Mount modules, FAN BOX and TOPU for each cabinet, by
referring to the Figure 005-1.

END

(TOPU)

Note

Tighten these screws.
Do the same at the rear
side, too.

(PIM3)
Tighten these screws.
Do the same at the rear
side, too.

(PIM2)
Tighten these screws.
Do the same at the rear
side, too.
(FAN BOX)

Note

Tighten these screws.
Do the same at the rear
side, too.

(PIM1)
Tighten these screws.
Do the same at the rear
side, too.

Note:

FAN Unit (FANU) is
mounted either on the
TOPU, or inside the
FAN BOX. For detailed
procedures, refer to
Section 2 of this NAP.

(LPM/TSWM/DUMMY and PIM0)

(BASEU)

Figure 005-1 Procedure for Mounting Units and Modules
CHAPTER 3
Page 54
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-005
Sheet 2/16
Mounting of Units and Modules

2. INSTALLATION OF FANU

Location of FANU (PZ-M369 and three electronic FANs) is shown in Figure 005-2. Depending on your system configuration, mount the FANU in the proper position.
The mounting location of FANU differs depending on the module configuration of each cabinet. When the
cabinet consists of a total of two PIMS or fewer, the FANU is mounted on the TOPU. Otherwise, the FANU
is housed in the dedicated FAN BOX in the center of the cabinet.
NEC

TOPU

NEC

NEAX 2400 IMS

TOPU

FAN BOX

NEAX 2400 IMS

FANU is
located here.

FRONT VIEW

////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////




Figure 005-2 Locations of FANU

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 55
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-005
Sheet 3/16
Mounting of Units and Modules

3. PROCEDURE FOR FANU ON THE TOPU

When any IMG is configured by two PIMs or less, the FANU is mounted as shown in Figure 005-3. Because the
FANU is already mounted on the TOPU of the cabinet, perform STEP 4 through STEP 7 only, excepting a special
case (STEP 1 through STEP 3 are not required in the normal cases).
STEP 1: Referring to Figure 005-3, mount the three FANs onto the FAN Mounting Plate. Then, fasten every
four screws.
STEP 2: Accommodate the FAN Mounting Plate (tipped with three FANs) onto the TOPU.
Then, tighten the four screws (refer to Figure 005-3).
STEP 3: Mount the PZ-M369 onto the TOPU. Then, fasten the two screws (also refer to Figure 005-3).

ATTENTION

FAN Mounting Plate

Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

PZ-M369

TOPU
(TALM)

Figure 005-3 Mounting of FANU (on TOPU)

CHAPTER 3
Page 56
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-005
Sheet 4/16
Mounting of Units and Modules

STEP 4: Fix a FAN fuse (5.0A) onto the PZ-M369.

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

TH0

TH1

TH2

FAN

PWR SW

Note
FC0

FC1

FC2

TALM0 TALM1

ON
OFF
Auto

PZ-M369
Fasten a FAN fuse (5.0 A) here.

Note:

Heat run test of the FANU is shown in Chapter 4, ”SYSTEM STARTUP”. Therefore, keep the PWR SW
key to the center position (= OFF), still at this time.
Figure 005-4 Attachment of FAN Fuse (PZ-M369)

STEP 5: Connect the FAN cables as shown in Figure 005-5 and Figure 005-6.
STEP 6: Lastly, attach the Top Cover onto the TOPU of the cabinet. Then, fasten the four screws (refer to Figure 005-7).
Note:

The procedures, STEP 4 through STEP 6, must be performed at each PBX cabinet adopting 1-PIM or 2PIM configuration.

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 57
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-005
Sheet 5/16
Mounting of Units and Modules

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

TOPU

PBX
.. .. ..
NEC

NEAX 2400 IMS

NEAX 2400 IMS

NEC

FAN

Note 1

PZ-M369
TH0 TH1 TH2 FAN

FC0 FC1 FC2 TALM0

FANU
THM

Note 2
TALM

TOPU (Top View)
Note 1: For details on the “FAN” connector (PIM backplane), refer to Figure 005-6.
Note 2: For details on the “TALM” connector (TOPU panel), refer to Figure 005-3.
Figure 005-5 Cable Connections for FANU on TOPU
CHAPTER 3
Page 58
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-005
Sheet 6/16
Mounting of Units and Modules

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

PZ-M369

TH0

TH1

TH2

FAN

FC0

FC1

FC2

TALM0 TALM1

ON
OFF
Auto

TOPU
(FAN)
PIM
(FAN)

PBX

Figure 005-6 Connection of “FAN” Connector Cable (TOPU-PIM)

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 59
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-005
Sheet 7/16
Mounting of Units and Modules

Mount the Top Cover onto the TOPU.
Then, fasten the four screws by using
the Phillips screwdriver.

Top Cover

TOPU

NEC

NEAX 2400 IMS

PIM

Figure 005-7 Attachment of the Top Cover

CHAPTER 3
Page 60
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-005
Sheet 8/16
Mounting of Units and Modules

4. PROCEDURE FOR FANU IN THE FAN BOX

When any IMG is configured by 3 or 4 PIMs, the FANU must be accommodated within the FAN BOX in the center
of the cabinet. Because the FANU is originally mounted on the TOPU as shown in Figure 005-3, relocate the FANU
into the dedicated FAN BOX as per the STEPs below:
STEP 1: Referring to Figure 005-3, remove the FANU from the TOPU.
• Remove the two screws fastening the PZ-M369. Then, lift away the PZ-M369.
• Remove the four screws fastening the FAN Mounting Plate (tipped with three FANs).
• Then, lift away the FAN Mounting Plate.
Note:

Retain the removed screws.

STEP 2: Fasten the PZ-M369 and FAN Mounting Plate onto the FAN BOX connection bar (refer to Figure
005-8). Use two screws (for PZ-M369) and four screws (for FAN Mounting Plate) retained in STEP
1.
STEP 3: Connect the FAN cables for “FC0,” “FC1” and “FC2” connectors on the PZ-M369. Refer to Figure
005-9.
STEP 4: Insert the FANU, prepared in STEP 1 through STEP 3, into the FAN BOX. Then, secure the FANU
with the two screws (refer to Figure 005-8).

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 61
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-005
Sheet 9/16
Mounting of Units and Modules

Screws for FAN Mounting Plate
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

FAN BOX connection bar

FAN BOX connection bar

Screws for PZ-M369

Note
FAN BOX

Note:

Before inserting the FANU into the FAN BOX, connect the FAN cables for “FC0,” “FC1,” and “FC2”
connectors on the PZ-M369. Refer to Figure 005-9.
Figure 005-8 Relocation of FANU and Insertion into FAN BOX

CHAPTER 3
Page 62
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-005
Sheet 10/16
Mounting of Units and Modules

Before installing the FANU into the FAN BOX, connect FAN cables as shown below.

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

FAN0

FAN1

FAN2

FC0 FC1 FC2

PZ-M369

Figure 005-9 FAN Cable Connections for FC0/FC1/FC2 Connectors

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 63
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-005
Sheet 11/16
Mounting of Units and Modules

STEP 5: Fix a FAN fuse (5.0A) onto the PZ-M369 by referring to Figure 005-4.
STEP 6: Connect the remaining FAN cables as per Figure 005-10 and Figure 005-11.
STEP 7: Lastly, attach the Top Cover onto the TOPU of the cabinet. Then, fasten the four screws (refer to Figure 005-7).
Note:

The procedures, STEP 1 through STEP 7, must be performed at each PBX cabinet adopting 3-PIM or 4PIM configurations.

CHAPTER 3
Page 64
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-005
Sheet 12/16
Mounting of Units and Modules

(
)

T T
H H
2 2

(

T T
H H
1 1

ATTENTION

)

Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

(
)

T T
H H
0 0

TOPU
..

NEC

THM

NEAX 2400 IMS

Note 2
TALM

TOPU (Top View)

T
A
L
M
0

T
A
L
M

PBX
NEC

TH0TH1TH2FAN

NEAX 2400 IMS

TALM0
PZ-M369

Note 1

FAN BOX

PZ-M369 (Front View)

Note 1: For details on the “FAN” connector (PIM backplane), refer to Figure 005-11.
Note 2: For details on the “TALM” connector (TOPU), refer to Figure 005-3.
Figure 005-10 Cable Connections for FANU in FAN BOX
NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 65
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-005
Sheet 13/16
Mounting of Units and Modules

PBX
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

FAN power cable

(FAN)
FAN BOX
FAN BOX
FAN power cable
(FAN)

TH0

TH1

TH2

FAN

FC0

FC1

FC2

TALM0 TALM1

ON
OFF
Auto

PZ-M369

Figure 005-11 Connection of “FAN” Connector Cable (FAN BOX-PIM)

CHAPTER 3
Page 66
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-005
Sheet 14/16
Mounting of Units and Modules

5. ATTACHING THE ADDITIONAL NOISE FILTER UNIT (NFILU) TO THE BASEU

The following flowchart shows the procedure for attaching the Additional Noise Filter Unit (NFILU) to the BASEU
of the PBX. This work should be performed when the module stack contains 3 or 4 PIMs.

START
Referring to Figure 005-12 and Figure 005-13, insert the NFILU to BASEU and attach the NFILU with
two screws.
Referring to Figure 005-14, connect the cables equipped with NFILU to the terminals on the BASEU.
END

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 67
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-005
Sheet 15/16
Mounting of Units and Modules

SCREW

BASEU

NOISE FILTER UNIT (NFILU)

Figure 005-12 Insertion of NFILU

SCREW
SCREWS

BASEU

Figure 005-13 Attaching of NFILU

CHAPTER 3
Page 68
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-005
Sheet 16/16
Mounting of Units and Modules

BASEU

(GB1)

(-48VB)

(GB0)
(3)

(PZ-M371)

(4)

Already Attached
Noise Filter Unit
(1)
(PZ-M377)

(2)

(G)
(1)

(2)

(-48V)

Additional
Noise Filter
Unit (NFILU)

FRONT

Figure 005-14 Cabling Diagram of NFILU

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 69
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-006
Sheet 1/1
Installation of Power Equipment

This NAP explains the procedures for installing the power equipment.
Note:

The Circuit Breaker (NFB) for the Rectifier's DC output must remain OFF.

START
Install the power equipment at the predetermined location using anchor bolts, etc. Install the framework
for the batteries to be used for backup. Secure the framework using anchor bolts, etc.
Check the cabling at the primary and secondary sides of the power equipment, and the cabling to the
batteries
Confirm that the specifications of the customer-installed AC PDB (NFB capacity, voltage, phase, etc.)
conform to the specifications of the Rectifier.
Confirm that the proper communication ground is available.
Connect the input power cable and grounding cable to the rectifier.
Supply electrolyte to each battery as per the specifications of the battery.
Charge the batteries after verifying that the rectifier is operating normally.
END

CHAPTER 3
Page 70
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-007
Sheet 1/1
Installation of the MDF

This NAP explains the procedures for installing the MDF.

START
Install the MDF at the predetermined location on the floor or wall. Be sure to check the quantity of
accessory items such as arresters, block terminals, etc.
Install the MDF, taking into consideration the locations of lead-in holes for Local Cable, C.O. lines, Tie
Lines, and Cable Running Routes.
MDF Line Protector Ground must be separated from the Communication Ground connected to the
rectifier.
END

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 71
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-008
Sheet 1/13
Connection of Power and Ground
Cables from the Power Equipment

This NAP explains the following work items.
•

Connection of Power and Ground Cables

•

Connection of DC-DC Converter for Telephone sets equipped with Message Waiting Lamps

•

End Jointing of Power and Ground Cables

•

Branching of Power Cables

1. CONNECTION OF THE POWER AND GROUND CABLES
CAUTION: Grounding circuit continuity is vital for safe operation of telecommunication equipment.

Never operate telecommunication equipment with grounding conductor disconnected.

START
Cable Running

Run the power and ground cables per
Figure 008-1 and Figure 008-3.

Running of power and ground cables to the
Power Receiving Terminals in the BASEU

An example of cable running on a free access or
computer floor is shown in Figure 008-1.

Confirm that the Circuit Breaker (NFB) of the Rectifier is OFF.
Connection of the power and ground cables

Connect the power and ground cables to the
Power Receiving Terminals on the BASEU per
Figure 008-3.
Connect the power and ground cables to the
output terminals of the Rectifier.

Check after cable connections

Using a continuity tester, confirm that the -48 V
power cable is not shorting to the G power cable
or FE ground cable.

END

CHAPTER 3
Page 72
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-008
Sheet 2/13
Connection of Power and Ground
Cables from the Power Equipment

PBX
PIM

POWER RECEIVING TERMINAL
REAR LPM

POW
ER

AND
G

ROUN
D

CABL

ES

Figure 008-1 Detail of Cable Running

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 73
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-008
Sheet 3/13
Connection of Power and Ground
Cables from the Power Equipment

IMG3
IMG2
IMG1

POWER RECEIVING TERMINAL

IMG0
REAR LPM
REAR TSWM
REAR DUMMY
REAR DUMMY

T-BR
A

NCH

CO N

NEC POWER
T ION
A ND
G

ROU
N

D CA

B L ES

MA I
NC

ABL

E

Figure 008-2 Detail of Cable Running (Multiple IMG Configuration)

CHAPTER 3
Page 74
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-008
Sheet 4/13
Connection of Power and Ground
Cables from the Power Equipment

+80V:Terminal
-48V:B Terminal
G:B Terminal
-48V:A Terminal

Note 1

G:A Terminal
POWER AND GROUND CABLES

FE Terminal

PIM0

LPR

POWER RECEIVING TERMINAL
BASEU
REAR VIEW

Note 1: For 1/2 PIM configuration, connect the cable only to the A terminal.
Note 2: An example of End Jointing (using A Type-Clamp terminal) is explained in Section 3 of this NAP.
Figure 008-3 Connection of Power and Ground Cables to Power Receiving Terminal

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 75
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-008
Sheet 5/13
Connection of Power and Ground
Cables from the Power Equipment

2. CONNECTION OF DC-DC CONVERTER FOR TELEPHONE SETS EQUIPPED WITH MESSAGE WAITING
LAMPS

START
Cable Running

Referring to Figure 008-4, run the power and
ground cables.

Removal of shorting piece and cable
connection

Referring to Figure 008-5, remove the shorting
piece from the +80 V connector of PZ-M371 card,
and then connect the cable provided on the +80 V
Power Receiving Terminal Block to the +80 V
connector.

Confirm that the Circuit Breaker (NFB) of the Rectifier is OFF.
Connection of Power and Ground Cables

Referring to Figures 008-4 and 008-5, connect the
power and ground cable to each terminal of the
equipment.

Check after cable connections

Using a continuity tester, confirm that the –48 V
and +80 V power cable are not short-circuiting with
the G power cable or FE ground cables.

END

CHAPTER 3
Page 76
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-008
Sheet 6/13
Connection of Power and Ground
Cables from the Power Equipment

PBX

+80V

IV(WHITE)
DC-DC
CONVERTER

+80V

F
G G

–48V

G

OUTPUT

INPUT

IV (R)

TO RECTIFIER

IV (BL)
IV (G)

Note:

The current capacity of the DC-DC Converter is calculated by multiplying the (current capacity of
the message waiting lamp) by the number of telephone sets.

Figure 008-4 Example Connection Diagram-DC-DC Converter for Message Waiting Lamps

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 77
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-008
Sheet 7/13
Connection of Power and Ground
Cables from the Power Equipment

Power Receiving Terminal Block

Power Cable
PZ-M371
+80V

+80V

BASEU

Remove the shorting piece

Connect the Cable to the +80V Connector of PZ-M371 card

Figure 008-5 Removal of Shorting Piece and Cable Connection

CHAPTER 3
Page 78
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-008
Sheet 8/13
Connection of Power and Ground
Cables from the Power Equipment

3. END JOINTING OF POWER AND GROUND CABLES

START
Stripping of Insulation Sheath

Strip the wire to exceed the length of the terminal body
by 1 - 2 mm (1/8 inch).
WIRE SHEATH
CONDUCTOR

1/8 inch (1 - 2 mm)
CLAMP TERMINAL

Clamping

Referring to Figure 008-6, place the terminal body on
the die with the soldered part facing upward.
Referring to Figure 008-7, insert the stripped wire into
the terminal body up to the insulation-sheath edge, and
clamp the terminal.
Wipe the terminal with a dry cloth.

END

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 79
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-008
Sheet 9/13
Connection of Power and Ground
Cables from the Power Equipment

CONVEX DIE

SOLDERED PART
TERMINAL

CONCAVE DIE

Figure 008-6 Placing the Clamp Terminal on the Die

CONVEX DIE
INSULATION SHEATH
1/8 inch (1 - 2mm)

TERMINAL
CONCAVE DIE
SOLDERED PART
A

A'

CLAMPED PORTION
CLAMPED PORTION

A-A'

CONDUCTOR

Figure 008-7 Clamping Method

CHAPTER 3
Page 80
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-008
Sheet 10/13
Connection of Power and Ground
Cables from the Power Equipment

4. BRANCHING OF POWER CABLES

START
Stripping Main and Branch Cable

Referring to Figure 008-8, strip insulation coating
with an electrician’s knife. Avoid damage to the
conductor during the stripping process.

Inserting of Cables into Terminal

Insert the stripped main wire and branch wire into the
terminal as shown in Figure 008-9.

Clamping for Branch Jointing

Place T-Type terminal on the die of the clamping
tool, T-20 - T-44 terminals should be placed on the
center of the die.
T-60 - T-365 terminals should be placed on the die in
such a way that the terminal will be pressed on the
part marked with the roulette.

NO ROULLETTE
T-20-T-44

2 ROULLETTES
T-60-T-122

3 ROULLETTES
T-154-T-365

Proceed with the operation of the clamping tool
referring to Figure 008-10.
Clean the terminal with a dry cloth.
Taping and Covering

Referring to Figures 008-11 and 008-12, put an
installation cover over the clamped portion, after
taping with installation tape.

END

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 81
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-008
Sheet 11/13
Connection of Power and Ground
Cables from the Power Equipment

Table 008-1 Stripped Length
APPLICABLE TERMINAL

STRIPPED MAIN-WIRE LENGTH I1
[inch (mm)]

STRIPPED MAIN-WIRE LENGTH I2
[inch (mm)]

T-20

Approx. 1.2 (28)

Approx. 1.0 (24)

T-26

1.3 (32)

1.2 (28)

T-44

1.5 (37)

1.3 (33)

T-60

1.6 (40)

1.5 (36)

T-76

1.7 (42)

1.6 (39)

T-98

1.8 (44)

1.7 (41)

T-122

1.7–1.9 (43–46)

1.6–1.7 (40–43)

T-154

2.0 (49)

1.9 (46)

T-190

2.3 (57)

2.2 (54)

T-240

2.5 (63)

2.4 (60)

T-288

2.8 (69)

2.6 (66)

T-365

3.0 (75)

2.9 (72)

T-98
Sum of the cross sections of the main and branching, or the main and extension cables.
Type of clamp terminal (T type)

MAIN CABLE
I1

T TYPE
CLAMPTERMINAL

CONDUCTOR
BRANCH CABLE

I2

Figure 008-8 Stripped Length of Main and Branch Cable

CHAPTER 3
Page 82
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-008
Sheet 12/13
Connection of Power and Ground
Cables from the Power Equipment

MAIN CABLE

T TYPE
TERMINAL

BRANCH
CABLE
1/8 inch (1 - 2 mm)
BEND PRIOR TO INSERTION

Figure 008-9 Inserting of Cables into Terminal

CLAMPED PORTION

T TYPE
TERMINAL

DIE

CONDUCTOR
(MAIN AND
BRANCH CABLE)

Note:

• Prevent the wires from slipping out of the clamp terminal by holding them firmly.
• Check the indication of the pressure regulator.
• Operate the pressure release lever to release the
wires from the die.
Figure 008-10 Clamping for Branch Jointing

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 83
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-008
Sheet 13/13
Connection of Power and Ground
Cables from the Power Equipment

INSULATION TAPE

4-1.2 in (10 - 30 mm)

Note:

More than.4 in (10 mm)

Taping should be done in two rounds with the tape
overlapping half the tape width.
Figure 008-11 Taping

INSULATION COVER

Figure 008-12 Covering

CHAPTER 3
Page 84
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-009
Sheet 1/11
Setting of Switch Positions and
Mounting of Circuit Cards

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

This NAP explains the following work items:
•

Extraction of Mounted Circuit Cards

•

Mounting of Circuit Cards

•

Setting of Switch Positions on Circuit Cards

•

Installation of CPR

1. PRECAUTIONS
1.1. Protection Against Static Electricity

When setting switches on circuit cards, use a Portable Field Service Grounding Kit in order to prevent damage
to static-sensitive components.
Example:

3M Model 8012, consists of:

•

2 × 2 VELOSTAT ® Work Mat

•

15 ft. (4.5 m) Ground Cord

•

CHARGE-GUARD ® Wrist Strap with alligator clip

Before handling any circuit cards, first spread out the work mat, then connect the ground cord to the frame or
other ground source.
If a CHARGE-GUARD wrist strap is to be used, connect the wrist strap to the frame or other ground using the
provided cable.
1.2. Handling Circuit Cards

Whenever possible, do not handle circuit cards with bare hands.
The only portion of the card that can be touched is its edge. Do not touch the surface or the mounted components.
Doing so may damage the card.
Handle circuit cards with care. Never bang or drop them.
1.3. Mounting or Removing Circuit Cards when the System Is in Operation

Never mount or remove a circuit card without first setting its MBR and/or MB switch to the UP position.

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 85
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-009
Sheet 2/11
Setting of Switch Positions and
Mounting of Circuit Cards

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

2. EXTRACTION OF MOUNTED CIRCUIT CARDS

START
Remove the Card Stopper

Referring to Figure 009-1, remove the card stopper
from the module.

Extract Circuit Cards

Referring to Figure 009-2, pull the card puller tabs
in the direction indicated by the arrow. The card
will release from the connector and can then be
removed.
Pull the card out about 50 mm (2 inches) from the
edge of the module so that it does not contact the
backplane connector.

END

CHAPTER 3
Page 86
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-009
Sheet 3/11
Setting of Switch Positions and
Mounting of Circuit Cards

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

PAN HEAD SCREW (M3, 8mm (.3 inches) length)
SPRING WASHER (M3)
PLAIN WASHER (M3)
(PL-C.P.l. MS3815BF)

Remove the card stopper from the
module using a phillips-head screwdriver.

CARD STOPPER

Figure 009-1 Removal of Card Stopper

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 87
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-009
Sheet 4/11
Setting of Switch Positions and
Mounting of Circuit Cards

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

3. MOUNTING OF CIRCUIT CARDS

START
Unpacking the Circuit Cards

Unpack each circuit card and remove it from its
polyethylene bag.

Clean the connector portion of the
Circuit Cards

Wipe the connector portion clean using a soft cloth
moistened with pure trichloroethylene or methanol
(medical alcohol). Make sure that no lint or dust
remains on the connector after cleaning.
Circuit cards which are already mounted should be
extracted and cleaned as per the above instructions.

Confirm the mounting positions of the
Circuit Cards

Confirm the mounting position of each circuit card
by referring to the Module Face Layout.
Confirm that the color code of the card puller tab
coincides with that of the card mounting slot.
Confirm the Slot No. on the Module. Slot numbers
are indicated at the bottom of each module, and
range from 00 to 23.

Insert the cards into the Module

Partially insert the circuit card into the module,
making sure that it is correctly aligned at the top and
bottom. The card should extend about two inches
from the module, and must not contact the backplane
connector (see Figure 009-3).

END

CHAPTER 3
Page 88
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-009
Sheet 5/11
Setting of Switch Positions and
Mounting of Circuit Cards

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

4. SETTING OF SWITCH POSITIONS ON CIRCUIT CARDS

START
Extracting the Circuit Cards from the
Module

Extract one circuit card requiring switch setting from
the module.
Place the extracted card onto the anti-static sheet.

Perform switch setting

Set the required switches according to the Switch
Setting Sheets in the Circuit Card Manual.

Mounting of Circuit Cards

After the switches have been set, partially insert the
card in the module. The card should extend about 50
mm (2 inches) from the module, and must not contact
the backplane connector. Refer to Figure 009-3.

END

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 89
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-009
Sheet 6/11
Setting of Switch Positions and
Mounting of Circuit Cards

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

CIRCUIT
CARDS
About 50 mm
(2 inches)
CARD
PULLER
TAB

About 50 mm
(2 inches)

Figure 009-2 Extraction of Circuit Cards

CHAPTER 3
Page 90
Revision 3.0

Figure 009-3 Circuit Card Mounting (Partial Insertion)

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-009
Sheet 7/11
Setting of Switch Positions and
Mounting of Circuit Cards

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

5. INSTALLATION OF CPR

This Section explains the procedure to install the CPR into the LPM. Perform the following ([1] through [5]) for
both CPR0 and CPR1.
1.

Using the Phillips Screwdriver, remove the 4 + 8 screws. Then, detach the front panel and top cover from
the CPR. (Refer to Figure 009-4.)

As shown in the figure below, detach the front panel of the CPR by removing the 4 screws. Then, lift away
the top cover after removing the 8 screws.

Top Cover

Front Panel
CPR

Figure 009-4 Removal of Front Panel and Top Cover from CPR

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 91
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-009
Sheet 8/11
Setting of Switch Positions and
Mounting of Circuit Cards

2.

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

Depending on the system configuration, insert the ISAGT (PZ-GT13/16) and LANI
(PZ-PC19) cards into the following slots of the CPR (refer to Figure 009-5):
ISAGT (PZ-GT13/16) → Slot #6 (ISA) (Fixed)
LANI
→ Slot #0 (PCI) (For Fusion Link)
LANI
→ Slot #1 (PCI) (When connecting MAT via 10-BASE T and PCI buses)
LANI
→ Slot #3 (PCI) (When LANI for Fusion Link is in dual configuration: available for Release 3 or later software)

This figure (example) shows how to insert the ISAGT and LANI cards into CPR Slots #6 (ISA), and #0, #1
and #3 (PCI), respectively.
ISAGT
LANI

Slot 6 (ISA)
Slot 3 (PCI)
Slot 1 (PCI)
Slot 0 (PCI)

CPR

Note:

The LANI card for PCI Slot 3 is available for Release 3 or later software.
Figure 009-5 Insertion of ISAGT and LANI Cards into CPR Slots

CHAPTER 3
Page 92
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-009
Sheet 9/11
Setting of Switch Positions and
Mounting of Circuit Cards

3.

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

Attach the top cover and front panel again by fastening the removed screws. (Refer
to Figure 009-6.)

After mounting the ISAGT/LANI cards, reattach the top cover by tightening the 8 screws.
Then, also attach the Front Panel by fastening the 4 screws.

Top Cover

Front Panel
CPR

Figure 009-6 Reattachment of CPR Top Cover and Front Panel

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 93
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-009
Sheet 10/11
Setting of Switch Positions and
Mounting of Circuit Cards

4.

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

After turning “ON” the MBR key on the DSP of the CPR, insert the CPR into the
LPM. Then, fasten the four screws. (Refer to Figure 009-7.)

As shown in the figure below, insert the CPR into the LPM. Then, fasten the four screws.

LPM

CPR

Figure 009-7 Accommodation of New CPR into LPM

CHAPTER 3
Page 94
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-009
Sheet 11/11
Setting of Switch Positions and
Mounting of Circuit Cards

5.

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

Finally, insert the HFD into the CPR. Then, fasten the two screws. (Refer to Figure
009-8.)

By using the two screws, fasten the HFD onto the CPR.

LPM

HFD (PZ-IO27/28)
Figure 009-8 Insertion of New HFD into CPR

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 95
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-010
Sheet 1/71
Internal Cable Connections

This NAP explains how to run the following internal cables between Modules.

START
Confirm connector locations

Referring to Figures 010-1 through 010-4,
confirm the locations of the connectors into
which the internal cables are inserted.

Connection of FANU cables

Referring to the figures listed in Figures 010-4
through 010-9, connect FANU cables.

Connection of Internal Power Cables

Referring to the figures shown in Figures 01018 through 010-26, connect internal power
cables.

Connection of Internal Bus Cables

Referring to figures shown in Figures 010-35
through 010-37, connect internal bus cables.

END

CHAPTER 3
Page 96
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-010
Sheet 2/71
Internal Cable Connections

Since Cable connections vary depending on the system configuration which includes how many Port Interface Modules (PIMs) are accommodated in the system or whether redundancy is taken into account as to the CPU. Before
starting cable connections, find your system in “Quick Reference Table.” When you find your system in the table,
open the related pages, on which necessary information is provided, and then set about the cable connections.
Table 010-1 Quick Reference Table (1/6)
SYSTEM TYPE

KIND OF CABLE

FRAME NAME

FIGURE

TABLE

Power Cable

IMG0

010-5 ~
010-12

010-2 ~ 010-5

Internal Cable

IMG0

010-22 ~
010-29

010-15 ~
010-18

IMG0

010-13

010-6

IMG1

010-14

010-7

IMG0

010-30

010-19

IMG1

010-31

010-20

011-1

011-1

011-2

011-2

Single IMG Configuration
IMG
TOPU

PIM3
PIM2
FANU

PIM1
PIM0
LPM
BASEU

Multiple IMG Configuration
Power Cable
IMG0
TOPU

PIM3

Internal Cable

PIM2
FANU

PIM1

IMG1

PIM0

PIM0

LPM

TSWM

BASEU

BASEU

TOPU

5-PIM System

Inter-Frame Bus Cable

IMG0-IMG1

Inter-Frame
Alarm Bus Cable

IMG0-IMG1

011-11

011-11

IMG0

010-13

010-6

IMG1

010-15

010-8

IMG0

010-30

010-19

IMG1

010-32

010-21

011-1

011-1

011-2

011-2

011-11

011-11

Power Cable
IMG0
TOPU

PIM3
PIM2

IMG1

FANU

TOPU

PIM1

PIM1

PIM0

PIM0

LPM

TSWM

BASEU

BASEU

6-PIM System

Internal Cable
Inter-Frame Bus Cable

IMG0-IMG1

Inter-Frame
Alarm Bus Cable

IMG0-IMG1

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 97
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-010
Sheet 3/71
Internal Cable Connections

Table 010-1 Quick Reference Table (2/6)
SYSTEM TYPE

KIND OF CABLE

FRAME NAME

FIGURE

TABLE

IMG0

010-13

010-6

IMG1

010-16

010-9

IMG0

010-30

010-19

IMG1

010-33

010-22

011-1

011-1

011-2

011-2

Power Cable
IMG0
TOPU

PIM3

IMG1

PIM2

PIM2

TOPU

Internal Cable

FANU

PIM1

PIM1

PIM0

PIM0

LPM

TSWM

BASEU

BASEU

7-PIM System

Inter-Frame Bus Cable

IMG0-IMG1

Inter-Frame
Alarm Bus Cable

IMG0-IMG1

011-11

011-11

IMG0

010-13

010-6

IMG1

010-17

010-10

IMG0

010-30

010-19

IMG1

010-34

010-23

011-1

011-1

011-2

011-2

Power Cable
IMG0

IMG1

TOPU

TOPU

PIM3

PIM3

PIM2

PIM2

FANU

FANU

PIM1

PIM1

PIM0

PIM0

LPM

TSWM

BASEU

BASEU

8-PIM System

Internal Cable
Inter-Frame Bus Cable

IMG0-IMG1

Inter-Frame
Alarm Bus Cable

IMG0-IMG1

011-11

011-11

IMG0

010-13

010-6

IMG1

010-17

010-10

IMG2

010-18

010-11

IMG0

010-30

010-19

IMG1

010-34

010-23

011-1

011-1

011-2

011-2

IMG1-IMG2

011-3

011-3

IMG0-IMG1

011-11

011-11

IMG0-IMG2

011-12

011-12

Power Cable
IMG0

IMG1

TOPU

TOPU

PIM3

PIM3

PIM2

PIM2

FANU

Internal Cable

FANU

PIM1

PIM1

IMG2

PIM0

PIM0

PIM0

LPM
BASEU

TOPU

TSWM DUMMY
BASEU

Inter-Frame Bus Cable

BASEU

9-PIM System

Inter-Frame
Alarm Bus Cable

CHAPTER 3
Page 98
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

IMG0-IMG1

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-010
Sheet 4/71
Internal Cable Connections

Table 010-1 Quick Reference Table (3/6)
SYSTEM TYPE

KIND OF CABLE

FRAME NAME

FIGURE

TABLE

IMG0

010-13

010-6

IMG1

010-17

010-10

IMG2

010-19

010-12

IMG0

010-30

010-19

IMG1

010-34

010-23

IMG2

010-35

-

011-1

011-1

011-2

011-2

IMG1-IMG2

011-4

011-4

IMG0-IMG1

011-11

011-11

IMG0-IMG2

011-12

011-12

IMG0

010-13

010-6

IMG1

010-17

010-10

IMG2

010-20

010-13

IMG0

010-30

010-19

IMG1

010-34

010-23

IMG2

010-36

-

011-1

011-1

011-2

011-2

IMG1-IMG2

011-5

011-5

IMG0-IMG1

011-11

011-11

IMG0-IMG2

011-12

011-12

Power Cable
IMG0

IMG1

TOPU

TOPU

PIM3

PIM3

PIM2

PIM2

Internal Cable
IMG2

FANU

FANU

TOPU

PIM1

PIM1

PIM1

PIM0

PIM0

PIM0

LPM
BASEU

TSWM DUMMY
BASEU

BASEU

Inter-Frame Bus Cable

10-PIM System

Inter-Frame
Alarm Bus Cable
Power Cable
IMG0

IMG1

TOPU

TOPU

PIM3

PIM3

IMG2

PIM2

PIM2

PIM2

FANU

FANU

FANU

PIM1
PIM0
LPM
BASEU

TOPU

PIM1

PIM1

PIM0

PIM0

TSWM DUMMY
BASEU

BASEU

Internal Cable

Inter-Frame Bus Cable

11-PIM System

Inter-Frame
Alarm Bus Cable

NDA-24234

IMG0-IMG1

IMG0-IMG1

CHAPTER 3
Page 99
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-010
Sheet 5/71
Internal Cable Connections

Table 010-1 Quick Reference Table (4/6)
SYSTEM TYPE

KIND OF CABLE

FRAME NAME

FIGURE

TABLE

IMG0

010-13

010-6

IMG1

010-17

010-10

IMG2

010-21

010-14

IMG0

010-30

010-19

IMG1

010-34

010-23

IMG2

010-37

-

011-1

011-1

011-2

011-2

IMG1-IMG2

011-6

011-6

IMG0-IMG1

011-11

011-11

IMG0-IMG2

011-12

011-12

IMG0

010-13

010-6

IMG1

010-17

010-10

IMG2

010-21

010-14

IMG3

010-18

010-11

IMG0

010-30

010-19

IMG1

010-34

010-23

IMG2

010-37

-

011-1

011-1

011-2

011-2

IMG1-IMG2

011-6

011-6

IMG1-IMG3

011-7

011-7

IMG0-IMG1

011-11

011-11

IMG0-IMG2

011-12

011-12

IMG0-IMG3

011-13

011-13

Power Cable
IMG0

IMG1

IMG2

TOPU

TOPU

TOPU

PIM3

PIM3

PIM3

PIM2

PIM2

PIM2

FANU

FANU

FANU

PIM1

PIM1

PIM1

PIM0

PIM0

PIM0

LPM

Internal Cable

TSWM DUMMY

BASEU

BASEU

Inter-Frame Bus Cable

BASEU

12-PIM System

Inter-Frame
Alarm Bus Cable

Power Cable

IMG0

IMG1

IMG2

TOPU

TOPU

TOPU

PIM3

PIM3

PIM3

PIM2

PIM2

PIM2

Internal Cable

FANU

FANU

FANU

PIM1

PIM1

PIM1

IMG3

PIM0

PIM0

PIM0

PIM0

LPM

TOPU

IMG0-IMG1

TSWM DUMMY DUMMY
BASEU

BASEU

BASEU

13-PIM System

BASEU

Inter-Frame Bus Cable

Inter-Frame
Alarm Bus Cable

CHAPTER 3
Page 100
Revision 3.0

IMG0-IMG1

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-010
Sheet 6/71
Internal Cable Connections

Table 010-1 Quick Reference Table (5/6)
SYSTEM TYPE

KIND OF CABLE

FRAME NAME

FIGURE

TABLE

IMG0

010-13

010-6

IMG1

010-17

010-10

IMG2

010-21

010-14

IMG3

010-19

010-12

IMG0

010-30

010-19

IMG1

010-34

010-23

IMG2

010-37

-

IMG3

010-35

-

011-1

011-1

011-2

011-2

IMG1-IMG2

011-6

011-6

IMG1-IMG3

011-8

011-8

IMG0-IMG1

011-11

011-11

IMG0-IMG2

011-12

011-12

IMG0-IMG3

011-13

011-13

IMG0

010-13

010-6

IMG1

010-17

010-10

IMG2

010-21

010-14

IMG3

010-20

010-13

IMG0

010-30

010-19

IMG1

010-34

010-23

IMG2

010-37

-

IMG3

010-36

-

011-1

011-1

011-2

011-2

IMG1-IMG2

011-6

011-6

IMG1-IMG3

011-9

011-9

IMG0-IMG1

011-11

011-11

IMG0-IMG2

011-12

011-12

IMG0-IMG3

011-13

011-13

Power Cable

IMG0

IMG1

TOPU

TOPU

PIM3

PIM3

PIM3

PIM2

PIM2

PIM2

FANU

FANU

FANU

TOPU

PIM1

PIM1

PIM1

PIM1

PIM0

PIM0

PIM0

PIM0
LPM
BASEU

IMG2
TOPU

Internal Cable
IMG3

IMG0-IMG1

TSWM DUMMY DUMMY
BASEU

BASEU

BASEU

Inter-Frame Bus Cable

14-PIM System

Inter-Frame
Alarm Bus Cable

Power Cable

IMG0

IMG1

IMG2

TOPU

TOPU

TOPU

PIM3

PIM3

PIM3

IMG3

PIM2

PIM2

PIM2

PIM2

FANU

FANU

FANU

FANU

PIM1

PIM1

PIM1

PIM1

PIM0

PIM0

PIM0

PIM0
LPM
BASEU

TOPU

Internal Cable

IMG0-IMG1

TSWM DUMMY DUMMY
BASEU

BASEU

15-PIM System

BASEU

Inter-Frame Bus Cable

Inter-Frame
Alarm Bus Cable

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 101
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-010
Sheet 7/71
Internal Cable Connections

Table 010-1 Quick Reference Table (6/6)
SYSTEM TYPE

KIND OF CABLE

FRAME NAME

FIGURE

TABLE

IMG0

010-13

010-6

IMG1

010-17

010-10

IMG2

010-21

010-14

IMG3

010-21

010-14

IMG0

010-30

010-19

IMG1

010-34

010-23

IMG2

010-37

-

IMG3

010-37

-

011-1

011-1

011-2

011-2

IMG1-IMG2

011-6

011-6

IMG1-IMG3

011-10

011-10

IMG0-IMG1

011-11

011-11

IMG0-IMG2

011-12

011-12

IMG0-IMG3

011-13

011-13

Power Cable

IMG0

IMG1

IMG2

IMG3

TOPU

TOPU

TOPU

TOPU

PIM3

PIM3

PIM3

PIM3

PIM2

PIM2

PIM2

PIM2

FANU

FANU

FANU

FANU

PIM1

PIM1

PIM1

PIM1

PIM0

PIM0

PIM0

PIM0
LPM
BASEU

Internal Cable

IMG0-IMG1

TSWM DUMMY DUMMY
BASEU

BASEU

16-PIM System

BASEU

Inter-Frame Bus Cable

Inter-Frame
Alarm Bus Cable

CHAPTER 3
Page 102
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-010
Sheet 8/71
Internal Cable Connections

A
B

ALMB
10 ATI1 01
25

LT8

01

A
B
25

A
10

01

B
01

10

ATI0 01

01

25

LT6
25

50

26

2550

26

01

01

CONN10

CONN00
PLO0

26

PLO1

LT11
50

PLO

26

50

LT3
50
25

2601

50

26

LT2
FAN
1
2
3
4

LT10
50
25

26
01

50

26

CONN01
CONN03 CONN02

01

CONN13 CONN12

25

PWRB

25

01

50
25

26
01

50

26

1
2
3
4

01

25

LT1
50
25

26
01

LT0

LT4
01
A

50

26

PWRA

1
2
3
4

LT9
25

1
2
3

LT5

LT7

-48V0

1
2
3

MUSIC0

CONN11 MUSIC1

-48V1

10

ALMA01

B

A
B

50
20

BUS1A

01

26
A
B

20

BUS0A

01

Figure 010-1 Locations of Connectors on the PIM Backplane

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 103
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-010
Sheet 9/71
Internal Cable Connections

PWRA1 PWRA0

EMA

MISC MISC MISC

LED3

EBUS1

IOC

PWRB1 PWRB0

MISC1B

MISC2B

MISC3B

LED1

MISC4B

LED2

PALM1 PALM0

ALM3
BUS1 BUS0

MUSIC

EBUS0

MISC1A

MISC2A

MISC3A

ALM1 EXALM

MISC4A

ALM2

FALM

DSP
ALM

FAN
KEY

BZ-C21

Figure 010-2 Locations of Connectors on the LPM Backplane

CHAPTER 3
Page 104
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-010
Sheet 10/71

Internal Cable Connections

PWRA
MIO31
IOP1
IOP0
MUX003
MUX013
MUX023
MUX033
MUX103
MUX113
MUX123

MIORES1

MISC1B
MISC2B
MISC3B
MISC4B
MISC5B

MIO30

MUX002
MUX012
MUX022
MUX032
MUX102
MUX112
MUX122
MUX132

TIORES1

MUX133

EXCLK0

EXCLK1

MIORES0
MISC1A
MISC2A
MISC3A
MISC4A

MUX031

MUX021

MUX011

MUX001

MIO21

MUX100

MUX030

MUX020

MUX010

MUX000

MIO1

MISC5A

MUX101

MUX110

MIO0

MUX111

MUX120

MIO20

MUX121

EMAFH

MUX130

FALM
MUX131

TIORES0

CHAPTER 3
Page 105
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

EMA
ALM

PWRB

Figure 010-3 Location of Connectors on the TSWM Backplane (Multiple IMG Configuration)

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-010
Sheet 11/71
Internal Cable Connections

PIM

LPM

BASEU

POWER DISTRIBUTION TERMINAL BOARD

REAR VIEW

PA0

PB0

PA1

PB1

PA2

GA0
-48VA

PB2

PA3

+80A

GA1

-48VB

PB3

PA4

PB4

GB0
GB1

PZ-M371

DETAIL OF BOARD

Figure 010-4 Locations of Connectors on the Power Distribution Terminal Board (PZ-M371)

CHAPTER 3
Page 106
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-010
Sheet 12/71
Internal Cable Connections

Run the power cables, referring to Figure 010-6. Then, fasten the cables to the cabinet, referring to Figure 010-5.

Below is the rough sketch of how to run the power cables for the 1-PIM system. For details on actual cable
runnings, see Figure 010-6.

Backplane

PZ-M371 PKG
RE

Note:

AR

FR
ON
T

Normally, the cables are fastened onto the cabinet at the proposed locations, where small dots ( ) are provided in this figure.
Figure 010-5 Power Cable Connections for 1-PIM System (Single IMG Configuration)

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 107
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-010
Sheet 13/71
Internal Cable Connections

Connect the power cables as shown below. Cables represented in dotted-lines indicate power cable
for a dual-system.
REAR VIEW

FRONT VIEW
TOPU

NEAX

TOPU

00 01

02

03

(10)
-48V1

-48V0

PWR B

PWR A

(PIM 0)

(9)

(LPR)

PWR PWR

(7)

00 01 02 03 04 05 06

BSCM
OUT
PWR
INPWR

(6)

PALM

PALM 1

PALM 0

(8)

PALM

PWR A1 PWR B1

PWR A0 PWR B0

(LPR)

-48V0

BSCM

-48V1

(PIM 0)

(5)

00 01 02 03 04 05 06

OUT
PWR
INPWR

PZ-M371
PA 1

PB 1

PA 0

PB 0

(BASEU)

(BASEU)

(4)
(2)
(1)

(3)

Figure 010-6 Details on Power Cable Connections (for 1-PIM System) (Single IMG Configuration)

CHAPTER 3
Page 108
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-010
Sheet 14/71
Internal Cable Connections

Table 010-2 Power Cable Connection for IMG0 (Single IMG Configuration)
FROM

TO

No.

UNIT/
MODULE

CONNECTOR
NAME

UNIT/
MODULE

CONNECTOR
NAME

CABLE NAME

1

LPR

INPWR

BASEU

PA0

4P-2P PWR CA-A

2

LPR

INPWR

BASEU

PB0

4P-2P PWR CA-B

3

BASEU

PA1

PIM0

PWR A

4P PWR CA-C

4

BASEU

PB1

PIM0

PWR B

4P PWR CA-D

5

LPR

PALM

LPR

PALM 0

10AL-(110) FLT CA

6

LPR

OUT PWR

LPR

PWR A1/PWR B1 6P-(4P-3P) PWR CA-B

7

LPR

OUT PWR

LPR

PWR A0/PWR B0 6P-(4P-3P) PWR CA-A

8

LPR

PALM

LPR

PALM 1

10AL-(130) FLT CA

REMARKS

9

PIM0 (PWR) -48V IN CONN

PIM0

-48V0

3P PWR CA-A

-48V0

10

PIM0 (PWR) -48V IN CONN

PIM0

-48V1

3P PWR CA-B

-48V1

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 109
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-010
Sheet 15/71
Internal Cable Connections

Run the power cables, referring to Figure 010-6. Then, fasten the cables to the cabinet, referring to Figure 010-7.

Below is the rough sketch of how to run the power cables for the 2-PIM system. For details on actual cable runnings, see Figure 010-6.

Backplane

Backplane

PZ-M371 PKG

FR
ON

T

RE
AR

Note:

Normally, the cables are fastened onto the cabinet at the proposed locations, where small dots ( ) are
provided in this figure.
Figure 010-7 Power Cable Connections for 2-PIM System (Single IMG Configuration)

CHAPTER 3
Page 110
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-010
Sheet 16/71
Internal Cable Connections

REAR VIEW

FRONT VIEW

TOPU

TOPU

NEAX
00 01 02

03

(14)

(13)

-48V1

-48V0

PWR A

PWR B

-48V0

-48V1

PIM 1

PIM 1

PWR PWR
00 01

02

03

(12)
-48V1

-48V0

PWR B

(PIM 0)

(11)
PWR PWR

(LPR)

(10)
(9)

PALM

PWR A0 PWR B0

PWR A1 PWR B1

BSCM

-48V0 PWR A

-48V1

(PIM 0)

00 01 02 03 04 05 06

OUT
PWR

BSCM

INPWR
PALM 0

(8)
PALM

PALM 1

(LPM)

(7)

00 01 02 03 04 05 06

OUT
PWR
INPWR

PZ-M371

PA 2

PB 2

PB 1

PA 0

PB 0

(BASEU)

(BASEU)

(6)
(5)
(4)
(3)
(2)
(1)

Figure 010-8 Details on Power Cable Connections (for 2-PIM System) (Single IMG Configuration)
NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 111
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-010
Sheet 17/71
Internal Cable Connections

Table 010-3 Power Cable Connections for 2-PIM System (Single IMG Configuration)
FROM

TO

No.

UNIT/
MODULE

CONNECTOR
NAME

UNIT/
MODULE

CONNECTOR
NAME

1

LPR

INPWR

BASEU

PA0

4P-2P PWR CA-A

2

LPR

INPWR

BASEU

PB0

4P-2P PWR CA-B

3

BASEU

PA1

PIM0

PWR A

4P PWR CA-C

4

BASEU

PB1

PIM0

PWR B

4P PWR CA-D

5

BASEU

PA2

PIM1

PWR A

4P PWR CA-E

6

BASEU

PB2

PIM1

PWR B

4P PWR CA-F

7

LPR

PALM

LPR

PALM 0

10AL-(110) FLT CA

8

LPR

OUT PWR

LPR

PWR A1/PWR B1 6P-(4P-3P) PWR CA-B

9

LPR

OUT PWR

LPR

PWR A0/PWR B0 6P-(4P-3P) PWR CA-A

10

LPR

PALM

LPR

PALM 1

10AL-(130) FLT CA

11 PIM0 (PWR)

-48V IN CONN

PIM0

-48V0

3P PWR CA-A

-48V0

12 PIM0 (PWR)

-48V IN CONN

PIM0

-48V1

3P PWR CA-B

-48V1

13 PIM1 (PWR)

-48V IN CONN

PIM1

-48V0

3P PWR CA-A

-48V0

14 PIM1 (PWR)

-48V IN CONN

PIM1

-48V1

3P PWR CA-B

-48V1

CHAPTER 3
Page 112
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

CABLE NAME

REMARKS

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-010
Sheet 18/71
Internal Cable Connections

Run the power cables, referring to Figure 010-10. Then, fasten the cables to the cabinet, referring to Figure 010-9.
Below is the rough sketch of how to run the power cables for the 3-PIM system. For details on actual cable runnings, see Figure 010-10.

Backplane

Backplane

Backplane

PZ-M371 PKG

Note:

Normally, the cables are fastened onto the cabinet at the proposed locations, where small dots (•) are
provided in this figure.
Figure 010-9 Power Cable Connections for 3-PIM System (Single IMG Configuration)
NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 113
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-010
Sheet 19/71
Internal Cable Connections

Connect the power cables as shown below. Cables represented in dotted lines indicate power cables for a dualsystem.
REAR VIEW

FRONT VIEW
NEAX

TOPU

TOPU

00 01 02 03

(18)
-48V1

-48V0

-48V0 PWR A

-48V1 PWR B

PIM 2

PIM 2

(17)
PWR PWR
FANU

FANU
00 01 02 03

-48V1

-48V0

-48V0

PIM 1

(15)
PWR PWR

PWR A

-48V1 PWR B

PIM 1

(16)

00 01 02 03

-48V1

(PIM 0)

(13)
PWR PWR

(LPM)

(11)

PALM

(12)

PWR A0 PWR B0

PWR A1 PWR B1

00 01 02 03 04 05 06

OUT
PWR

(9)

BSCM

INPWR
PALM

PALM 1

(10)

PALM 0

(LPM)

-48V0

-48V1 PWR B

BSCM

-48V0 PWR A

(PIM 0)

(14)

00 01 02 03 04 05 06

OUT
PWR
INPWR

PZ-M371
PA 3

PB 3

PA 2

PB 2

PA 1

PB 1

PA 0

PB 0

(BASEU)

(BASEU)

(2)
(1)

(3)

(5)
(4)
(7)
(6)

(8)

Figure 010-10 Details on Power Cable Connections (for 3-PIM System) (Single IMG Configuration)

CHAPTER 3
Page 114
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-010
Sheet 20/71
Internal Cable Connections

Table 010-4 Power Cable Connections for 3-PIM System (Single IMG Configuration)
FROM

TO

No.

UNIT/
MODULE

CONNECTOR
NAME

UNIT/
MODULE

CONNECTOR
NAME

CABLE NAME

1

LPR

INPWR

BASEU

PA0

4P-2P PWR CA-A

2

LPR

INPWR

BASEU

PB0

4P-2P PWR CA-B

3

BASEU

PA1

PIM0

PWR A

4P PWR CA-C

4

BASEU

PB1

PIM0

PWR B

4P PWR CA-D

5

BASEU

PA2

PIM1

PWR A

4P PWR CA-E

6

BASEU

PB2

PIM1

PWR B

4P PWR CA-F

7

BASEU

PA3

PIM2

PWR A

4P PWR CA-G

8

BASEU

PB3

PIM2

PWR B

4P PWR CA-H

9

LPR

PALM

LPR

PALM 0

10AL-(110) FLT CA

10

LPR

OUT PWR

LPR

PWR A1/PWR B1 6P-(4P-3P) PWR CA-B

11

LPR

OUT PWR

LPR

PWR A0/PWR B0 6P-(4P-3P) PWR CA-A

12

LPR

PALM

LPR

PALM 1

10AL-(130) FLT CA

13

PIM0 (PWR)

-48V IN CONN

PIM0

-48V0

3P PWR CA-A

-48V0

14

PIM0 (PWR)

-48V IN CONN

PIM0

-48V1

3P PWR CA-B

-48V1

15

PIM1 (PWR)

-48V IN CONN

PIM1

-48V0

3P PWR CA-A

-48V0

16

PIM1 (PWR)

-48V IN CONN

PIM1

-48V1

3P PWR CA-B

-48V1

17

PIM2 (PWR)

-48V IN CONN

PIM2

-48V0

3P PWR CA-A

-48V0

18

PIM2 (PWR)

-48V IN CONN

PIM2

-48V1

3P PWR CA-B

-48V1

NDA-24234

REMARKS

CHAPTER 3
Page 115
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-010
Sheet 21/71
Internal Cable Connections

Run the power cables, referring to Figure 010-12. Then, fasten the cables to the cabinet, referring to Figure 010-11.

Below is the rough sketch of how to run the power cables for the 4-PIM system. For details on actual cable runnings, see Figure 010-12.

Backplane

Backplane

Backplane

Backplane

PZ-M371 PKG

Note:

Normally, the cables are fastened onto the cabinet at the proposed locations, where small dots (•) are
provided in this figure.
Figure 010-11 Power Cable Connections for 4-PIM System (Single IMG Configuration)

CHAPTER 3
Page 116
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-010
Sheet 22/71
Internal Cable Connections

Connect the power cables as shown below. Cables represented in dotted-lines indicate power cables for a
dual-system.
REAR VIEW
FRONT VIEW

TOPU

TOPU

NEAX
00 01

02 03

(22)
PIM 3

-48V1

-48V0

-48V0 PWR A

-48V1 PWR B

PIM 3

(21)
PWR PWR
00 01 02 03

(20)
PIM 2

-48V1

-48V0

-48V0 PWR A

-48V1 PWR B

PIM 2

(19)
PWR PWR
FANU

FANU
00 01

(18)

-48V1

-48V1

-48V0 PWR A

-48V1 PWR B

PIM 1

02 03

PIM 1

(17)
PWR PWR
00 01 02 03

(16)
-48V1

-48V0

(PIM

0)

(LPM)

PALM

(14)
(13)

00 01 02 03 04 05 06

OUT
PWR

BSCM

INPWR

PALM 0

(12)

PALM

PALM 1

(LPM)

(15)
PWR PWR

PWR A0 PWR B0

PWR A1 PWR B1

BSCM

-48V0 PWR A

-48V1 PWR B

(PIM 0)

(11)

00 01 02 03 04 05 06

OUT
PWR
INPWR

PZ-M371
PB 4

PA 4

PB 3

PA 3

PB 2

PA 2

PB 1

PA 1

PB 0

PA 0

(BASEU)

(BASEU)

(1)

(3)
(2)

(5)
(4)
(7)
(6)

(10)
(9)
(8)

Figure 010-12 Details on Power Cable Connections (for 4-PIM System) (Single IMG Configuration)
NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 117
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-010
Sheet 23/71
Internal Cable Connections

Table 010-5 Power Cable Connections for 4-PIM System (Single IMG Configuration)
FROM

TO

No.

UNIT/
MODULE

CONNECTOR
NAME

UNIT/
MODULE

CONNECTOR
NAME

CABLE NAME

1

LPR

INPWR

BASEU

PA0

4P-2P PWR CA-A

2

LPR

INPWR

BASEU

PB0

4P-2P PWR CA-B

3

BASEU

PA1

PIM0

PWR A

4P PWR CA-C

4

BASEU

PB1

PIM0

PWR B

4P PWR CA-D

5

BASEU

PA2

PIM1

PWR A

4P PWR CA-E

6

BASEU

PB2

PIM1

PWR B

4P PWR CA-F

7

BASEU

PA3

PIM2

PWR A

4P PWR CA-G

8

BASEU

PB3

PIM2

PWR B

4P PWR CA-H

9

BASEU

PA4

PIM3

PWR A

4P PWR CA-I

10

BASEU

PB4

PIM3

PWR B

4P PWR CA-J

11

LPR

PALM

LPR

PALM 0

10AL-(110) FLT CA

12

LPR

OUT PWR

LPR

PWR A1/PWR B1 6P-(4P-3P) PWR CA-B

13

LPR

OUT PWR

LPR

PWR A0/PWR B0 6P-(4P-3P) PWR CA-A

14

LPR

PALM

LPR

PALM 1

10AL-(130) FLT CA

REMARKS

15

PIM0 (PWR) -48V IN CONN

PIM0

-48V0

3P PWR CA-A

-48V0

16

PIM0 (PWR) -48V IN CONN

PIM0

-48V1

3P PWR CA-B

-48V1

17

PIM1 (PWR) -48V IN CONN

PIM1

-48V0

3P PWR CA-A

-48V0

18

PIM1 (PWR) -48V IN CONN

PIM1

-48V1

3P PWR CA-B

-48V1

19

PIM2 (PWR) -48V IN CONN

PIM2

-48V0

3P PWR CA-A

-48V0

20

PIM2 (PWR) -48V IN CONN

PIM2

-48V1

3P PWR CA-B

-48V1

21

PIM3 (PWR) -48V IN CONN

PIM3

-48V0

3P PWR CA-A

-48V0

22

PIM3 (PWR) -48V IN CONN

PIM3

-48V1

3P PWR CA-B

-48V1

CHAPTER 3
Page 118
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-010
Sheet 24/71
Internal Cable Connections

Run the internal power cables, referring to Figure 010-13 through Figure 010-26.
Connect the internal power cables for IMG0 as shown below. Note that the dotted lines indicate power cables for
a dual-system.
REAR VIEW

FRONT VIEW
TOPU

TOPU
00 01 02 03

(22)
-48v0 PWRA

-48v1 PWRB

PIM 3

PIM 3
(21)
PWR PWR
00 01 02 03

(20)
-48v1 PWRB

-48v0 PWRA

PIM 2

PIM 2
(19)
PWR PWR
FANU

FANU
00 01 02 03
-48v1 PWRB

-48v0 PWRA

PIM 1

PIM 1
(17)
PWR PWR
00 01 02 03

PWRA
PWRA1 PWRB1

PWRA0 PWRB0

PALM1

PALM0

(LPM)

-48v1 PWRB

BSCM

-48v0 PWRA

(PIM 0)

(18)

(16)

(15)
PWR PWR
(14)
(13)

(12)

00 01 02 03 04 05 06

BSCM

00 01 02 03 04 05 06

(11)

(BASEU)
(5)
(3)(4)
(2)
(1)

(10)
(9)
(7) (8)
(6)

Figure 010-13 Power Cable Connection for IMG0 (Multiple IMG Configuration)
NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 119
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-010
Sheet 25/71
Internal Cable Connections

Table 010-6 Power Cable Connection for IMG0 (Multiple IMG Configuration)
FROM
No.

TO

CONNECTOR
NAME

UNIT/
MODULE

CONNECTOR
NAME

CABLE NAME

UNIT/MODULE

1

LPM

INPWR

BASEU

PA0

4P-2P PWR CA-A

2

LPM

INPWR

BASEU

PB0

4P-2P PWR CA-B

3

BASEU

PA1

PIM0

PWR A

4P PWR CA-C

4

BASEU

PB1

PIM0

PWR B

4P PWR CA-D

5

BASEU

PA2

PIM1

PWR A

4P PWR CA-E

6

BASEU

PB2

PIM1

PWR B

4P PWR CA-F

7

BASEU

PA3

PIM2

PWR A

4P PWR CA-G

8

BASEU

PB3

PIM2

PWR B

4P PWR CA-H

9

BASEU

PA4

PIM3

PWR A

4P PWR CA-I

10

BASEU

PB4

PIM3

PWR B

4P PWR CA-J

11

LPM

PALM

LPM

PALM0

10AL-(110) FLT CA

12

LPM

OUTPWR

LPM

PWR A1/PWR

6P-(4P-3P) PWR CA-B

13

LPM

OUTPWR

LPM

PWR A0/PWR

6P-(4P-3P) PWR CA-A

14

LPM

PALM

LPM

PALM1

10AL-(130) FLT CA

15

PIM0 (PWR)

-48V IN CONN

PIM0

-48V0

3P PWR CA-A

-48V0

16

PIM0 (PWR)

-48V IN CONN

PIM0

-48V1

3P PWR CA-B

-48V1

17

PIM1 (PWR)

-48V IN CONN

PIM1

-48V0

3P PWR CA-A

-48V0

18

PIM1 (PWR)

-48V IN CONN

PIM1

-48V1

3P PWR CA-B

-48V1

19

PIM2 (PWR)

-48V IN CONN

PIM2

-48V0

3P PWR CA-A

-48V0

20

PIM2 (PWR)

-48V IN CONN

PIM2

-48V1

3P PWR CA-B

-48V1

21

PIM3 (PWR)

-48V IN CONN

PIM3

-48V0

3P PWR CA-A

-48V0

22

PIM3 (PWR)

-48V IN CONN

PIM3

-48V1

3P PWR CA-B

-48V1

CHAPTER 3
Page 120
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

REMARKS

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-010
Sheet 26/71
Internal Cable Connections

Connect the internal power cables for 1-PIM system of IMG1 as shown below. Note that the dotted lines indicate power cables for a dual-system.

REAR VIEW

FRONT VIEW

TOPU

TOPU
00 01

02

03

(6)
-48V1

PWR PWR

PWR A PWR B

12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

TSW(PH-SW12)

TSW(PH-SW12)

TSW(PH-SW12)

TSW(PH-SW12)

TSW(PH-SW12)

MUX110 MUX010

TSW(PH-SW12)

MICRES0

TSW(PH-SW12)

TSW(PH-SW12)

TSWM
TIORES0

PIM 0

(5)

PWR A

PWR B

MICRES1

-48V0

-48V1

TIORES1

-48V0

PIM 0

TSWM

00 01 02 03 10 11 12 13

PZ-M371
PA 1

BASEU

PB 1

PA 0

PB 0

BASEU

(4)
(3)
(2)
(1)

Figure 010-14 Power Cable Connection for IMG1 (1-PIM System) (Multiple IMG Configuration)

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 121
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-010
Sheet 27/71
Internal Cable Connections

Table 010-7 Power Cable Connection for IMG1 (1-PIM System) (Multiple IMG Configuration)
FROM
No.

TO

CONNECTOR
NAME

UNIT/
MODULE

CONNECTOR
NAME

CABLE NAME

UNIT/MODULE

1

BASEU

PA0

TSWM

PWR A

4P PWR CA-A

2

BASEU

PB0

TSWM

PWR B

4P PWR CA-B

3

BASEU

PA1

PIM0

PWR A

4P PWR CA-C

4

BASEU

PB1

PIM0

PWR B

4P PWR CA-D

5

PIM0 (PWR)

-48V IN CONN

PIM0

-48V0

3P PWR CA-A

-48V0

6

PIM0 (PWR)

-48V IN CONN

PIM0

-48V1

3P PWR CA-B

-48V1

CHAPTER 3
Page 122
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

REMARKS

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-010
Sheet 28/71
Internal Cable Connections

Connect the internal power cables for 2-PIM system of IMG1 as shown below. Note that the dotted lines indicate
power cables for a dual-system.
REAR VIEW

FRONT VIEW
TOPU

TOPU
00

01

02

03

(10)
-48V1

-48V0

-48V1 PWR B

-48V0 PWR A

PIM 1

PIM 1

(9)
PWR PWR
00

01

02 03

(8)
-48V1

PWR B

PWR A

-48V0

-48V1

-48V0

PIM 0

PIM 0

(7)
PWR PWR

TSW(PH-SW12)

TSW(PH-SW12)

TSW(PH-SW12)

TSW(PH-SW12)

TSW(PH-SW12)

MUX110

TSW(PH-SW12)

TSWM

TSW(PH-SW12)

MICRES0

TSW(PH-SW12)

TIORES0

PWR B

MICRES1

PWR A

TIORES1

12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

TSWM

00 01 02 03 10 11 12 13

MUX010

PZ-M371
PA 2

BASEU

PB 2

PA 1

PB 1

PA 0

PB 0

BASEU

(6)
(5)
(4)
(3)
(2)
(1)

Figure 010-15 Power Cable Connection for IMG1 (2-PIM System) (Multiple IMG Configuration)

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 123
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-010
Sheet 29/71
Internal Cable Connections

Table 010-8 Power Cable Connection for IMG1 (2-PIM System) (Multiple IMG Configuration)
FROM
No.

TO

CONNECTOR
NAME

UNIT/
MODULE

CONNECTOR
NAME

CABLE NAME

UNIT/MODULE

1

BASEU

PA0

TSWM

PWR A

4P PWR CA-A

2

BASEU

PB0

TSWM

PWR B

4P PWR CA-B

3

BASEU

PA1

PIM0

PWR A

4P PWR CA-C

4

BASEU

PB1

PIM0

PWR B

4P PWR CA-D

5

BASEU

PA2

PIM1

PWR A

4P PWR CA-E

6

BASEU

PB2

PIM1

PWR B

4P PWR CA-F

7

PIM0 (PWR)

-48V IN CONN

PIM0

-48V0

3P PWR CA-A

-48V0

8

PIM0 (PWR)

-48V IN CONN

PIM0

-48V1

3P PWR CA-B

-48V1

9

PIM1 (PWR)

-48V IN CONN

PIM1

-48V0

3P PWR CA-A

-48V0

10

PIM1 (PWR)

-48V IN CONN

PIM1

-48V1

3P PWR CA-B

-48V1

CHAPTER 3
Page 124
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

REMARKS

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-010
Sheet 30/71
Internal Cable Connections

Connect the internal power cables for 3-PIM system of IMG1 as shown below. Note that the dotted lines indicate power cables for a dual-system.
REAR VIEW

FRONT VIEW
TOPU

TOPU
00 01 02 03

(14)

PWR A

PIM 2

-48V1

PWR B

-48V0

-48V1

-48V0

PIM 2

(13)
PWR PWR
FANU

FANU
00 01 02 03

-48V1

PWR B

PWR A

-48V0

-48V1

-48V0

PIM 1

(11)

PIM 0

(9)
PWR PWR

PWR A PWR B

12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

TSW(PH-SW12)
TSW(PH-SW12)
TSW(PH-SW12)
TSW(PH-SW12)
TSW(PH-SW12)
TSW(PH-SW12)
TSW(PH-SW12)
TSW(PH-SW12)

MICRES0

TIORES0

(10)

-48V1

PWR B

PWR A

MICRES1

-48V0

-48V1

-48V0

TIORES1

TSWM

PIM 1

PWR PWR
00 01 02 03

PIM 0

(12)

MUX110 MUX010

TSWM

00 01 02 03 10 11 12 13

PZ-M371
PA 3

PB 3

PA 2

PB 2

PA 1

PB 1

PA 0

PB 0

BASEU

BASEU

(4)
(3)
(2)
(1)

(5)
(8)
(7)
(6)

Figure 010-16 Power Cable Connection for IMG1 (3-PIM System) (Multiple IMG Configuration)
NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 125
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-010
Sheet 31/71
Internal Cable Connections

Table 010-9 Power Cable Connection for IMG1 (3-PIM System) (Multiple IMG Configuration)
FROM
No.

TO

CONNECTOR
NAME

UNIT/
MODULE

CONNECTOR
NAME

CABLE NAME

UNIT/MODULE

1

BASEU

PA0

TSWM

PWR A

4P PWR CA-A

2

BASEU

PB0

TSWM

PWR B

4P PWR CA-B

3

BASEU

PA1

PIM0

PWR A

4P PWR CA-C

4

BASEU

PB1

PIM0

PWR B

4P PWR CA-D

5

BASEU

PA2

PIM1

PWR A

4P PWR CA-E

6

BASEU

PB2

PIM1

PWR B

4P PWR CA-F

7

BASEU

PA3

PIM2

PWR A

4P PWR CA-G

8

BASEU

PB3

PIM2

PWR B

4P PWR CA-H

9

PIM0 (PWR)

-48V IN CONN

PIM0

-48V0

3P PWR CA-A

-48V0

10

PIM0 (PWR)

-48V IN CONN

PIM0

-48V1

3P PWR CA-B

-48V1

11

PIM1 (PWR)

-48V IN CONN

PIM1

-48V0

3P PWR CA-A

-48V0

12

PIM1 (PWR)

-48V IN CONN

PIM1

-48V1

3P PWR CA-B

-48V1

13

PIM2 (PWR)

-48V IN CONN

PIM2

-48V0

3P PWR CA-A

-48V0

14

PIM2 (PWR)

-48V IN CONN

PIM2

-48V1

3P PWR CA-B

-48V1

CHAPTER 3
Page 126
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

REMARKS

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-010
Sheet 32/71
Internal Cable Connections

Connect the internal power cables for 4-PIM system of IMG1 as shown below. Note that the dotted lines indicate
power cables for a dual-system.
REAR VIEW

FRONT VIEW
TOPU

TOPU
00 01 02 03

(18)
PIM 3

-48V1

-48V0

-48V1 PWR B

-48V0 PWR A

PIM 3

(17)
PWR PWR
00 01 02 03

(16)
PIM 2

-48V1

-48V0

-48V1 PWR B

-48V0 PWR A

PIM 2

(15)
PWR PWR
FANU

FANU
00 01 02 03

PIM 1

-48V1

-48V0

-48V0 PWR A

-48V1 PWR B

PIM 1

(14)

(13)
PWR PWR
00 01 02 03

(12)

(11)
PWR PWR
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
TSW(PH-SW12)
TSW(PH-SW12)
TSW(PH-SW12)
TSW(PH-SW12)
TSW(PH-SW12)
TSW(PH-SW12)
TSW(PH-SW12)
TSW(PH-SW12)

MICRES0

-48V1

TIORES0

-48V0

MICRES1

TSWM

PIM 0

PWR A PWR B

TIORES1

-48V0 PWR A

-48V1 PWR B

PIM 0

MUX010

MUX110

TSWM

00 01 02 03 10 11 12 13
PZ-M371
PA 4

BASEU

PB 4

PA 3

PB 3

PA 2

PB 2

PA 1

PB 1

PA 0

PB 0

BASEU

(10)
(9)
(8)
(7)
(6)
(2)
(1)

(4)

(5)

(3)

Figure 010-17 Power Cable Connection for IMG1 (4-PIM System) (Multiple IMG Configuration)
NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 127
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-010
Sheet 33/71
Internal Cable Connections

Table 010-10 Power Cable Connection for IMG1 (4-PIM System) (Multiple IMG Configuration)
FROM
No.

TO

CONNECTOR
NAME

UNIT/
MODULE

CONNECTOR
NAME

CABLE NAME

UNIT/MODULE

1

BASEU

PA0

TSWM

PWR A

4P PWR CA-A

2

BASEU

PB0

TSWM

PWR B

4P PWR CA-B

3

BASEU

PA1

PIM0

PWR A

4P PWR CA-C

4

BASEU

PB1

PIM0

PWR B

4P PWR CA-D

5

BASEU

PA2

PIM1

PWR A

4P PWR CA-E

6

BASEU

PB2

PIM1

PWR B

4P PWR CA-F

7

BASEU

PA3

PIM2

PWR A

4P PWR CA-G

8

BASEU

PB3

PIM2

PWR B

4P PWR CA-H

9

BASEU

PA4

PIM3

PWR A

4P PWR CA-I

10

BASEU

PB4

PIM3

PWR B

4P PWR CA-J

11

PIM0 (PWR)

-48V IN CONN

PIM0

-48V0

3P PWR CA-A

-48V0

12

PIM0 (PWR)

-48V IN CONN

PIM0

-48V1

3P PWR CA-B

-48V1

13

PIM1 (PWR)

-48V IN CONN

PIM1

-48V0

3P PWR CA-A

-48V0

14

PIM1 (PWR)

-48V IN CONN

PIM1

-48V1

3P PWR CA-B

-48V1

15

PIM2 (PWR)

-48V IN CONN

PIM2

-48V0

3P PWR CA-A

-48V0

16

PIM2 (PWR)

-48V IN CONN

PIM2

-48V1

3P PWR CA-B

-48V1

17

PIM3 (PWR)

-48V IN CONN

PIM3

-48V0

3P PWR CA-A

-48V0

18

PIM3 (PWR)

-48V IN CONN

PIM3

-48V1

3P PWR CA-B

-48V1

CHAPTER 3
Page 128
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

REMARKS

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-010
Sheet 34/71
Internal Cable Connections

Connect the internal power cables for 1-PIM system of IMG2/3 as shown below. Note that the dotted lines indicate power cables for a dual-system.
REAR VIEW

FRONT VIEW
TOPU

TOPU
00

01

02

03

(4)

PWR A

-48V1

-48V0

PWR B

-48V0

-48V1

PIM 0

PIM 0

(3)
PWR PWR

DUMMY
DUMMY

PZ-M371
PA 1

BASEU

PB 1

PA 0

PB 0

BASEU

(2)
(1)

Figure 010-18 Power Cable Connection for IMG2/3 (1-PIM System) (Multiple IMG Configuration)

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 129
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-010
Sheet 35/71
Internal Cable Connections

Table 010-11 Power Cable Connection for IMG2/3 (1-PIM System) (Multiple IMG Configuration)
FROM
No.

TO

CONNECTOR
NAME

UNIT/
MODULE

CONNECTOR
NAME

CABLE NAME

UNIT/MODULE

1

BASEU

PA1

PIM0

PWR A

4P PWR CA-C

2

BASEU

PB1

PIM0

PWR B

4P PWR CA-D

3

PIM0 (PWR)

-48V IN CONN

PIM0

-48V0

3P PWR CA-A

-48V0

4

PIM0 (PWR)

-48V IN CONN

PIM0

-48V1

3P PWR CA-B

-48V1

CHAPTER 3
Page 130
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

REMARKS

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-010
Sheet 36/71
Internal Cable Connections

Connect the internal power cables for 2-PIM system of IMG2/3 as shown below. Note that the dotted lines indicate power cables for a dual-system.
REAR VIEW

FRONT VIEW
TOPU

TOPU
00 01

02 03

(8)
-48V1

PWR B

PWR A

-48V0

-48V1

-48V0

PIM 1

PIM 1

(7)
PWR PWR
00 01

02 03

(6)

PWR B

PWR A

-48V1

-48V0

-48V0

-48V1

PIM 0

PIM 0

(5)
PWR PWR

DUMMY
DUMMY

PZ-M371

BASEU

PB 2

PA 2

PB 1

PA 1

PB 0

PA 0

BASEU

(4)
(3)
(2)
(1)

Figure 010-19 Power Cable Connection for IMG2/3 (2-PIM System) (Multiple IMG Configuration)

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 131
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-010
Sheet 37/71
Internal Cable Connections

Table 010-12 Power Cable Connection for IMG2/3 (2-PIM System) (Multiple IMG Configuration)
FROM
No.

TO

CONNECTOR
NAME

UNIT/
MODULE

CONNECTOR
NAME

CABLE NAME

UNIT/MODULE

1

BASEU

PA1

PIM0

PWR A

4P PWR CA-C

2

BASEU

PB1

PIM0

PWR B

4P PWR CA-D

3

BASEU

PA2

PIM1

PWR A

4P PWR CA-E

4

BASEU

PB2

PIM1

PWR B

4P PWR CA-F

5

PIM0 (PWR)

-48V IN CONN

PIM0

-48V0

3P PWR CA-A

-48V0

6

PIM0 (PWR)

-48V IN CONN

PIM0

-48V1

3P PWR CA-B

-48V1

7

PIM1 (PWR)

-48V IN CONN

PIM1

-48V0

3P PWR CA-A

-48V0

8

PIM1 (PWR)

-48V IN CONN

PIM1

-48V1

3P PWR CA-B

-48V1

CHAPTER 3
Page 132
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

REMARKS

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-010
Sheet 38/71
Internal Cable Connections

Connect the internal power cables for 3-PIM system of IMG2/3 as shown below. Note that the dotted lines indicate power cables for a dual-system.
REAR VIEW

FRONT VIEW

TOPU

TOPU
00 01 02 03

(12)

PWR B

PWR A

PIM 2

-48V1

-48V0

-48V0

-48V1

PIM 2

(11)
PWR PWR
FANU

FANU
00 01 02 03

(10)

PWR A

PWR B

(9)
PWR PWR
00 01 02 03

(8)
PIM 0

-48V1

-48V0

-48V1

-48V0

PIM 0

PIM 1

-48V1

-48V0

-48V0

-48V1

PIM 1

PWR B

PWR A

(7)
PWR PWR

DUMMY

PZ-M371

BASEU

PB 3

PA 3

PB 2

PA 2

PB 1

PA 1

PB 0

PA 0

BASEU

DUMMY

(6)
(5)
(2)
(1)

(4)
(3)

Figure 010-20 Power Cable Connection for IMG2/3 (3-PIM System) (Multiple IMG Configuration)
NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 133
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-010
Sheet 39/71
Internal Cable Connections

Table 010-13 Power Cable Connection for IMG2/3 (3-PIM System) (Multiple IMG Configuration)
FROM
No.

TO

CONNECTOR
NAME

UNIT/
MODULE

CONNECTOR
NAME

CABLE NAME

UNIT/MODULE

1

BASEU

PA1

PIM0

PWR A

4P PWR CA-C

2

BASEU

PB1

PIM0

PWR B

4P PWR CA-D

3

BASEU

PA2

PIM1

PWR A

4P PWR CA-E

4

BASEU

PB2

PIM1

PWR B

4P PWR CA-F

5

BASEU

PA3

PIM2

PWR A

4P PWR CA-G

6

BASEU

PB3

PIM2

PWR B

4P PWR CA-H

7

PIM0 (PWR)

-48V IN CONN

PIM0

-48V0

3P PWR CA-A

-48V0

8

PIM0 (PWR)

-48V IN CONN

PIM0

-48V1

3P PWR CA-B

-48V1

9

PIM1 (PWR)

-48V IN CONN

PIM1

-48V0

3P PWR CA-A

-48V0

10

PIM1 (PWR)

-48V IN CONN

PIM1

-48V1

3P PWR CA-B

-48V1

11

PIM2 (PWR)

-48V IN CONN

PIM2

-48V0

3P PWR CA-A

-48V0

12

PIM2 (PWR)

-48V IN CONN

PIM2

-48V1

3P PWR CA-B

-48V1

CHAPTER 3
Page 134
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

REMARKS

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-010
Sheet 40/71
Internal Cable Connections

Connect the internal power cables for 4-PIM system of IMG2/3 as shown below. Note that the dotted lines indicate power cables for a dual-system.
REAR VIEW

FRONT VIEW
TOPU

TOPU
00 01 02 03

(16)
PIM 3

-48V1

-48V0

-48V0 PWR A

-48V1 PWR B

PIM 3

(15)
PWR PWR
00 01 02 03

(14)
PIM 2

-48V1

-48V0

-48V0 PWR A

-48V1 PWR B

PIM 2

(13)
PWR PWR
FANU

FANU
00 01 02 03

PIM 1

(11)
PWR PWR
00 01 02 03

(10)

-48V1

-48V0

-48V1 PWR B

-48V0 PWR A

PIM 0

(12)

-48V1

-48V0

-48V0 PWR A

-48V1 PWR B

PIM 1

PIM 0

(9)
PWR PWR

DUMMY

DUMMY

PZ-M371
PA 4

BASEU

PB 4

PA 3

PB 3

PA 2

PB 2

PA 1

PB 1

PA 0

PB 0

BASEU

(8)
(7)
(6)

(4)
(3)
(2)
(1)

(5)

Figure 010-21 Power Cable Connection for IMG2/3 (4-PIM System) (Multiple IMG Configuration)

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 135
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-010
Sheet 41/71
Internal Cable Connections

Table 010-14 Power Cable Connection for IMG2/3 (4-PIM System) (Multiple IMG Configuration)
FROM
No.

TO

CONNECTOR
NAME

UNIT/
MODULE

CONNECTOR
NAME

CABLE NAME

UNIT/MODULE

1

BASEU

PA1

PIM0

PWR A

4P PWR CA-C

2

BASEU

PB1

PIM0

PWR B

4P PWR CA-D

3

BASEU

PA2

PIM1

PWR A

4P PWR CA-E

4

BASEU

PB2

PIM1

PWR B

4P PWR CA-F

5

BASEU

PA3

PIM2

PWR A

4P PWR CA-G

6

BASEU

PB3

PIM2

PWR B

4P PWR CA-H

7

BASEU

PB4

PIM3

PWR A

4P PWR CA-I

8

BASEU

PB4

PIM3

PWR B

4P PWR CA-J

9

PIM0 (PWR)

-48V IN CONN

PIM0

-48V0

3P PWR CA-A

-48V0

10

PIM0 (PWR)

-48V IN CONN

PIM0

-48V1

3P PWR CA-B

-48V1

11

PIM1 (PWR)

-48V IN CONN

PIM1

-48V0

3P PWR CA-A

-48V0

12

PIM1 (PWR)

-48V IN CONN

PIM1

-48V1

3P PWR CA-B

-48V1

13

PIM2 (PWR)

-48V IN CONN

PIM2

-48V0

3P PWR CA-A

-48V0

14

PIM2 (PWR)

-48V IN CONN

PIM2

-48V1

3P PWR CA-B

-48V1

15

PIM3 (PWR)

-48V IN CONN

PIM3

-48V0

3P PWR CA-A

-48V0

16

PIM3 (PWR)

-48V IN CONN

PIM3

-48V1

3P PWR CA-B

-48V1

CHAPTER 3
Page 136
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

REMARKS

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-010
Sheet 42/71
Internal Cable Connections

Run the bus cables, referring to Figure 010-23. Then, fasten the cables to the cabinet, referring to Figure 010-22.

The drawing below illustrates how to run the bus cables for the 1-PIM system. For details on actual cable runnings,
see Figure 010-23.

Note:

Normally, the cables are fastened onto the cabinet at the proposed locations, where small dots (•) are provided in this figure.
Figure 010-22 Bus Cable Connections for 1-PIM System (Single IMG Configuration)

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 137
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-010
Sheet 43/71
Internal Cable Connections

Connect the bus cables as shown below. Note that dotted lines indicate bus cables for a dual system.

FRONT VIEW
REAR VIEW
DSPM

TOPU

KEY

13 14

BUS1A BUS0A

(PIM 0)

00 01 02 03 04 05 06

(8)

AB

BSCM

CN
CN

MUSIC

(7)

GT 16

(6)

PC 19 CN

BSCM

MUX1

ALMA

MUX1

(LPM)

MUX3 MUX2

MUSIC0

MUX3 MUX2

(PIM 0)

00 01 02 03 04 05 06

AB

DSP
KEY

CN
CN

CN

ALM

GT 16

BUS 1

BUS 0

PC 19

(BSCM)

(5)
(BASEU)

(BASEU)

(4)

(3)

(2)
(1)

Figure 010-23 Details on Bus Cable Connections (for 1-PIM System) (Single IMG Configuration)

CHAPTER 3
Page 138
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-010
Sheet 44/71
Internal Cable Connections

Table 010-15 Bus Cable Connections for 1-PIM System (Single IMG Configuration)
FROM

TO

No.

UNIT/
MODULE

CONNECTOR
NAME

UNIT/
MODULE

CONNECTOR
NAME

CABLE NAME

1

LPR (GT 16)

CN-B
(Front Connector)

PIM0

BUS0A

50-40 GT BUS CA-A

2

LPR (GT 16)

CN-A
(Front Connector)

LPR

BUS0

EXGT BUS CA-A

3

LPR

KEY

TOPU

KEY

10AL-(260) FLT CA

4

LPR

ALM

PIM0

ALMA

20AL-(60) FLT CA

5

LPR (GT 16)

CN-A
(Front Connector)

LPR

BUS1

EXGT BUS CA-A

6

LPR (GT 16)

CN-B
(Front Connector)

PIM0

BUS1A

50-40 GT BUS CA-A

7

LPR

DSP

TOPU

DSPM

20AL-(270) FLT CA

8

LPR

MUSIC

PIM0

MUSIC0

16PH MOH CA (1)

NDA-24234

REMARKS

CHAPTER 3
Page 139
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-010
Sheet 45/71
Internal Cable Connections

Run the bus cables, referring to Figure 010-25. Then, fasten the cables to the cabinet, referring to Figure 010-24.

The drawing below illustrates how to run the bus cables for the 2-PIM system. For details on actual cable runnings,
see Figure 010-25.

Backplane

Backplane

Note:

Normally, the cables are fastened onto the cabinet at the proposed locations, where small dots (•) are provided in this figure.
Figure 010-24 Bus Cable Connections for 2-PIM System (Single IMG Configuration)

CHAPTER 3
Page 140
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-010
Sheet 46/71
Internal Cable Connections

Connect the bus cables as shown below. Note that dotted lines indicate bus cables for a dual system.
FRONT VIEW
REAR VIEW
DSPM

TOPU

KEY

13 14

PIM 1

PIM 1
MUX

MUX

ALMA
ALMB

BUS1A BUS0A

MUX1

(LPM)
ALMA

MUX1

(10)

MUX3 MUX2

MUSIC0

MUX3 MUX2

(PIM 0)

13 14

(11)

(PIM 0)
(9)
00 01 02 03 04 05 06

BSCM
MUSIC

(7)

AB
CN
CN

PC 19 CN

(6)

GT 16

(8)

BSCM

00 01 02 03 04 05 06

AB

KEY

CN
CN

CN

DSP
ALM

GT 16

BUS0

BUS1

PC 19

(LPM)

(5)
(BASEU)

(4)

(3)

(BASEU)

(2)
(1)

Figure 010-25 Details on Bus Cable Connections (for 2-PIM System) (Single IMG Configuration)

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 141
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-010
Sheet 47/71
Internal Cable Connections

Table 010-16 Bus Cable Connections for 2-PIM System (Single IMG Configuration)
FROM
No.

TO

CONNECTOR
NAME

UNIT/
MODULE

CONNECTOR
NAME

CABLE NAME

UNIT/MODULE

1

LPR

CN-B
(Front Connector)

PIM0

BUS0A

50-40 GT BUS CA-A

2

LPR

CN-A
(Front Connector)

LPR

BUS0

EXGT BUS CA-A

3

LPR

KEY

TOPU

KEY

10AL-(260) FLT CA

4

LPR

ALM

PIM0

ALMA

20AL-(60) FLT CA

5

LPR (GT 16)

CN-A
(Front Connector)

LPR

BUS1

EXGT BUS CA-A

6

LPR (GT 16)

CN-B
(Front Connector)

PIM0

BUS1A

50-40 GT BUS CA-A

7

LPR

DSP

TOPU

DSPM

20AL-(270) FLT CA

8

LPR

MUSIC

PIM0

MUSIC0

16PH MOH CA (1)

9

PIM0

MUX1

PIM1

MUX

MT24 TSW CA-90

10

PIM0

MUX1

PIM1

MUX

MT24 TSW CA-90

11

PIM0

ALMB

PIM1

ALMA

20AL-(10) FLT CA

CHAPTER 3
Page 142
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

REMARKS

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-010
Sheet 48/71
Internal Cable Connections

Run the bus cables, referring to Figure 010-27. Then, fasten the cables to the cabinet, referring to Figure 010-26.

The drawing below illustrates how to run the bus cables for the 3-PIM system. For details on actual cable runnings,
see Figure 010-27.

Backplane

Backplane

Backplane

Note:

Normally, the cables are fastened onto the cabinet at the proposed locations, where small dots (•) are provided in this figure.
Figure 010-26 Bus Cable Connections for 3-PIM System (Single IMG Configuration)

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 143
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-010
Sheet 49/71
Internal Cable Connections

Connect the bus cables as shown below. Note that dotted lines indicate bus cables for a dual system.
FRONT VIEW
REAR VIEW

DSPM

TOPU

KEY
13 14

PIM 2

PIM 2
MUX

MUX

ALMA

FANU

FANU

(14)
13 14

ALMB

PIM 1

PIM 1
MUX

MUX

ALMA
ALMB

13 14

(13)

MUSIC0

(LPM)
ALMA

(11)

BUS1A BUS0A

MUX3 MUX2 MUX1

(PIM 0)

(PIM 0)

MUX3 MUX2 MUX1

(12)

(10)
(9)
00 01 02 03 04 05 06

(8)

BSCM

AB
CN
CN

MUSIC

GT 16

(7)

PC 19 CN

(6)

BSCM

00 01 02 03 04 05 06

(LPM)

GT 16

PC 19

BUS 1

BUS 0

DSP

AB

KEY

CN
CN

CN

ALM

(5)
(BASEU)

(4)

(3)

(BASEU)

(2)
(1)

Figure 010-27 Details on Bus Cable Connections (for 3-PIM System) (Single IMG Configuration)

CHAPTER 3
Page 144
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-010
Sheet 50/71
Internal Cable Connections

Table 010-17 Bus Cable Connections for 3-PIM System (Single IMG Configuration)
FROM
No.

TO

CONNECTOR
NAME

UNIT/
MODULE

CONNECTOR
NAME

CABLE NAME

UNIT/MODULE

1

LPR

CN-B
(Front Connector)

PIM0

BUS0A

50-40 GT BUS CA-A

2

LPR

CN-A
(Front Connector)

LPR

BUS0

EXGT BUS CA-A

3

LPR

KEY

TOPU

KEY

10AL-(260) FLT CA

4

LPR

ALM

PIM0

ALMA

20AL-(60) FLT CA

5

LPR (GT 16)

CN-A
(Front Connector)

LPR

BUS1

EXGT BUS CA-A

6

LPR (GT 16)

CN-B
(Front Connector)

PIM0

BUS1A

50-40 GT BUS CA-A

7

LPR

DSP

TOPU

DSPM

20AL-(270) FLT CA

8

LPR

MUSIC

PIM0

MUSIC0

16PH MOH CA (1)

9

PIM0

MUX1

PIM1

MUX

MT24 TSW CA-90

10

PIM0

MUX2

PIM2

MUX

MT24 TSW CA-140

11

PIM0

MUX1

PIM1

MUX

MT24 TSW CA-90

12

PIM0

MUX2

PIM2

MUX

MT24 TSW CA-140

13

PIM0

ALMB

PIM1

ALMA

20AL-(10) FLT CA

14

PIM1

ALMB

PIM2

ALMA

20AL-(20) FLT CA

NDA-24234

REMARKS

CHAPTER 3
Page 145
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-010
Sheet 51/71
Internal Cable Connections

Run the bus cables, referring to Figure 010-29. Then, fasten the cables to the cabinet, referring to Figure 010-28.
The drawing below illustrates how to run the bus cables for the 3-PIM system. For details on actual cable runnings,
see Figure 010-29.

Backplane

Backplane

Backplane

Backplane

Note:

Normally, the cables are fastened onto the cabinet at the proposed locations, where small dots (•) are provided in this figure.
Figure 010-28 Bus Cable Connections for 4-PIM System (Single IMG Configuration)

CHAPTER 3
Page 146
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-010
Sheet 52/71
Internal Cable Connections

Connect the bus cables as shown below. Note that dotted-lines indicate bus cables for a dual-system.
FRONT VIEW
REAR VIEW
DSPM

TOPU

TOPU
KEY

13 14

PIM 3

PIM 3
MUX

MUX

ALMA

13 14

ALMB

(17)
PIM 2

PIM 2
MUX

MUX

ALMA

FANU

FANU

(16)
13 14

ALMB

PIM 1

PIM 1

ALMB

ALMA

(LPM)

BUS1A BUS0A

(12)

MUX3 MUX2 MUX1

(13)

MUSIC0

(PIM 0)

MUX3 MUX2 MUX1

(PIM 0)

13 14

(14)

(15)

MUX

MUX

ALMA

(11)
(10)
(9)
00 01 02 03 04 05 06

BSCM
(7)

MUSIC

AB

BSCM

CN
CN

PC19 CN

(6)

GT16

(8)

00 01 02 03 04 05 06
PC19

BUS 1

BUS 0

AB

KEY

CN
CN

CN

DSP
ALM

GT16

(LPM)

(5)
(BASEU)

(4)

(3)

(2)
(1)

Figure 010-29 Details on Bus Cable Connections (for 4-PIM System) (Single IMG Configuration)
NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 147
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-010
Sheet 53/71
Internal Cable Connections

Table 010-18 Bus Cable Connections for 4-PIM System (Single IMG Configuration)
FROM

TO

No.

UNIT/
MODULE

CONNECTOR
NAME

UNIT/
MODULE

CONNECTOR
NAME

CABLE NAME

1

LPR

CN-B
(Front Connector)

PIM0

BUS0A

50-40 GT BUS CA-A

2

LPR

CN-A
(Front Connector)

LPR

BUS0

EXGT BUS CA-A

3

LPR

KEY

TOPU

KEY

10AL-(260) FLT CA

4

LPR

ALM

PIM0

ALMA

20AL-(60) FLT CA

5

LPR (GT 16)

CN-A
(Front Connector)

LPR

BUS1

EXGT BUS CA-A

6

LPR (GT 16)

CN-B
(Front Connector)

PIM0

BUS1A

50-40 GT BUS CA-A

7

LPR

DSP

TOPU

DSPM

20AL-(270) FLT CA

8

LPR

MUSIC

PIM0

MUSIC0

16PH MOH CA (1)

9

PIM0

MUX1

PIM1

MUX

MT24 TSW CA-90

10

PIM0

MUX2

PIM2

MUX

MT24 TSW CA-140

11

PIM0

MUX3

PIM3

MUX

MT24 TSW CA-180

12

PIM0

MUX1

PIM1

MUX

MT24 TSW CA-90

13

PIM0

MUX2

PIM2

MUX

MT24 TSW CA-140

14

PIM0

MUX3

PIM3

MUX

MT24 TSW CA-180

15

PIM0

ALMB

PIM1

ALMA

20AL-(10) FLT CA

16

PIM1

ALMB

PIM2

ALMA

20AL-(20) FLT CA

17

PIM2

ALMB

PIM3

ALMA

20AL-(10) FLT CA

CHAPTER 3
Page 148
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

REMARKS

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-010
Sheet 54/71
Internal Cable Connections

FRONT VIEW
REAR VIEW
DSP

TOPU

TOPU
KEY

PIM 3

PIM 3

ALMA
ALMB

(8)
PIM 2

PIM 2

ALMA

FANU

FANU
(7)
ALMB

PIM 1

PIM 1

ALMA

(6)

ALMB

PIM 0

PIM 0

ALMA

00 01 02 03 04 05 06
GT13
MT
CN
CN

PC 19 CN

LPM

(5)

LPR

00 01 02 03 04 05 06
GT 13

MT
CN
CN

PC 19 CN

BUS 1

KEY

BUS 0

DSP
ALM

(2)

BASEU
(4)

BASEU

(3)

(1)

Figure 010-30 Internal Bus Cable Connection for IMG0 (Multiple IMG Configuration)

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 149
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-010
Sheet 55/71
Internal Cable Connections

Table 010-19 Internal Bus Cable Connection for IMG0 (Multiple IMG Configuration)
FROM
No.

TO

CONNECTOR
NAME

UNIT/
MODULE

CONNECTOR
NAME

CABLE NAME

UNIT/MODULE

1

LPM (CPU0)

CN-M

LPM

BUS0

EXGT BUS CA-A

2

LPM (CPU1)

CN-M

LPM

BUS1

EXGT BUS CA-A

3

LPM

KEY

TOPU

KEY

10AL-(260) FLT CA

4

LPM

ALM

PIM0

ALMA

20AL-(60) FLT CA

5

LPM

DSP

TOPU

DSPL

20AL-(270) FLT CA

6

PIM0

ALMB

PIM1

ALMA

20AL-(10) FLT CA

7

PIM1

ALMB

PIM2

ALMA

20AL-(20) FLT CA

8

PIM2

ALMB

PIM3

ALMA

20AL-(10) FLT CA

CHAPTER 3
Page 150
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

REMARKS

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-010
Sheet 56/71
Internal Cable Connections

FRONT VIEW
REAR VIEW
DSPM

TOPU

TOPU
13 14

PIM 0

PIM 0
MUX

MUX

(6)
ALMA

(TSW 11)

12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

(TSW 01)
(3)

TSW(PH-SW12)

TSW(PH-SW12)

TSW(PH-SW12)

TSW(PH-SW12)

TSW(PH-SW12)

TSW(PH-SW12)

MUX 010

MUX 011

TSW(PH-SW12)

TSW(PH-SW12)

TSWM

TSWM

00 01 02 03 10 11 12 13

(2)
ALM

BASEU

BASEU

(1)

Figure 010-31 Internal Bus Cable Connection for IMG1 (1-PIM System) (Multiple IMG Configuration)
Table 010-20 Internal Bus Cable Connection for IMG1 (1-PIM System) (Multiple IMG Configuration)
FROM
No.

TO

CONNECTOR
NAME

UNIT/
MODULE

CONNECTOR
NAME

CABLE NAME

UNIT/MODULE

1

TSWM

ALM

PIM0

ALMA

20AL-(60) FLT CA

2

TSWM

MUX010

PIM0

MUX (slot 13)

34PH MT24 TSW CA-D

TSW 01

3

TSWM

MUX110

PIM0

MUX (slot 14)

34PH MT24 TSW CA-D

TSW 11

NDA-24234

REMARKS

CHAPTER 3
Page 151
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-010
Sheet 57/71
Internal Cable Connections

Connect the internal bus cables for 2-PIM system of IMG1 as shown below. Note that the dotted lines indicate
bus cables for a dual System.
FRONT VIEW
REAR VIEW
DSPM

TOPU

TOPU

KEY

13 14

PIM 1

PIM 1
MUX

MUX

ALMA
ALMB

13 14

(6)
PIM 0

PIM 0
MUX

(5)

MUX

(4)
ALMA

12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
(TSW 11)

(TSW 01)

MUX 011

MUX 110

MUX 010

TSW(PH-SW12)

MUX 111

TSW(PH-SW12)

(3)

TSW(PH-SW12)
TSW(PH-SW12)
TSW(PH-SW12)
TSW(PH-SW12)
TSW(PH-SW12)
TSW(PH-SW12)

TSWM

TSWM

00 01 02 03 10 11 12 13

(2)
ALM

BASEU

BASEU

(1)

Figure 010-32 Internal Bus Cable Connection for IMG1 (2-PIM System) (Multiple IMG Configuration)

CHAPTER 3
Page 152
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-010
Sheet 58/71
Internal Cable Connections

Table 010-21 Internal Bus Cable Connection for IMG1 (2-PIM System) (Multiple IMG Configuration)
FROM
No.

TO

CONNECTOR
NAME

UNIT/
MODULE

CONNECTOR
NAME

CABLE NAME

UNIT/MODULE

1

TSWM

ALM

PIM0

ALMA

20AL-(60) FLT CA

2

TSWM

MUX010

PIM0

MUX (Slot 13)

34PH MT24 TSW CA-D

TSW 01

3

TSWM

MUX110

PIM0

MUX (Slot 14)

34PH MT24 TSW CA-D

TSW 11

4

TSWM

MUX011

PIM1

MUX (Slot 13)

34PH MT24 TSW CA-G

TSW 01

5

TSWM

MUX111

PIM1

MUX (Slot 14)

34PH MT24 TSW CA-G

TSW 11

6

PIM0

ALMB

PIM1

ALMA

20AL-(10) FLT CA

NDA-24234

REMARKS

CHAPTER 3
Page 153
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-010
Sheet 59/71
Internal Cable Connections

Connect the internal bus cables for 3-PIM system of IMG1 as shown below. Note that the dotted lines indicate
bus cables for a dual-system.
FRONT VIEW
REAR VIEW
DSPM

TOPU
TOPU
13 14

PIM 2
PIM 2
MUX

MUX

ALMA

FANU

FANU

(9)
13 14

ALMB

PIM 1

PIM 1
MUX

(7)

MUX

(6)

ALMA

(8)

ALMB

PIM 0

13 14

PIM 0

(4)

MUX

MUX

(5)

ALMA

12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

(TSW 11)

MUX 011

MUX 110

MUX 010

(3)

TSW(PH-SW12)

MUX 111

TSW(PH-SW12)

MUX 012

TSW(PH-SW12)
TSW(PH-SW12)
TSW(PH-SW12)
TSW(PH-SW12)
TSW(PH-SW12)

MUX 112

TSW(PH-SW12)

TSWM

(TSW 01)

TSWM

00 01 02 03 10 11 12 13

(2)
ALM

BASEU

(1)

BASEU

Figure 010-33 Internal Bus Cable Connection for IMG1 (3-PIM System) (Multiple IMG Configuration)

CHAPTER 3
Page 154
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-010
Sheet 60/71
Internal Cable Connections

Table 010-22 Internal Bus Cable Connection for IMG1 (3-PIM System) (Multiple IMG Configuration)
FROM
No.

TO

CONNECTOR
NAME

UNIT/
MODULE

CONNECTOR
NAME

CABLE NAME

UNIT/MODULE

1

TSWM

ALM

PIM0

ALMA

20AL-(60) FLT CA

2

TSWM

MUX010

PIM0

MUX (Slot 13)

34PH MT24 TSW CA-D

TSW 01

3

TSWM

MUX110

PIM0

MUX (Slot 14)

34PH MT24 TSW CA-D

TSW 11

4

TSWM

MUX011

PIM1

MUX (Slot 13)

34PH MT24 TSW CA-G

TSW 01

5

TSWM

MUX111

PIM1

MUX (Slot 14)

34PH MT24 TSW CA-G

TSW 11

6

TSWM

MUX012

PIM2

MUX (Slot 13)

34PH MT24 TSW CA-F

TSW 01

7

TSWM

MUX112

PIM2

MUX (Slot 14)

34PH MT24 TSW CA-F

TSW 11

8

PIM0

ALMB

PIM1

ALMA

20AL-(10) FLT CA

9

PIM1

ALMB

PIM2

ALMA

20AL-(20) FLT CA

NDA-24234

REMARKS

CHAPTER 3
Page 155
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-010
Sheet 61/71
Internal Cable Connections

Connect the internal bus cables for 4-PIM system of IMG1 as shown below. Note that the dotted lines indicate
bus cables for a dual-system.
FRONT VIEW
REAR VIEW

DSPM

TOPU

TOPU
13 14

PIM 3

PIM 3
MUX

MUX

ALMA
ALMB

13 14

(12)

PIM 2

PIM 2

(8)
MUX

MUX

(9)
ALMA

FANU

FANU

(11)
13 14

ALMB

PIM 1

PIM 1

(6)

MUX

MUX

(7)

ALMA
ALMB

13 14

(10)

PIM 0

PIM 0

(5)

MUX

MUX

(4)
ALMA

12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
(TSW 11)

MUX 111

MUX 011
MUX 010

MUX 110

(3)

TSW(PH-SW12)

MUX 012

TSW(PH-SW12)

MUX 013

MUX 112

TSW(PH-SW12)
TSW(PH-SW12)
TSW(PH-SW12)
TSW(PH-SW12)
TSW(PH-SW12)

TSWM

TSW(PH-SW12)

MUX 113

(TSW 01)

TSWM

00 01 02 03 10 11 12 13

ALM

BASEU

BASEU

(1)

Figure 010-34 Internal Bus Cable Connection for IMG1 (4-PIM System) (Multiple IMG Configuration)
CHAPTER 3
Page 156
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-010
Sheet 62/71
Internal Cable Connections

Table 010-23 Internal Bus Cable Connection for IMG1 (4-PIM System) (Multiple IMG Configuration)
FROM
No.

TO

CONNECTOR
NAME

UNIT/
MODULE

CONNECTOR
NAME

CABLE NAME

UNIT/MODULE

1

TSWM

ALM

PIM0

ALMA

20AL-(60) FLT CA

2

TSWM

MUX010

PIM0

MUX (Slot 13)

34PH MT24 TSW CA-D

TSW 01

3

TSWM

MUX110

PIM0

MUX (Slot 14)

34PH MT24 TSW CA-D

TSW 11

4

TSWM

MUX011

PIM1

MUX (Slot 13)

34PH MT24 TSW CA-G

TSW 01

5

TSWM

MUX111

PIM1

MUX (Slot 14)

34PH MT24 TSW CA-G

TSW 11

6

TSWM

MUX012

PIM2

MUX (Slot 13)

34PH MT24 TSW CA-F

TSW 01

7

TSWM

MUX112

PIM2

MUX (Slot 14)

34PH MT24 TSW CA-F

TSW 11

8

TSWM

MUX013

PIM3

MUX (Slot 13)

34PH MT24 TSW CA-G

TSW 01

9

TSWM

MUX113

PIM3

MUX (Slot 14)

34PH MT24 TSW CA-G

TSW 11

10

PIM0

ALMB

PIM1

ALMA

20AL-(10) FLT CA

11

PIM1

ALMB

PIM2

ALMA

20AL-(20) FLT CA

12

PIM2

ALMB

PIM3

ALMA

20AL-(10) FLT CA

NDA-24234

REMARKS

CHAPTER 3
Page 157
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-010
Sheet 63/71
Internal Cable Connections

Figures 010-35 through 010-37 show how to run the internal bus cables for IMG2/3. Because bus cables for the 1PIM system all adopt inter-frame connections with other cabinets (IMG0 and 1), explanations are given here about
the 2-PIM configuration or more. (cf. NAP 200-011: “Inter-frame Cable Connections.”)
When 2-PIM system is adopted in IMG2 or 3, the required connection is as follows:

FRONT VIEW
REAR VIEW

DSPM

TOPU

TOPU
KEY

13 14

PIM 1

PIM 1
MUX

MUX

Note

To IMG 1

ALMA
ALMB

20AL-(10)FLT CA

13 14

PIM 0

PIM 0
MUX

MUX

ALM

To IMG 0

Note

To IMG 1

Note
20AL-(10)FLT CA
DUMMY

DUMMY

BASEU

BASEU

Note:

For these cable runnings, refer to NAP 200- 011: “Inter-frame Cable Connections.”

Figure 010-35 Internal Bus Cable Connection for IMG2/3 (2-PIM System) (Multiple IMG Configuration)

CHAPTER 3
Page 158
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-010
Sheet 64/71
Internal Cable Connections

When 3-PIM system is adopted in IMG2 or 3, the required cable connections are as follows:
FRONT VIEW
REAR VIEW

DSPM

TOPU

TOPU
13 14

PIM 2

PIM 2
MUX

MUX

Note

To IMG 1

ALMA

20AL-(10)FLT CA

FANU

FANU
13 14

ALMB

PIM 1

PIM 1
MUX

MUX

Note

To IMG 1

ALMA
ALMB

20AL-(10)FLT CA

13 14

PIM 0

PIM 0
MUX

MUX

Note

To IMG 1

ALMA

To IMG 0

Note

DUMMY
DUMMY

BASEU

Note:

BASEU

For these cable runnings, refer to NAP 200-011:“Inter-frame Cable Connections.”

Figure 010-36 Internal Bus Cable Connection for IMG2/3 (3-PIM System) (Multiple IMG Configuration)

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 159
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-010
Sheet 65/71
Internal Cable Connections

When 4-PIM system is adopted in IMG2 or 3, the required cable connections are as follows:
FRONT VIEW
REAR VIEW

DSPM

TOPU

TOPU
13 14

PIM 3

PIM 3
MUX

MUX

Note

ALMA
ALMB

20AL-(10)FLT CA

To IMG 1

13 14

PIM 2

PIM 2
MUX

MUX

Note

ALMA

FANU

20AL-(20)FLT CA

To IMG 1
FANU

13 14

ALMB

PIM 1

PIM 1
MUX

MUX

Note

To IMG 1

ALMA
ALMB

20AL-(10)FLT CA

13 14

PIM 0

PIM 0
MUX

MUX

Note

To IMG 1

ALMA

To IMG 0

Note
DUMMY

DUMMY

BASEU

Note:

BASEU

For these cable runnings, refer to NAP 200-011: “Inter-frame Cable Connections.”

Figure 010-37 Internal Bus Cable Connection for IMG2/3 (4-PIM System) (Multiple IMG Configuration)
CHAPTER 3
Page 160
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-011
Sheet 1/24
Inter-Frame Cable Connections

Multiple IMG Configuration

This NAP explains how to run the frame-to-frame cables for 2/3/4-IMG System.

START
Connection of Inter-frame ISA Bus Cables

Refer to Figure 011-1.

Connection of Inter-frame Bus Cables

Refer to Figures 011-2 through 011-10.

Connection of Inter-frame Alarm Bus Cables

Refer to Figures 011-11 through 01113.

END

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 161
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-011
Sheet 2/24
Inter-Frame Cable Connections

Multiple IMG Configuration

Connect the inter-frame ISA bus cables as shown below. Note that the dotted line indicates the bus cable for a
dual system.

IMG 1

IMG 0

TOPU

TOPU

06
(GT1)
IOP0

(GT0)

(2)

IOP1

PZ- CPU1
PW02

GT
13
M T
CN
CN

TSWM

LPM

06
PZPW02 CPU0

(1)

GT
13
M T
CN
CN

BASEU

BASEU

REAR VIEW

FRONT VIEW

Figure 011-1 Inter-Frame ISA Bus Cable Connection for IMG0-IMG1
Table 011-1 Inter-Frame ISA Bus Cable Connection for IMG0-IMG1
FROM
No.

TO

CONNECTOR
NAME

UNIT/
MODULE

CONNECTOR
NAME

CABLE NAME

UNIT/MODULE

REMARKS

1

LPM (CPU0)

CN-T

TSWM

IOP0 (Slot 11)

34PH 50AL CA-A

GT1

2

LPM (CPU1)

CN-T

TSWM

IOP1 (Slot 10)

34PH 50AL CA-A

GT0

CHAPTER 3
Page 162
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-011
Sheet 3/24
Inter-Frame Cable Connections

Multiple IMG Configuration

Connect the inter-frame bus cables between IMG0 and IMG1 as shown below. Note that the dotted lines indicate
bus cables for a dual-system.
IMG 0

TOPU
13 14

(7)
PIM 3

(8)
MUX

MUX

13 14

(5)

(6)
MUX

MUX

PIM 2

FANU
13 14

MUX

MUX

IMG 1

PIM 1

(4)
TOPU
(3)

13 14

(2)

MUX102

TSWM

BASEU

MUX003

MUX

MUX

(TSW10) (TSW00)
MUX103

PIM 0

(1)

MUX002

MUX101

MUX001

MUX100

MUX000

LPM

FRONT VIEW

REAR VIEW

BASEU

Figure 011-2 Inter-Frame Bus Cable Connection for IMG0-IMG1
NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 163
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-011
Sheet 4/24
Inter-Frame Cable Connections

Multiple IMG Configuration

Table 011-2 Inter-Frame Bus Cable Connection for IMG0-IMG1
FROM

TO

No.

UNIT/
MODULE

CONNECTOR
NAME

UNIT/
MODULE

CONNECTOR
NAME

CABLE NAME

REMARKS

1

TSWM

MUX000

PIM0 (IMG0)

MUX (Slot 13)

34PH MT24 TSW CA-F

TSW 00

2

TSWM

MUX100

PIM0 (IMG0)

MUX (Slot 14)

34PH MT24 TSW CA-F

TSW 10

3

TSWM

MUX001

PIM1 (IMG0)

MUX (Slot 13)

34PH MT24 TSW CA-E

TSW 00

4

TSWM

MUX101

PIM1 (IMG0)

MUX (Slot 14)

34PH MT24 TSW CA-E

TSW 10

5

TSWM

MUX002

PIM2 (IMG0)

MUX (Slot 13)

34PH MT24 TSW CA-H

TSW 00

6

TSWM

MUX102

PIM2 (IMG0)

MUX (Slot 14)

34PH MT24 TSW CA-H

TSW 10

7

TSWM

MUX003

PIM3 (IMG0)

MUX (Slot 13)

34PH MT24 TSW CA-H

TSW 00

8

TSWM

MUX103

PIM3 (IMG0)

MUX (Slot 14)

34PH MT24 TSW CA-H

TSW 10

CHAPTER 3
Page 164
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-011
Sheet 5/24
Inter-Frame Cable Connections

Multiple IMG Configuration

Connect the inter-frame bus cables between IMG1 and IMG2 (1-PIM system) as shown below. Note that the dotted
line indicates the bus cable for a dual-system.

IMG 1

IMG 2

TOPU

TOPU
13 14

(2)
MUX

MUX

(TSW12)

PIM 0

(TSW02)

(1)
TSWM

DUMMY
MUX120

MUX020

BASEU

BASEU

REAR VIEW

FRONT VIEW

Figure 011-3 Inter-Frame Bus Cable Connection for IMG1-IMG2 (1-PIM System)
Table 011-3 Inter-Frame Bus Cable Connection for IMG1-IMG2 (1-PIM System)
FROM
No.
UNIT/MODULE

TO

CONNECTOR
UNIT/MODULE
NAME

CONNECTOR
NAME

CABLE NAME

REMARKS

1

TSWM

MUX020

PIM0 (IMG2)

MUX (Slot 13)

34PH MT24 TSW CA-F

TSW 02

2

TSWM

MUX120

PIM0 (IMG2)

MUX (Slot 14)

34PH MT24 TSW CA-F

TSW 12

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 165
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-011
Sheet 6/24
Inter-Frame Cable Connections

Multiple IMG Configuration

Connect the inter-frame bus cables between IMG1 and IMG2 (2-PIM system) as shown below. Note that the dotted
lines indicate bus cables for a dual-system.
IMG 2
TOPU
13 14

PIM 1
MUX

(4)

MUX

IMG 1
TOPU
(3)

13 14

(2)

PIM 0
MUX

MUX

(TSW12)

(TSW02)

(1)
TSWM

DUMMY
MUX121
MUX120

MUX021
MUX020

BASEU

BASEU

REAR VIEW

FRONT VIEW

Figure 011-4 Inter-Frame Bus Cable Connection for IMG1-IMG2 (2-PIM System)

CHAPTER 3
Page 166
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-011
Sheet 7/24
Inter-Frame Cable Connections

Multiple IMG Configuration

Table 011-4 Inter-Frame Bus Cable Connection for IMG1-IMG2 (2-PIM System)
FROM

TO

No.

UNIT/
MODULE

CONNECTOR
NAME

CABLE NAME

REMARKS

1

TSWM

MUX020

PIM0 (IMG2)

MUX (Slot 13)

34PH MT24 TSW CA-F

TSW 02

2

TSWM

MUX120

PIM0 (IMG2)

MUX (Slot 14)

34PH MT24 TSW CA-F

TSW 12

3

TSWM

MUX021

PIM1 (IMG2)

MUX (Slot 13)

34PH MT24 TSW CA-G

TSW 02

4

TSWM

MUX121

PIM1 (IMG2)

MUX (Slot 14)

34PH MT24 TSW CA-G

TSW 12

CONNECTOR
UNIT/MODULE
NAME

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 167
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-011
Sheet 8/24
Inter-Frame Cable Connections

Multiple IMG Configuration

Connect the inter-frame bus cables between IMG1 and IMG2 (3-PIM system) as shown below. Note that the dotted
lines indicate bus cables for a dual-system.
IMG 2
TOPU
13 14

(5)
MUX

MUX

(6)

PIM 2

FANU
13 14

PIM 1
MUX

(4)

MUX

IMG 1
TOPU
(3)

13 14

(2)

PIM 0
MUX

MUX

(TSW12)

(TSW02)

(1)
TSWM

MUX122

MUX022

MUX121

MUX021

MUX120

MUX020

DUMMY

BASEU

BASEU

REAR VIEW

FRONT VIEW

Figure 011-5 Inter-Frame Bus Cable Connection for IMG1-IMG2 (3-PIM System)

CHAPTER 3
Page 168
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-011
Sheet 9/24
Inter-Frame Cable Connections

Multiple IMG Configuration

Table 011-5 Inter-Frame Bus Cable Connection for IMG1-IMG2 (3-PIM System)
FROM

TO

No.

UNIT/
MODULE

CONNECTOR
NAME

CABLE NAME

REMARKS

1

TSWM

MUX020

PIM0 (IMG2)

MUX (Slot 13)

34PH MT24 TSW CA-F

TSW 02

2

TSWM

MUX120

PIM0 (IMG2)

MUX (Slot 14)

34PH MT24 TSW CA-F

TSW 12

3

TSWM

MUX021

PIM1 (IMG2)

MUX (Slot 13)

34PH MT24 TSW CA-G

TSW 02

4

TSWM

MUX121

PIM1 (IMG2)

MUX (Slot 14)

34PH MT24 TSW CA-G

TSW 12

5

TSWM

MUX022

PIM2 (IMG2)

MUX (Slot 13)

34PH MT24 TSW CA-H

TSW 02

6

TSWM

MUX122

PIM2 (IMG2)

MUX (Slot 14)

34PH MT24 TSW CA-H

TSW 12

CONNECTOR
UNIT/MODULE
NAME

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 169
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-011
Sheet 10/24
Inter-Frame Cable Connections

Multiple IMG Configuration

Connect the inter-frame bus cables between IMG1 and
IMG2 (4-PIM system) as shown below. Note that the dotted
lines indicate bus cables for a dual-system.

IMG 2
TOPU
13 14

(7)

PIM 3
MUX

MUX

(8)

13 14

(5)
MUX

MUX

(6)

PIM 2

FANU
13 14

MUX

(4)

MUX

IMG 1

PIM 1

TOPU
13 14

(3)
PIM 0

(2)
MUX

TSWM

MUX

(TSW12)

(TSW02)

MUX123

MUX023

MUX122

MUX022

MUX121

MUX021

MUX120

MUX020

DUMMY

(1)
BASEU

BASEU

REAR VIEW

FRONT VIEW

Figure 011-6 Inter-Frame Bus Cable Connection for IMG1-IMG2 (4-PIM System)
CHAPTER 3
Page 170
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-011
Sheet 11/24
Inter-Frame Cable Connections

Multiple IMG Configuration

Table 011-6 Inter-Frame Bus Cable Connection for IMG1-IMG2 (4-PIM System)
FROM

TO

No.

UNIT/
MODULE

CONNECTOR
NAME

CABLE NAME

REMARKS

1

TSWM

MUX020

PIM0 (IMG2)

MUX (Slot 13)

34PH MT24 TSW CA-F

TSW 02

2

TSWM

MUX120

PIM0 (IMG2)

MUX (Slot 14)

34PH MT24 TSW CA-F

TSW 12

3

TSWM

MUX021

PIM1 (IMG2)

MUX (Slot 13)

34PH MT24 TSW CA-G

TSW 02

4

TSWM

MUX121

PIM1 (IMG2)

MUX (Slot 14)

34PH MT24 TSW CA-G

TSW 12

5

TSWM

MUX022

PIM2 (IMG2)

MUX (Slot 13)

34PH MT24 TSW CA-H

TSW 02

6

TSWM

MUX122

PIM2 (IMG2)

MUX (Slot 14)

34PH MT24 TSW CA-H

TSW 12

7

TSWM

MUX023

PIM3 (IMG2)

MUX (Slot 13)

34PH MT24 TSW CA-H

TSW 02

8

TSWM

MUX123

PIM3 (IMG2)

MUX (Slot 14)

34PH MT24 TSW CA-H

TSW 12

CONNECTOR
UNIT/MODULE
NAME

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 171
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-011
Sheet 12/24
Inter-frame Cable Connections

Multiple IMG Configuration

Connect the inter-frame bus cables between IMG1 and IMG3 (1-PIM system) as shown below. Note that the dotted
line indicates the bus cable for a dual-system.
IMG 1

IMG 3

TOPU

TOPU
13 14

(2)
MUX

MUX

(TSW13)

(TSW03)

(1)
TSWM

DUMMY
MUX130

MUX030

BASEU

BASEU

REAR VIEW

FRONT VIEW

Figure 011-7 Inter-Frame Bus Cable Connection for IMG1-IMG3 (1-PIM System)
Table 011-7 Inter-Frame Bus Cable Connection for IMG1-IMG3 (1-PIM System)
FROM

TO

No.

UNIT/
MODULE

1

TSWM

MUX030

2

TSWM

MUX130

CHAPTER 3
Page 172
Revision 3.0

CONNECTOR
NAME

CABLE NAME

REMARKS

PIM0 (IMG3)

MUX (Slot 13)

34PH MT24 TSW CA-H

TSW 03

PIM0 (IMG3)

MUX (Slot 14)

34PH MT24 TSW CA-H

TSW 13

CONNECTOR
UNIT/MODULE
NAME

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-011
Sheet 13/24
Inter-Frame Cable Connections

Multiple IMG Configuration

Connect the inter-frame bus cables between IMG1 and IMG3 (2-PIM system) as shown below. Note that the dotted
lines indicate bus cables for a dual-system.
IMG 3
TOPU
13 14

PIM 1
MUX

(4)

MUX

IMG 1
TOPU
(3)

13 14

(2)

PIM 0
MUX

MUX

(TSW13)

(TSW03)

(1)
TSWM

DUMMY
MUX131
MUX130

MUX031
MUX030

BASEU

BASEU

REAR VIEW

FRONT VIEW

Figure 011-8 Inter-Frame Bus Cable Connection for IMG1-IMG3 (2-PIM System)

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 173
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-011
Sheet 14/24
Inter-Frame Cable Connections

Multiple IMG Configuration

Table 011-8 Inter-Frame Bus Cable Connection for IMG1-IMG3 (2-PIM System)
FROM

TO

No.

UNIT/
MODULE

CONNECTOR
NAME

CABLE NAME

REMARKS

1

TSWM

MUX030

PIM0 (IMG3)

MUX (Slot 13)

34PH MT24 TSW CA-H

TSW 03

2

TSWM

MUX130

PIM0 (IMG3)

MUX (Slot 14)

34PH MT24 TSW CA-H

TSW 13

3

TSWM

MUX031

PIM1 (IMG3)

MUX (Slot 13)

34PH MT24 TSW CA-H

TSW 03

4

TSWM

MUX131

PIM1 (IMG3)

MUX (Slot 14)

34PH MT24 TSW CA-H

TSW 13

CHAPTER 3
Page 174
Revision 3.0

CONNECTOR
UNIT/MODULE
NAME

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-011
Sheet 15/24
Inter-frame Cable Connections

Multiple IMG Configuration

Connect the inter-frame bus cables between IMG1 and IMG3 (3-PIM system) as shown below. Note that the dotted
lines indicate bus cables for a dual-system.
IMG 3
TOPU
13 14

(5)
MUX

MUX

(6)

PIM 2

FANU
13 14

PIM 1
MUX

(4)

MUX

IMG 1
TOPU
(3)

13 14

(2)

PIM 0
MUX

MUX

(TSW13)

(TSW03)

(1)
TSWM

MUX132
MUX131
MUX130

DUMMY

MUX032
MUX031
MUX030

BASEU

BASEU

REAR VIEW

FRONT VIEW

Figure 011-9 Inter-Frame Bus Cable Connection for IMG1-IMG3 (3-PIM System)

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 175
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-011
Sheet 16/24
Inter-Frame Cable Connections

Multiple IMG Configuration

Table 011-9 Inter-Frame Bus Cable Connection for IMG1-IMG3 (3-PIM System)
FROM

TO

No.

UNIT/
MODULE

CONNECTOR
NAME

CABLE NAME

REMARKS

1

TSWM

MUX030

PIM0 (IMG3)

MUX (Slot 13)

34PH MT24 TSW CA-H

TSW 03

2

TSWM

MUX130

PIM0 (IMG3)

MUX (Slot 14)

34PH MT24 TSW CA-H

TSW 13

3

TSWM

MUX031

PIM1 (IMG3)

MUX (Slot 13)

34PH MT24 TSW CA-H

TSW 03

4

TSWM

MUX131

PIM1 (IMG3)

MUX (Slot 14)

34PH MT24 TSW CA-H

TSW 13

5

TSWM

MUX032

PIM2 (IMG3)

MUX (Slot 13)

34PH MT24 TSW CA-I

TSW 03

6

TSWM

MUX132

PIM2 (IMG3)

MUX (Slot 14)

34PH MT24 TSW CA-I

TSW 13

CHAPTER 3
Page 176
Revision 3.0

CONNECTOR
UNIT/MODULE
NAME

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-011
Sheet 17/24
Inter-Frame Cable Connections

Multiple IMG Configuration

Connect the inter-frame bus cables between IMG1 and IMG3 (4-PIM system) as shown below. Note that the dotted
lines indicate bus cables for a dual-system.
IMG 3
TOPU
13 14

(7)

PIM 3
MUX

MUX

(8)

13 14

(5)

PIM 2
MUX

MUX

(6)

FANU
13 14

PIM 1
MUX

(4)

MUX

IMG 1
TOPU

13 14

(3)
(2)

PIM 0
MUX

TSWM

BASEU

MUX

(TSW13)

(TSW03)

MUX133

MUX033

MUX132

MUX032

MUX131

MUX031

MUX130

MUX030

DUMMY

(1)

BASEU

Figure 011-10 Inter-Frame Bus Cable Connection for IMG1-IMG3 (4-PIM System)

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 177
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-011
Sheet 18/24
Inter-frame Cable Connections

Multiple IMG Configuration

Table 011-10 Inter-Frame Bus Cable Connection for IMG1-IMG3 (4-PIM System)
FROM

TO

No.

UNIT/
MODULE

CONNECTOR
NAME

CABLE NAME

REMARKS

1

TSWM

MUX030

PIM0 (IMG3)

MUX (Slot 13)

34PH MT24 TSW CA-H

TSW 03

2

TSWM

MUX130

PIM0 (IMG3)

MUX (Slot 14)

34PH MT24 TSW CA-H

TSW 13

3

TSWM

MUX031

PIM1 (IMG3)

MUX (Slot 13)

34PH MT24 TSW CA-H

TSW 03

4

TSWM

MUX131

PIM1 (IMG3)

MUX (Slot 14)

34PH MT24 TSW CA-H

TSW 13

5

TSWM

MUX032

PIM2 (IMG3)

MUX (Slot 13)

34PH MT24 TSW CA-I

TSW 03

6

TSWM

MUX132

PIM2 (IMG3)

MUX (Slot 14)

34PH MT24 TSW CA-I

TSW 13

7

TSWM

MUX033

PIM3 (IMG3)

MUX (Slot 13)

34PH MT24 TSW CA-J

TSW 03

8

TSWM

MUX133

PIM3 (IMG3)

MUX (Slot 14)

34PH MT24 TSW CA-J

TSW 13

CHAPTER 3
Page 178
Revision 3.0

CONNECTOR
UNIT/MODULE
NAME

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-011
Sheet 19/24
Inter-frame Cable Connections

Multiple IMG Configuration

Connect the inter-frame alarm bus cables between
IMG0 and IMG1 as shown below.

IMG 0
TOPU

PIM 3

PIM 2

IMG 1
FANU
TOPU

PZ-DK223

DSP

PIM 1

(1)
PIM 0

PIM 0

LED1

(3)

TSWM

LPM
MUSIC
ALM1

(2)

EMAFH

EMA

BASEU

BASEU
FRONT VIEW

REAR VIEW

Figure 011-11 Inter-Frame Alarm Bus Cable Connection for IMG0-IMG1
NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 179
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-011
Sheet 20/24
Inter-frame Cable Connections

Multiple IMG Configuration

Table 011-11 Inter-Frame Alarm Bus Cable Connection for IMG0-IMG1
FROM
No.
UNIT/MODULE

TO

CONNECTOR
UNIT/MODULE
NAME

CONNECTOR
NAME

CABLE NAME

1

LPM

LED1

TOPU(IMG1)

DSPM

16PH LED CA-A

2

LPM

ALM1

TSWM

EMA

16PH ALM CA-A

3

LPM

MUSIC

TSWM

EMAFH

16PH STD CA-F

CHAPTER 3
Page 180
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

REMARKS

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-011
Sheet 21/24
Inter-frame Cable Connections

Multiple IMG Configuration

Connect the inter-frame alarm bus cables between
IMG0 and IMG2 as shown below.

IMG 0
TOPU

PIM 3

PIM 2

IMG 2
FANU
TOPU

PZ-DK223

DSP

PIM 1

(1)
PIM 0

PIM 0

ALMA

(2)
LED2

LPM

DUMMY
ALM2

BASEU

BASEU
FRONT VIEW

REAR VIEW

Figure 011-12 Inter-Frame Alarm Bus Cable Connection for IMG0-IMG2
NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 181
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-011
Sheet 22/24
Inter-Frame Cable Connections

Multiple IMG Configuration

Table 011-12 Inter-Frame Alarm Bus Cable Connection for IMG0-IMG2
FROM
No.
UNIT/MODULE

TO

CONNECTOR
UNIT/MODULE
NAME

CONNECTOR
NAME

CABLE NAME

1

LPM

LED2

TOPU(IMG2)

DSPM

16PH LED CA-B

2

LPM

ALM2

PIM0 (IMG2)

ALMA

16PH ALM CA-B

CHAPTER 3
Page 182
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

REMARKS

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-011
Sheet 23/24
Inter-frame Cable Connections

Multiple IMG Configuration

IMG 0

Connect the inter-frame alarm bus cables between
IMG0 and IMG3 as shown below.

TOPU

PIM 3

PIM 2

IMG 3
TOPU

FANU

PZ-DK223

DSP

PIM 1

(1)

PIM 0

PIM 0

ALMA

(2)

LED3

LPM

DUMMY

ALM3

BASEU

BASEU
FRONT VIEW

REAR VIEW

Figure 011-13 Inter-Frame Alarm Bus Cable Connection for IMG0-IMG3

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 183
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-011
Sheet 24/24
Inter-frame Cable Connections

Multiple IMG Configuration

Table 011-13 Inter-Frame Alarm Bus Cable Connection for IMG0-IMG3
FROM
No.
UNIT/MODULE

TO

CONNECTOR
UNIT/MODULE
NAME

CONNECTOR
NAME

CABLE NAME

1

LPM

LED3

TOPU(IMG3)

DSPM

16PH LED CA-C

2

LPM

ALM3

PIM0 (IMG3)

ALMA

16PH ALM CA-C

CHAPTER 3
Page 184
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

REMARKS

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-012
Sheet 1/1
Front Cable Connections between Circuit
Cards

This NAP describes front cable connections between circuit cards.
Note:

Protection against static electricity:
A Portable Field Service Grounding Kit must be used to protect system components from static discharge.

START
When CCH/DCH and DTI cards are mounted in PIM (For CCIS/ISDN), connect the front cable
between CCH/DCH and DTI cards by referring to Figure 012-1.
END

CCH
/DCH

DTI

TRK
CN2

DCH/CCH

Connecting Cable Specification
Cable Name : 10AL-(10)FLT CA
: NR-510247-001
Desig. No.
: White
Color Label
: 10/4 (cm/inch)
Length

(PIM)

FRONT VIEW

Figure 012-1 Front Cable Connections between Circuit Cards for CCIS/ISDN
NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 185
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-013
Sheet 1/13
Cable Running from the PBX to MDF,
ATTCON, MAT, and SMDR

This NAP explains the following work items:
•

Cable Running from the PBX to the MDF and ATTCON (Desk Console)

•

Cable Running from the PBX to the MAT and SMDR

•

Connections at the PBX Side

•

Cable Tying at the Equipment Frame

Note:

Compliance with EMI
To comply with EMI, Shielded cables with CHAMP connector should be used for the following installation
cables:
• Cable from the PBX to the MDF
• Cable from the PBX to Attendant Console
• Cable from the PBX to alarm indicating equipment
• Cable from the PBX to the external music-on-hold source
• Cable for line test (connected to TEST connection)

CHAPTER 3
Page 186
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-013
Sheet 2/13
Cable Running from the PBX to MDF,
ATTCON, MAT, and SMDR

1. CABLE RUNNING FROM THE PBX TO THE MDF AND ATTCON

START
Cables (25P) for LT Connectors

At the PBX side, verify the names of the connectors
on the PIM backplane, then bring each LT cable up to
the corresponding connector position.
Refer to Figure 013-1.

Cables for Desk Console Connectors

Referring to NAP 200-016, run the installation cables
for the Desk Console to the relevant connector
positions.

Cables (25P) for 16PH EX ALM
Connector

At the PBX side, confirm the name of the connectors
on the LPR backplane, then bring the 16PH EX ALM
CA and installation cable up to the connector
position.

Cables (25P) for NCU Connectors

At the PBX side, bring each NCU cable up to the
connector on the front of the PFT cards to be
mounted in the PIM. Refer to Figure 015-4.
At the MDF side, confirm the location of the
Terminal Block to which the cable is to be
terminated, then bring the cable up to the terminal
block.

A

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 187
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-013
Sheet 3/13
Cable Running from the PBX to MDF,
ATTCON, MAT, and SMDR

A
Cables for ODT Connectors

Referring to description of 8TLT card in the
Circuit Card Manual, connect each 2400
ODT CABLE/2400 ODT CABLE-A and the
corresponding installation cables.
At the PBX side, bring each 2400 ODT
CABLE/2400 ODT CABLE-A up to the
connector position on the front of the 8TLT
cards to be mounted in the PIM.
At the MDF side, confirm the location of the
Terminal Blocks to which each cable is to be
terminated, then bring the cables up to the
terminal blocks.

END

CHAPTER 3
Page 188
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-013
Sheet 4/13
Cable Running from the PBX to MDF,
ATTCON, MAT, and SMDR

(TOPU)

(PIM3)

(PIM2)

(FANU)

(PIM1)

(PIM0)

(LPR)

(BASEU)

REAR VIEW

Figure 013-1 LT Cable Routing
NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 189
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-013
Sheet 5/13
Cable Running from the PBX to MDF,
ATTCON, MAT, and SMDR

Circuit Card
Front Connector
Cable Hole

Cable

Circuit Card
Up to three circuit card
front cables can be run
through the cable hole.

Cable Duct

SIDE VIEW

Six circuit card front
cables can be accommodated;
three on the left side, and
three on the right side.
FRONT VIEW

Figure 013-2 Cable Routing of Circuit Card Front Cable

CHAPTER 3
Page 190
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-013
Sheet 6/13
Cable Running from the PBX to MDF,
ATTCON, MAT, and SMDR

2. CABLE RUNNING FROM THE PBX TO THE MAT AND SMDR

START
MAT (Refer to NAP-200-017)

Referring to NAP-200-017, connect 68PH S 2 PORTS
CA-A and the installation cable (25P).
At the PBX side, confirm the connector name on the
LPR backplane, then run 68PH S 2 PORTS CA-A up
to the connector position.
At the MAT side, run RS-232-CA “0” up to the MAT.

SMDR (Refer to NAP-200-018)

Referring to NAP-200-018, connect the PBX and the
SMDR equipment.
At the PBX side, confirm the connector name on the
LPR backplane, then run 68PH S 2 PORTS CA-A up
to the connector position.
At the SMDR equipment side, run the installation
cable (25P) up to the SMDR equipment.

END

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 191
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-013
Sheet 7/13
Cable Running from the PBX to MDF,
ATTCON, MAT, and SMDR

3. CONNECTIONS AT THE PBX SIDE

START
LT Connectors

Confirm each connector name on the backplane
and the corresponding LT connector, then
connect the two.

16PH EX ALM

Connect the 16PH EX ALM CA to the EXALM
rear connector on the LPR backplane.

NCU Connectors

Connect the NCU cable to the connector on the
front of the PFT card.

IOC Connectors

Connect 68 PH S 2PORTS CA-A to the MISC
connectors on the LPR backplane.

END
4. CABLE TYING AT THE PBX

START
Referring to Figure 013-3, secure the connector cables to the Module.
END

CHAPTER 3
Page 192
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-013
Sheet 8/13
Cable Running from the PBX to MDF,
ATTCON, MAT, and SMDR

Backplane

LT6
PLO

LT3
LT2

LT1

LT5
LT4

LT0

TIE-WRAP

REAR SIDE

Figure 013-3 Example of Cable Tying Using Tie-Wrap
NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 193
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-013
Sheet 9/13
Cable Running from the PBX to MDF,
ATTCON, MAT, and SMDR

5. TERMINATION OF THE CABLES BETWEEN THE PBX AND THE MDF OR ATTCON ONTO THE CABLE
SUPPORT ASSEMBLY

START
Remove of the Cable Support Assembly.

Remove the Cable Support Assembly from the
BASEU. (See Figure 013-4.)

Peel the cable cover

Referring to Table 13-1, confirm the cable
terminating locations on the Cable Support
Assembly.
Per the cable terminating locations, peel the
cable cover as shown on Figure 013-5.

Terminate the cable

Referring to Figure 013-5, wind the M-clamp
onto the cable portion from which the cover has
been peeled off.
Referring to Figure 013-6, terminate the cable
onto the Cable Support Assembly.

When all the cables have been terminated to the Cable Support Assembly A, likewise terminate the
cables onto the Cable Support Assembly B, C, D, E in the order named.
END

CHAPTER 3
Page 194
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-013
Sheet 10/13
Cable Running from the PBX to MDF,
ATTCON, MAT, and SMDR

(LPM, TSWM or DUMMY)

(BASEU)

REAR VIEW

CABLE SUPPORT ASSEMBLY

A

FRONT

B

C

D

(LPM, TSWM or DUMMY)

SIDE VIEW

Figure 013-4 Cable Support Assembly

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 195
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-013
Sheet 11/13
Cable Running from the PBX to MDF,
ATTCON, MAT, and SMDR

Table 013-1 Cable Support Assembly
BACKPLANE
MODULE

CONNECTOR NAME

MISCnA, MISCnB
LPR

EXALM Note

CABLE
SUPPORT No.

A
A
A (Extra)

Front of Circuit Card
PIM0
LT0 - LT11

LT0 - LT11

B

B

LT cable

C

The number of cables is
limited to three for one
side, and six for both
sides.

C

LT cable

D

The number of cables is
limited to three for one
side, and six for both
sides.

D

LT cable

E

The number of cables is
limited to three for one
side, and six for both
sides.

E

LT cable

Front of Circuit Card
PIM2
LT0 - LT11
Front of Circuit Card
PIM3
LT0 - LT11
Note:

For LPM only.

CHAPTER 3
Page 196
Revision 3.0

REMARKS

for I/O Equipment (MAT, Spare cable (15 cables) are to
Printer, etc.)
be used as Cable Support
Assembly extra cables. The
for Alarm Indicating
number of cables for the
Panel, etc.
whole system is limited to
Spare (15 cables)
maximum 100.
The number of cables is
limited to three for one
side, and six for both
sides.

Front of Circuit Card
PIM1

USE

NDA-24234

In case the required number
of cables exceeds 20, the
Cable Support Assembly
extra cables should be used.
In case the required number
of cables exceeds 20, the
Cable Support Assembly
extra cables should be used.
In case the required number
of cables exceeds 20, the
Cable Support Assembly
extra cables should be used.
In case the required number
of cables exceeds 20, the
Cable Support Assembly
extra cables should be used.

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-013
Sheet 12/13
Cable Running from the PBX to MDF,
ATTCON, MAT, and SMDR

CLAMP (M-398902)

Approx.
18 mm (0.72 inch)

Shield cable

Figure 013-5 Clamp Winding

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 197
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-013
Sheet 13/13
Cable Running from the PBX to MDF,
ATTCON, MAT, and SMDR

(FRONT)
CABLE

CABLE SUPPORT ASSEMBLY

PANHEAD SCREW
(PL-C, P, B, MS 4X8X3 GF)
CABLE SUPPORT
ASSEMBLY

CLAMP

CABLE

Figure 013-6 Termination of Installation Cables
CHAPTER 3
Page 198
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-014
Sheet 1/1
Termination of Cables on MDF (Wire
Accommodation of Each Cable)

This NAP explains the procedures for terminating cables at the MDF.
CAUTION: When terminating Cables to the MDF, the line/trunk circuit card should extend about 50 mm (2

inches) from the module and must not contact the backplane connector.

START
Cable trying at the MDF

Secure the CHAMP Connector cables, which have
been extended to the MDF as per NAP-200-012, to
the cable supports on the MDF after confirming their
positions on the terminal block.

Cutting of excess cable

Shorten each CHAMP connector cable, leaving
enough length so that they can be neatly terminated
to the terminal block.

Cable termination to the MDF

Referring to the Circuit Card Manual, punch down
the CHAMP connector cables to the MDF.

Confirmation of connections

After confirming that no erroneous connections have
been made on the Module Group side, use an IC
buzzer on similar device to verify the connections at
the MDF.

END

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 199
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-015
Sheet 1/30
Cable Termination and Cross
Connections from MDF to Peripheral
Equipment, C. O. Lines, and Tie Lines

This NAP explains the following work items:

MDF

Cross Connection of
Stations

C.O. Line/
Tie Line

Cross Connection of
Trunks (C.O. Lines and
Tie Lines)
Cross Connections
for PFT

Cross connection of Alarm
Indicating Panel and
Music on Hold

PBX

NDA-24234

Page 202

Page 204

Page 207

Cross connections for
TAS indicator

Page 212

Cross connections for
External Switches

Page 215

Connection of
Announcement
Machine

CHAPTER 3
Page 200
Revision 3.0

Page 201

Page 217

Connection of
Paging Equipment

Page 219

Cross connections for
Dterm Series E

Page 221

Cross Connections
for Digital Interfaces

Page 223

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-015
Sheet 2/30
Cable Termination and Cross
Connections from MDF to Peripheral
Equipment, C. O. Lines, and Tie Lines

1. CROSS CONNECTION OF STATIONS
Note 1: Provide the necessary cross connections at the MDF by using copper wires of 0.5 mm diameter (24 AWG).

2-core twisted wire is used for speech path, and single-core wire is used for control wire. It is recommended
that wires of different colors be used for trunks, station lines, PFT, etc., so that they can easily be distinguished.
Note 2: For cross connections between stations and C.O. lines for PFT, refer to Section 3., “CROSS CONNEC-

TIONS FOR PFT”.
START
Check the terminal locations on the Module
Group side of the MDF

Referring to Port Accommodation sheet and
description of 16LC card in the Circuit Card
Manual, identify the lead names for the 16LC
card and the terminal locations of the leads.

Cross Connection

Referring to Figure 015-1, provide the necessary
cross connections.

END

MDF
Module Group Side

AXX
16LC
CARD

TELEPHONE
SET
BXX

Figure 015-1 Cross Connection of Stations

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 201
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-015
Sheet 3/30
Cable Termination and Cross
Connections from MDF to Peripheral
Equipment, C. O. Lines, and Tie Lines

2. CROSS CONNECTION OF TRUNKS (C.O. LINES AND TIE LINES)
Note 1: Provide the necessary cross connections at the MDF by using copper wires of 0.5 mm diameter (24 AWG).

2-core twisted wire is used for speech path, and single-core wire is used for control wire. It is recommended
that wires of different colors be used for trunks, station lines, PFT, etc., so that they can easily be distinguished.
Note 2: For cross connections between stations and C.O. lines for PFT, refer to Section 3., “CROSS CONNEC-

TIONS FOR PFT” in this NAP.

START
Check the terminal locations on
the Module Group side of the MDF

Referring to Port Accommodation sheet and
description of 16COT card or 8TLT card in the
Circuit Card Manual, identify the lead names for
the 16COT, or 8TLT card and the terminal locations
of the leads.

Cross Connection

Referring to Figure 015-2, provide the necessary
cross connections.

END

CHAPTER 3
Page 202
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-015
Sheet 4/30
Cable Termination and Cross
Connections from MDF to Peripheral
Equipment, C. O. Lines, and Tie Lines

Module Group Side
(1) 16COT card
AX
16COT
CARD

C.O. LINE

BX

(2) 8TLT card (for DID Trunk)
AX
8TLT
CARD

TIE LINE

BX

(3) 8TLT card (for E&M Trunk)

TAX
RAX
EX
8TLT
CARD

MX

TIE LINE

TBX
RBX

Note 1

Note 2
Note 1: For 2W/4W E&M systems, these leads are not used.
Note 2: For No. 4–7 trunks, the leads appear at the front of the card. Refer to the description of the 8TLT

card in the Circuit Card Manual.
Figure 015-2 Cross Connection of Trunks (C.O. Lines and Tie Lines)
NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 203
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-015
Sheet 5/30
Cable Termination and Cross
Connections from MDF to Peripheral
Equipment, C. O. Lines, and Tie Lines

3. CROSS CONNECTIONS FOR PFT
Note 1: The COT must be accommodated in a universal slot of the same Unit (U) in which the cross-connected PFT

is mounted. See the figure below.
Note 2: Provide the necessary cross connections at the MDF by using copper wires of 0.5 mm diameter (24 AWG).

2-core twisted wire is used for speech path, and single-core wire is used for control wire. It is recommended
that wires of different colors be used for trunks, station lines, PFT, etc., so that they can easily be distinguished.

The PFT (PA-M53) card is mounted in slot 04 or in slot 15 of each PIM.
FRONT VIEW
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PFT (PA-M53)

MUX

Universal Slots

MUX

COT

PFT (PA-M53)

PIM

Universal Slots

Figure 015-3 Mounting Locations of PFT (PA-M53)

CHAPTER 3
Page 204
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-015
Sheet 6/30
Cable Termination and Cross
Connections from MDF to Peripheral
Equipment, C. O. Lines, and Tie Lines

START
Check the terminal locations on
the Module Group side of the MDF

Referring to Section 1., “CROSS CONNECTION OF
STATIONS” and Section 2., “CROSS
CONNECTION OF TRUNKS (C.O. LINES AND TIE
LINES)” in this NAP, identify the lead names of the
stations and trunks to be connected to the PFT (NCU)
card and the terminal locations of the leads.
Referring to description of PFT card in the “NEAX
2400 IMX Circuit Card Manual,” identify the lead
names for the “NCU” connector, “LT” connector, and
the terminal locations of the leads.

Cross Connection

Referring to Figure 015-4, provide the necessary cross
connections.

END

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 205
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-015
Sheet 7/30
Cable Termination and Cross
Connections from MDF to Peripheral
Equipment, C. O. Lines, and Tie Lines

Installation Cable

PBX
MDF

MDF
LT

LT
AXX

AXX
BXX

LC

COT

BXX

Central
Office
Analog Telephone

NCU

PFT(PA-M53) Card

NCU

AOXX

ROXX

BOXX

TOXX

AIXX

RIXX

BIXX

TIXX


:

When PIM Power is OFF

:

When PIM Power is ON

Figure 015-4 Cross Connection for PFT

CHAPTER 3
Page 206
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-015
Sheet 8/30
Cable Termination and Cross
Connections from MDF to Peripheral
Equipment, C. O. Lines, and Tie Lines

4. CROSS CONNECTION OF ALARM INDICATING PANEL AND MUSIC ON HOLD

Provide the necessary cross connections at the MDF by using copper wires of 0.5 mm diameter (24 AWG).
2-core twisted wire is used for speech path, and single-core wire is used for control wire. It is recommended
that wires of different colors be used for trunks, station lines, PFT, etc., so that they can easily be distinguished.

Note:

•

Alarm Indicating Panel

START
Mounting of Alarm Indicating panel

Mount the Alarm Indicating Panel using AY plugs,
curl plugs, board plugs, etc.

Cable running

Referring to Figure 015-5 or Figure 015-6, run the
cables between the Alarm Indicating Panel and the
MDF.
Referring to Figure 015-5 or Figure 015-6, run the
cable between the RPT on BASEU and the MDF.
Protect the cables by using cable ducts, etc.

Termination of cables

Terminate the installed cables to the Alarm
Indicating Panel, MDF, and RPT terminals.

Cross connection

Referring the Figure 015-5 or Figure 015-6,
provide the necessary cross connections at the
Alarm Indicating Panel side and Module Group
side.

END
•

Music On Hold

START
Cross connection

Referring to Figures 015-5 or Figure 015-7, run the cable
between the MDF and the music source.
Connect the music source to the FM0 and E connections.
Note:

FM1 is not used at this time.

END

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 207
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-015
Sheet 9/30
Cable Termination and Cross
Connections from MDF to Peripheral
Equipment, C. O. Lines, and Tie Lines

• Locations of Terminal and Connector
FRONT VIEW

REAR VIEW

BZ-C21
LPR

LPR

BASEU

BASEU

RPT Terminal (PZ-M377)

0

1

2

3

1 2 3 4 5
-48V

(RPT0)

4

TPWR
FALM

EXALM

1 2 3 4 5
GND

(RPT1)

• General Cable Connection for Alarm Indicating Panel
FRONT VIEW
RPT Terminal
GND (RPT1)
(PZ-M377)

LPR

MDF
BSCF
-48V (RPT0)

Audible and Visual
Alarm Indicting
Panel
MJ
MN

REAR VIEW
LPR

BELL

EXALM

BSCF

Figure 015-5 Connection of Alarm Indicating Panel and Music on Hold (Single IMG Configuration)
CHAPTER 3
Page 208
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-015
Sheet 10/30
Cable Termination and Cross
Connections from MDF to Peripheral
Equipment, C. O. Lines, and Tie Lines

• Cabling Diagram
16 PH EXALM CA and
Installation Cable (25P)

16 PH EXALM CA cable
Pin Assignment

MDF
EXALM
(Slot 04, LPM)

PIN LEAD PIN LEAD
No. NAME No. NAME
FM0
E
1
26
2
FM1
27
E
3 MPALM
28
4
29 MJB
MJA
5
30 MNB
MNA
6
31
BELL
7
32
8
33
9
34

FM0
Note

E

MUSIC
SOURCE

MJA
MNA
BELL
MJB

Audible and Visual
Alarm Indicating Panel
MJ

MNB
47
48
49
50

Note:

EXTA

22
23
24
25

RPT1 (G)
EXTB

MN
BELL

RPT0 (48v)

FM1 is not used.

Figure 015-5 Connection of Alarm Indicating Panel and Music on Hold (Single IMG Configuration) (2/2)

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 209
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-015
Sheet 11/30
Cable Termination and Cross
Connections from MDF to Peripheral
Equipment, C. O. Lines, and Tie Lines

• Locations of Terminal and Connector
FRONT VIEW

LPR

BASEU

RPT Terminal (PZ-M377)

0

1

2

3

1 2 3 4 5
-48V

(RPT0)

4

TPWR
FALM

1 2 3 4 5
GND

(RPT1)

• General Cable Connection for Alarm Indicating Panel
FRONT VIEW
RPT Terminal
(PZ-M377)
GND (RPT1)

LPR

MDF
BSCF
-48V (RPT0)

Audible and Visual
Alarm Indicting
Panel
MJ
MN

REAR VIEW
LPR

BELL

EXALM

BSCF

Figure 015-6 Connection of Alarm Indicating Panel (Multiple IMG Configuration) (1/2)
CHAPTER 3
Page 210
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-015
Sheet 12/30
Cable Termination and Cross
Connections from MDF to Peripheral
Equipment, C. O. Lines, and Tie Lines

• Cabling Diagram
EXALM
(Slot 04, LPM)

PIN
No.

16 PH EXALM CA Cable
Pin Assignment
LEAD
NAME

PIN
No.

26

1

27

2

16 PH EXALM CA and
Installation Cable

LEAD
NAME
MDF
MJA

28

-

3

MPALM

29
30

MJB

4
5

MJA

MNA

MNB
BELL

BELL

31

MNA
-

6

MJ/MN/BELL

MJB

32
33

7
8

MNB

34

9

RPT1 (G)
RPT0 (-48V)

50

EXTA

25

EXTB

Figure 015-6 Connection of Alarm Indicating Panel (Multiple IMG Configuration) (2/2)

• Cabling Diagram

34 PH ISWM EXCLK CA-A/
34 PH EXCLK CA-A and
Installation Cable (25P)

Pin Assignment for Receiving
Music-on-hold Source

EXCLK0/EXCLK1
(Slot 21/33, TSWM)

PIN LEAD
No. NAME
26 FM0
27 FM1
28 FM0
29 FM1
30
31
32
33
34

PIN
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

47
48
49
50

22
23
24
25

EXTA

LEAD
NAME
E
E
E
E

MDF

Note 1

MUSIC
SOURCE

Note 2
Note 3

EXTB

Note 1: For 34 PH ISWM EXCLK CA-A cable (available when PH-CK16-A/PH-CK-17-A card is used as PLO).
Note 2: For 34 PH EXCLK CA-A cable (available when PH-CK16/PH CK-17 card is used as PLO).
Note 1, Note 2 : FM1 is not used.
Note 3: When PH-CK16-A/17-A is in use, also perform multiple connections between No. 0 and No.1 systems.
Figure 015-7 Connection of Music on Hold (Multiple IMG Configuration)
NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 211
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-015
Sheet 13/30
Cable Termination and Cross
Connections from MDF to Peripheral
Equipment, C. O. Lines, and Tie Lines

5. CROSS CONNECTIONS FOR TAS INDICATOR
Note:

Provide the necessary cross connections at the MDF by using copper wires of 0.5 mm diameter (24 AWG).
2-core twisted wire is used for speech path, and single-core wire is used for control wire. It is recommended
that wires of different colors be used for trunks, station lines, PFT, etc., so that they can easily be distinguished.

START
Mounting of TAS Indicator

Mount the TAS Indicator using AY plugs, curl plugs,
board plugs, etc.

Cable running

Referring to Figure 015-8, run the cables between the
TAS and the MDF.
Protect the cables by using cable ducts, etc.

Termination of cables

Terminate the installed cables to the TAS Indicator, and
MDF.

Check the terminal locations on the
Module Group side of the MDF

Referring to Port Accommodation sheet and
description of ATI (PA-CS33) card in the “Circuit Card
Manual,” identify the lead names for the ATI card and
the terminal locations of the leads.

Cross Connection

Referring to Figure 015-8, provide the necessary cross
connections at the TAS Indicator side and the PBX
side.

END

CHAPTER 3
Page 212
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-015
Sheet 14/30
Cable Termination and Cross
Connections from MDF to Peripheral
Equipment, C. O. Lines, and Tie Lines

To connect TAS the PA-CS33 card is used as the interface card. The card may be mounted in Slot No. 12 or in
Slot No. 23. The leads appear on LT5 and LT11, respectively.
Front View

• PA-CS33 (ATI) mounting slots

LT5

PA-CS33(ATI)

PIM

TSW/MUX
TSW/MUX

PA-CS33(ATI)

PA-CS33 (ATI) card may be mounted
in Slot 12 and/or 23.

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

LT11

Universal Slots

Universal Slots

•

Backplane

LT cable connectors

Use LT5 connector when the PA-CS33
card is mounted in Slot 12. When the
card is mounted in Slot 23, use LT11
connector.

LT5

LT11

PIM

PA-CS33 Pin Assignment

• LT cable Pin Assignment
Pins are assigned as follows on the LT
connector for PA-CS33 card.

PIN

LEAD

PIN

LEAD

No.

NAME

No.

NAME

26

1

27

2

32

7
8

33
34

BN4800

35
36

for TAS #0

BN4801

BN4820

11 BN4821
12

38

TAS1B

13

39

BN4810

37

for TAS #1

9
10

40

TAS0B

41

BN4830

42
43
44

TAS1A
14 BN4811
15 TAS0A
16 BN4831
17
18

B2

19

45

20

46

21

LT Connector

22

47
48

A2

B3

23

49

24

50

25

A3

Figure 015-8 Cable Connection Diagram for TAS (1 of 2)
NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 213
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-015
Sheet 15/30
Cable Termination and Cross
Connections from MDF to Peripheral
Equipment, C. O. Lines, and Tie Lines

•

Cable Connection Diagram
Provide the following connections at the MDF.

PBX

MDF
LT connector Cable

Installation Cable (1P)

TAS0A0
TAS0B0

TAS Indicator

LT connector
TAS0A1
TAS0B1

Figure 015-8 Cable Connection Diagram for TAS (2 of 2)

CHAPTER 3
Page 214
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

TAS Indicator

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-015
Sheet 16/30
Cable Termination and Cross
Connections from MDF to Peripheral
Equipment, C. O. Lines, and Tie Lines

6. CROSS CONNECTIONS FOR EXTERNAL SWITCHES
Note:

Provide the necessary cross connections at the MDF by using copper wires of 0.5 mm diameter (24 AWG).
2-core twisted wire is used for speech path, and single-core wire is used for control wire. It is recommended
that wires of different colors be used for trunks, station lines, PFT, etc., so that they can easily be distinguished.

START
Mounting of External Switches

Mount the External Switches using AY plugs, curl
plugs, board plugs, etc.

Cable running

Referring to Figure 015-10, run the cables between the
External Switches and the MDF.
Referring to Figure 015-10, run the cables between the
External Switches and RPT on the BASEU.
Protect the cables by using cable ducts, etc.

Termination of cables

Terminate the installed cables to the External Switches,
and MDF.

Check the terminal locations on the
Module Group side of the MDF

Referring to Port Accommodation sheet and
description of PFT (PA-M53 card in the “Circuit Card
Manual”, identify the lead names for the “LT”
connector and the terminal locations of the leads.

Cross connection

Referring to Figure 015-10, provide the necessary
cross connections at the External Switch side and the
PBX side.

END

When the EFCT key is in the UP position, operations of K0-K7 are effective. To turn on a circuit, set the
corresponding key (K0-K7) in the UP position.
EFCT K0

K1

K2 K3
K4 K5
K6 K7

Figure 015-9 Outer View of External Switch

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 215
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-015
Sheet 17/30
Cable Termination and Cross
Connections from MDF to Peripheral
Equipment, C. O. Lines, and Tie Lines

Provide cable connections at the MDF as shown below.
REAR VIEW

PIM Backplane

LT6

LPR
LT0

BASCF

MDF

G(RPT1)

#2 External Switch No.0

01 02 03 04 05

#1

#2 External Switch No.1

#1

Pin Assignment #1
Pin Assignment #2

PIN LEAD PIN LEAD
No. NAME No. NAME
26
KY1
KY0
1
27
KY3
KY2
2
28
KY5
KY4
3
29
KY7
KY6
4
30
5
31
6
32
7
33
8

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

K0
K1
K2
K3
K4
K5
K6
K7

Figure 015-10 Connection of External Switches
CHAPTER 3
Page 216
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34

E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-015
Sheet 18/30
Cable Termination and Cross
Connections from MDF to Peripheral
Equipment, C. O. Lines, and Tie Lines

7. CONNECTION OF ANNOUNCEMENT MACHINE
Note:

Provide the necessary cross connections at the MDF by using copper wires of 0.5 mm diameter (24 AWG).
2-core twisted wire is used for speech path, and single-core wire is used for control wire.
It is recommended that wires of different colors be used for trunks, station lines, PFT, etc., so that they can
easily be distinguished.

START
Mounting of Announcement Machine

Mount the Announcement Machine using AY plugs,
curl plugs, board plugs, etc.

Cable running

Referring to Figure 015-11, run the cable between
the Announcement Machine and the MDF.
Protect the cables by using cable ducts, etc.

Termination of cables

Terminate the installed cables to the Announcement
Machine and MDF.

Check the terminal locations on the
Module Group side of the MDF

Referring to Port Accommodation sheet and
description of 16COT card in the Circuit Card
Manual and Figure 015-11, identify the lead names
of the Announcement Trunk (ANTK) and the
terminal locations of the leads.

Cross connections

Referring to Figure 015-11, provide the necessary
cross connections at the Announcement Machine
side and the PBX side.

END

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 217
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-015
Sheet 19/30
Cable Termination and Cross
Connections from MDF to Peripheral
Equipment, C. O. Lines, and Tie Lines

Configuration of 16COT Lead
No. OF
CKT

LEAD

No.0

B
B0

A0

1

B1

A1

2

B2

A2

3

B3

4

B4

5

B5

LEAD

No. OF
CKT

A

B

A

B0

A0

1

B1 (M)

A1

2

B2

A2

A3

3

B3

A3

A4

4

B4

A4

A5

5

B5

A5

No.0

ANTK

When No. 0 circuit is used for COT.

Starting Wire
Speech Wires
When using 16COT-BE,
connect to ground

When No. 0 circuit is used for
Announcement Trunk.

Announcement Machine Cabling Diagram
MDF
TSW

SPEECH WIRES

ANNOUNCEMENT
MACHINE

ANTK (COT)

STARTING
WIRE
“LT” Connector Cable (25P)
already run in NAP-200-013.
Connections are made using installation cable.
A total of three wires are required per line: two wires
for speech and one starting wire.
For a loop start system, only two wires are required.

Note:

An ANTK circuit is available only on the No. 0 circuit of the 16COT card.
If a starting wire is required, the No. 1 circuit cannot be used for a COT.

Figure 015-11 Connection of Announcement Machine

CHAPTER 3
Page 218
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-015
Sheet 20/30
Cable Termination and Cross
Connections from MDF to Peripheral
Equipment, C. O. Lines, and Tie Lines

8. CONNECTION OF PAGING EQUIPMENT
Note:

Provide the necessary cross connections at the MDF by using copper wires of 0.5 mm diameter (24 AWG).
2-core twisted wire is used for speech path, and single-core wire is used for control wire.
It is recommended that wires of different colors be used for trunks, station lines, PFT, etc., so that they can
easily be distinguished.

START
Mounting of Paging Equipment

Mount the Paging Equipment using AY plugs, curl
plugs, board plugs, etc.

Cable running

Referring to Figure 015-12, run the cables between
the Paging Equipment and the MDF.
Protect the cables by using cable ducts, etc.

Termination of cables

Terminate the installed cables to the Paging
Equipment and the MDF.

Check terminal locations on the Module
Group side of the MDF

Referring to Port Accommodation sheet and
description of 16COT card in the Circuit Card Manual
and Figure 015-12, identify the lead names for the
Paging Trunk (PGT) and the terminal locations of the
leads.

Cross connections

Referring to Figure 015-12, provide the necessary
cross connections at the Paging Equipment side and
the PBX side.

END

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 219
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-015
Sheet 21/30
Cable Termination and Cross
Connections from MDF to Peripheral
Equipment, C. O. Lines, and Tie Lines

Configuration of 16 COT Lead
No. OF
CKT

LEAD
B

A

No. OF
CKT
No.0

No.0

B0

A0

1

B1

A1

2

B2

A2

3

B3

4

B4

5

B5

LEAD
B

A

1

B0
B1 (M)

A0
A1

2

B2

A2

A3

3

B3

A3

A4

4

B4

A4

A5

5

B5

A5

ANTK

When No. 0 circuit is used for COT.

Starting Wire
Speech Wires
When using 16 COT-BE,
connect to ground

When No. 0 circuit is used for PGT.

Paging Equipment Cabling Diagram
MDF
TSW

AMP

SP

SPEECH WIRES
ANTK (COT)

STARTING
WIRE
“LT” Connector Cable (25P)
already run in NAP-200-013.
Connections are made using installation cable.
A total of three wires are required per line: two wires
for speech and one starting wire.
For a loop start system, only two wires are required.

Note:

A PGT circuit is available only on the No. 0 circuit of the 16COT card. If a starting wire is required,
the No. 1 circuit cannot be used for a COT.

Figure 015-12 Connection of Paging Equipment

CHAPTER 3
Page 220
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-015
Sheet 22/30
Cable Termination and Cross
Connections from MDF to Peripheral
Equipment, C. O. Lines, and Tie Lines

9. CROSS CONNECTIONS FOR Dterm Series E
Note 1: Provide the necessary cross connections at the MDF using copper wires of 0.5 mm diameter (24 AWG). 2-

core twisted wire is used for speech path, and single-core wire is used for control wire. It is recommended
that wires of different colors be used for trunks, station lines, PFT, etc., so that they can easily be distinguished.
Note 2: The maximum distance between the Module Group and Dterm is 850 meters (2459 feet). The installation

cable must be 24 AWG (0.5 mm dia.) or larger.
START
Cable running

Referring to Figure 015-14, run the cables between
each Dterm and its Modular Block (Jack), and
between the Modular Blocks and the MDF.
Protect the cables by using cable ducts, etc.

Termination of cables

Referring to Figure 015-14, terminate the installed
cables to the MDF and the Modular Blocks.

Check terminal locations on the
Module Group side of the MDF

Referring to Port Accommodation sheet and
description of 16ELC card in the “Circuit Card
Manual,” identify the lead names for the ELC card
and the terminal locations of the leads.

Cross Connection

Referring to Figure 015-14, provide the necessary
cross connections at the Dterm side and the PBX side.

END

Figure 015-13 Outer View of Dterm Series E

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 221
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-015
Sheet 23/30
Cable Termination and Cross
Connections from MDF to Peripheral
Equipment, C. O. Lines, and Tie Lines

Provide the following connections at the MDF.

PBX

MDF
LT connector Cable

A0

D

term

Series E

Modular Block

B0
ELC
(Jack)
LT connector

A15

1-pair cable
Modular Cable

B15

Max 850 m. (2459 feet)

Figure 015-14 Cable Connection for Dterm Series E

CHAPTER 3
Page 222
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-015
Sheet 24/30
Cable Termination and Cross
Connections from MDF to Peripheral
Equipment, C. O. Lines, and Tie Lines

10. CROSS CONNECTIONS FOR DIGITAL INTERFACES

Perform the cross connections for digital interfaces as shown below:
Note 1: When your system is single IMG configuration, time division switch (TSW) card is equipped with Phase

Lock Oscillator (PLO). Therefore no dedicated PLO card is required to use Digital Interfaces. However,
when the system requires a higher-precision oscillator, use the Oscillator (OSC: PA-CK14) card. The cards
may be mounted in slots numbered 9, and 17 of PIM0. For the OSC card, no external wiring is required.
Note 2: Provide the necessary cross connections at the MDF by using copper wires of 0.5 mm diameter (24 AWG).

2-core twisted wire is used for speech path, and single-core wire is used for control wire. It is recommended
that wires of different colors be used for trunks, station lines, PFT, etc., so that they can easily be distinguished.

WARNING: Back card out of the module before attempting cross connection. Otherwise, the fuse mounted
on the DTI card will blow and the card will become inoperative.

START
Check terminal
locations on the
Module Group
side of the MDF

Cross Connection
Note

Digital Trunk
(DTI, CCT, PRT)

Referring to the Port Accommodation
sheet and description of Digital Trunk
card in the “Circuit Card Manual,”
identify the lead names for the Digital
Trunk card and the terminal locations
of the leads.

PLO leads

Referring to Figure 015-15/Figure
015-16 to identify the lead names and
the terminal locations for the PLO.

When accepting synchronization
clocks from other node (master or
submaster node)

Referring to Figure 015-17/Figure
015-18, provide the necessary cross
connections.

When accepting synchronization
clocks from External High-Stability
Oscillator

Referring to Figure 015-17/Figure
015-18, provide the necessary cross
connections.

END

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 223
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-015
Sheet 25/30
Cable Termination and Cross
Connections from MDF to Peripheral
Equipment, C. O. Lines, and Tie Lines

Since PLO circuit is equipped with TSW card, PLO input leads appear on the LT connector labeled PLO.
Front View

•

TSW mounting slots

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PLO
PLO

TSW card is mounted in slots 13 and 14
of PIM0.

PIM0
TSW
TSW

Universal Slots

•

LT cable connector

Universal Slots

Backplane

Connect an LT cable to the connector labeled
“PLO” on PIM0 backplane.
PIM0

•

PLO

PLO connector Pin Assignment

Pins are assigned as follows on “PLO” connector. When clock is distributed from a digital interface, use one
pair of “DIUxxx” leads among a maximum of 4 inputs. DIU leads have the following precedence:
DIU0xx(High)-> DIU3xx(Low). To receive clock from an external high-stability oscillator, use “DCSxx” leads.
for receiving clock from
a High-Stability Oscillator
for PLO
equipped
with TSW #0

for PLO
equipped
with TSW #1

PIN
No.
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33

LEAD PIN LEAD
NAME No. NAME
DCSB0
1 DCSA0
DIU0B0 2 DIU0A0
DIU1B0 3 DIU1A0
DIU2B0 4 DIU2A0
DIU3B0 5 DIU3A0
SYN0B0 6 SYN0A0
SYN1B0 7 SYN1A0
8

15
40
41
16
42 DCSB1 17
43 DIU0B1 18
44 DIU1B1 19
45 DIU2B1 20
46 DIU3B1 21
47 SYN0B1 22
48 SYN1B1 23
49
24
50
25

DCSA1
DIU0A1
DIU1A1
DIU2A1
DIU3A1
SYN0A1
SYN1A1

for distributing clock from
a digital interface

for PLO
equipped
with TSW #0

PLO Connector

for PLO
equipped
with TSW #1

PIN
No.
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33

LEAD PIN LEAD
NAME No. NAME
DCSB0
1 DCSA0
DIU0B0
2 DIU0A0
DIU1B0
3 DIU1A0
DIU2B0
4 DIU2A0
DIU3B0
5 DIU3A0
SYN0B0 6 SYN0A0
SYN1B0 7 SYN1A0
8

40
15
41
16
42 DCSB1 17
43 DIU0B1 18
44 DIU1B1 19
45 DIU2B1 20
46 DIU3B1 21
47 SYN0B1 22
48 SYN1B1 23
49
24
50
25

PLO Connector

DCSA1
DIU0A1
DIU1A1
DIU2A1
DIU3A1
SYN0A1
SYN1A1

Figure 015-15 PLO Pin Assignments for Receiving Clock (Single IMG Configuration)
CHAPTER 3
Page 224
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-015
Sheet 26/30
Cable Termination and Cross
Connections from MDF to Peripheral
Equipment, C. O. Lines, and Tie Lines

PLO input leads appear on the LT connectors labeled EXCLK0 and EXCLK1.
•

PLO mounting slots

PLO

TSW

EXCLK0

EXCLK1

Connect LT cables to the connectors labeled “EXCLK0” and
“EXCLK1” on the TSWM backplane.

EXCLK1

Backplane

LT cable connectors

PLO

TSWM

EXCLK0

PLO card is mounted in slots 21 and 23 of TSWM.

•

Front View
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

TSWM

• EXCLK0/EXCLK1 connector Pin Assignment
Pins are assigned as follows on “EXCLK0/EXCLK1” connector. When clock is distributed from a digital interface, use one pair of “DIUxxx” leads among a maximum of 4 inputs. DIU leads have the following precedence: DIU0xx (High)-> DIU3xx (Low). On the contrary,
to receive clock from an external high-stability oscillator, use “DCSxx” leads.
TSWM

34 PH ISWM EXCLK CA-A
34PH EXCLK CA-A
Cable Lead Accommodation Cable Lead Accommodation
26

1

27

EXCLK1

2

28

EXCLK0

REAR VIEW

26

FM1

1

E

27

FM0

2

E

E

28

4

E

29

5

SYN1A

30

DIU3B

5

DIU3A

6

SYN0A

31

DIU2B

6

DIU2A

DIU3B

7

DIU3A

32

DIU1B

7

DIU1A

DIU2B

8

DIU2A

33

DIU0B

8

DIU0A

34

DIU1B

9

DIU1A

34

35

DIU0B

10

DIU0A

35

36

DCSB

11

DCSA

36

FM1

3

29

FM0

30

SYN1B

31

SYN0B

32
33

3
4

9
DCSB

10

DCSA

11

37

12

37

SYN1B

12

38

13

38

SYN0B

13

SYN1A
SYN0A

MDF
Cable Note

Cable Note

Note:

Installation Cable

To Digital Interface and/or DCS

34 PH EXCLK CA-A for PH-CK 16/PH CK 17 card;
34 PH ISWM EXCLK CA-A for PH-CK 16-A/PHCK 17-A card.
Figure 015-16 PLO Pin Assignments for Receiving Clock (Multiple IMG Configuration)
NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 225
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-015
Sheet 27/30
Cable Termination and Cross
Connections from MDF to Peripheral
Equipment, C. O. Lines, and Tie Lines

• Cable Connection Diagram
Provide the following wirings at the MDF. The following connection diagram shows an example where the
system has the TSW cards in a dual configuration.

maximum 400 meters (1320 feet) (24AWG)
PBX
MDF

DCSA0

PCM Cable (IP)

DCSB0

External
High-Stability
Oscillator #0

TSW
DCSB1
PLO

LT Connector Cable

CLK

DCSA1

“PLO”

PCM Cable (IP)

External
High-Stability
Oscillator #1
CLK

BASEU

Note:

This diagram shows connections for a system having dual TSWs.
Figure 015-17 Cable Connection Diagram for Accepting Synchronization Clocks
from an External High-Stability Oscillator (Single IMG Configuration)

CHAPTER 3
Page 226
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-015
Sheet 28/30
Cable Termination and Cross
Connections from MDF to Peripheral
Equipment, C. O. Lines, and Tie Lines

• Cable Connection Diagram
Provide the following wirings at the MDF. The following connection diagram shows an example where the
system has the PLO cards in a dual configuration.
maximum 400 meters (1320 feet) (24AWG)

IMG1

MDF

PCM Cable (IP)

PLO#1

Cable

Note 1

External
High-Stability
Oscillator #1

DCSA
CLK

DCSB
EXCLK1

“EXCLK1”
PLO#0

Cable

Note 1

DCSB
DCSA

EXCLK0

PCM Cable (IP)
“EXCLK0”
BASEU

External
High-Stability
Oscillator #0
CLK

Note:

This diagram shows connections for a system having dual PLOs.

Note 1: “34PH EXCLK CA-A” for PH-CK16/PH-CK17;

“34PH ISWM EXCLK CA-A” for PH-CK16-A/PH-CK17-A card.
Figure 015-18 Cable Connection Diagram for Accepting Synchronization Clocks
from an External High-Stability Oscillator (Multiple IMG Configuration)

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 227
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-015
Sheet 29/30
Cable Termination and Cross
Connections from MDF to Peripheral
Equipment, C. O. Lines, and Tie Lines

• Cable Connection Diagram
Perform the following wirings at the MDF. The following connection diagram shows an example where the Digital
Trunk POUT leads are used as the 1st clock distribution route.
IMG1

maximum 200 meters (660 feet) (24AWG)
MDF

LT Connector
Digital
Interface

Installation Cable

maximum 100
meters (330 feet)
(24AWG)
TSW
PLO

Installation Cable
“PLO”

#1

for PLO #0
#2

BASEU

RA
RB
TA
TB
POUTA
POUTB
DIU0A0
DIU0B0

PCM
Carrier
Equipment/
DSU

to other node

CLK

Note 1

DIU1A0
DIU1B0

#3

DIU2A0
DIU2B0

#4

DIU3A0
DIU3B0

#1

DIU0A1
DIU0B1

#2

DIU1A1
DIU1B1

#3

DIU2A1
DIU2B1

#4

DIU3A1
DIU3B1

for PLO #1

PCM Cable (2P)

Note 2

Note 1: PLO has a maximum of four inputs. DIU1xx leads are used for the first clock distribution routes. Thus,

DIU4xx leads are used for the fourth. The first input has the highest priority.
Note 2: This connection is required for a dual-TSW system.
Figure 015-19 Cable Connection Diagram for Distributing Clock from a Digital Interface (Single IMG
Configuration)

CHAPTER 3
Page 228
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-015
Sheet 30/30
Cable Termination and Cross
Connections from MDF to Peripheral
Equipment, C. O. Lines, and Tie Lines

• Cable Connection Diagram
Perform the following wirings at the MDF. The following connection diagram shows an example where the Digital
Trunk POUT leads are used as the 1st clock distribution route.
IMG1

maximum 200 meters (660 feet) (24AWG)
MDF

LT Connector
Digital
Interface

Installation Cable

maximum 100
meters (330 feet)
(24AWG)
PLO#0
EXCLK0

Installation Cable
“EXCLK0”

#1

for PLO #0
#2

PLO#1
EXCLK1

“EXCLK1”
BASEU

RA
RB
TA
TB
POUTA
POUTB
DIU0A
DIU0B

#3
#4

DIU3A
DIU3B
DIU0A
DIU0B

#2

DIU1A
DIU1B

#3

DIU2A
DIU2B

#4

DIU3A
DIU3B

for PLO #1

PCM
Carrier
Equipment/
DSU

to other node

CLK

Note 1

DIU1A
DIU1B
DIU2A
DIU2B

Installation Cable
#1

PCM Cable (2P)

Note 2

Note 1: PLO has a maximum of four inputs. DIU1xx leads are used for the first clock distribution routes. Thus,

DIU4xx leads are used for the fourth. The first input has the highest priority.
Note 2: This connection is required for a dual-PLO system.
Figure 015-20 Cable Connection Diagram for Distributing Clock from a Digital Interface
(Multiple IMG Configuration)

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 229
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-016
Sheet 1/41
Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and
Cable Connection

This NAP explains the installation of the DESK CONSOLE and Cable Connection. Figure 016-1 shows the outer
view of the DESK CONSOLE. Use the PA-CS33 (ATI) card as an interface card between the system and the DESK
CONSOLE. The card can connect a maximum of two DESK CONSOLEs.

START
Cable running

While referring to Figure 016-2 through Figure 016-5,
run the cables between each DESK CONSOLE and its
Modular Block (Jack), and between the Modular
Blocks and the MDF.
Protect the cables by using cable ducts, etc.

Termination of cables

While referring to Figure 016-2 through Figure 016-5
terminate the installed cables to the MDF and the
Modular Blocks.

Check the terminal locations on the
Module Group side of the MDS

While referring to Port Accommodation sheet and
description of PA-CS33 card in the NEAX2400 IMX
Circuit Card Manual, identify the lead names for the
card and the terminal locations of the leads.

Cross Connection

While referring to Figure 016-2 and Figure 016-5,
provide the necessary cross connection at the DESK
CONSOLE side and the PBX side.

Mounting of Headset (Optional)

While referring to Figure 016-6, mount optional
Headset on DESK CONSOLE.

Mounting of Handset (Optional)

While referring to Figure 016-7 or Figure 016-8,
mount optional Handset on DESK CONSOLE.

A

Figure 016-1 Outer View of Desk Console
CHAPTER 3
Page 230
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-016
Sheet 2/41
Installation of the Desk Console and
Cable Connection

To connect DESK CONSOLE(s), the PA-CS33 card is used as the interface card. The card may be mounted
in slot No. 12 or in slot No. 23. The leads appear on LT5 and LT11 respectively. However, when replacing
Attendant Console with DESK CONSOLE, the leads appear on the LT connector on the ATT TERM (See
Note on the next page).
Front View

• PA-CS33 (ATI) mounting slots

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PIM
LT5

PA-CS33(ATI)

MUX
MUX
PA-CS33(ATI)

PA-CS33 (ATI) card may be mounted in
slots 12 and/or 23.

LT11

Universal Slots

Universal Slots

Backplane

• LT cable connectors
Use LT5 connector when the PA-CS33
card is mounted in slot 12. When the card
is mounted in slot 23, use LT11 connector.

PIM

LT5

LT11

PA-CS33 Pin Assignment

• LT cable Pin Assignment

PIN
No.

Pins are assigned as follows for PA-CS33 card.

26
27

for ADD-ON CONSOLE #0
for DESK CONSOLE #0

for ADD-ON CONSOLE #1
for DESK CONSOLE #1
for ADD-ON CONSOLE #0
for DESK CONSOLE #0
for ADD-ON CONSOLE #1
for DESK CONSOLE #1

33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

LEAD
NAME

PIN
No.

LEAD
NAME

1
2

BN4800
BN4820
TAS1B
BN4810
TAS0B
BN4830
B0
B2
B1
B3

8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

BN4801
BN4821

LT Connector

TAS1A
BN4811
TAS0A
BN4831
A0
A2
A1
A3

Figure 016-2 Cable Connection Diagram for Desk Console (1 of 2)
NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 231
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-016
Sheet 3/41
Installation of the Desk Console and
Cable Connection

• Cable Connection Diagram
Provide the following wirings at the MDF and IDF.

PBX
MDF

IDF
Modular Block

LT Connector Cable
A2

A2

B2

LT connector

B2
BN4820(-48V)

BN4820(-48V)
BN4821(-48V)

BN4821(-48V)

To Desk Console #0

GND

ATI
(PA-CS33)

GND

Modular Block
A3

A3

B3

B3

BN4830(-48V)

BN4830(-48V)

BN4831(-48V)

BN4831(-48V)

RPT Terminal
(PZ-M377)

To Desk Console #1

GND
GND

BASEU

PZ-M377
GND
0

1

1 2 3 4

-48V

2

5

3

TPWR
FALM

4

1

2

3

PBX

4 5

GND
RPT
terminal

BASEU

FRONT VIEW

Figure 016-2 Cable Connection Diagram for Desk Console (2 of 2)

CHAPTER 3
Page 232
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-016
Sheet 4/41
Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and
Cable Connection

Note:

When replacing Attendant Console with DESK CONSOLE, follow the procedure below:
1

Turn OFF the PWR card in the PIM.

2

Remove installation cables connected to ATT0, ATT1 and LT connectors on the ATT TERM.

3

Remove installation cables connected to the following connectors:
•
•

RLT connector on the ATT TERM
ATI0 and LT5, ATI1 and LT11 connectors on the PIM

4

Install DESK CONSOLE using the LT connector on the ATT TERM.

5

Turn ON the PWR card in the PIM.

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 233
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-016
Sheet 5/41
Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and
Cable Connection

1. CABLE CONNECTION DIAGRAM

(a) When the power is supplied from the PBX

M
a

PBX

b

c
6-core Modular
Rosette

Installation Cable
MDF

ATI

IDF

A2

A

B2

B

BN4820 (–48V)

BN4820

BN4821 (–48V)

BN4821

DESK CONSOLE

6-core Modular Cable

GND
GND

6-core Modular
Rosette
A3

A

B3

B

BN4830

BN4830

BN4831

BN4831

DESK CONSOLE

6-core Modular Cable

GND
GND
RPT1

Figure 016-3 Cable Connection Diagram (When the Power Is Supplied from the PBX)

The maximum distance between the ATI circuit card and DESK CONSOLE is as shown below.
Source

0.5 φ Cable

0.65 φ Cable

PBX

350 m (1,148 ft.)

500 m (1,640 ft.)

When exceeding the distance above, calculate the distance referring to the next page.
CHAPTER 3
Page 234
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-016
Sheet 6/41
Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and
Cable Connection

2. CALCULATION OF THE DISTANCE BETWEEN THE ATI CIRCUIT CARD AND MODULAR ROSETTE

The distance M in Figure 016-3 is determined by the Direct-Current resistance of power supply cables (–48V and
GND). Note that the maximum resistance is 26 Ω as shown in the following formula:
M = a + b + c ≤ 26 Ω
M: Maximum Direct–Current resistance between the ATI circuit card and Modular Rosette
a: Direct-Current resistance of power supply cables (–48V and GND) in the range of A
b: Direct-Current resistance of power supply cables (–48V and GND) in the range of B
c: Direct-Current resistance of power supply cables (–48V and GND) in the range of C
Example of Calculation
a, b, and c are calculated by the following formula:
Note:

You are not required to use cable lengths in meters in the following formulae. You may use cable lengths in
feet, yards, or whatever unit you prefer. However, the units of resistance you use must match the units of
length you use. For example, if you use distance in feet, you must also use DC resistance per foot.
Resistance of –48V cables
a=

u (Ω/m) × x (m)
2

+

Resistance of GND cables

u (Ω/m) × x (m)
1

Number of –48V cables

Number of GND cable

Resistance of –48V cables
b=

v (Ω/m) × y (m)
2

+

Resistance of GND cables

v (Ω/m) × y (m)
2

Number of –48V cables

Number of GND cables

Resistance of –48V cables
c=

w (Ω/m) × z (m)
2

+

w (Ω/m) × z (m)
2

Number of –48V cables

u:
v:
w:
x:
y:
z:

Resistance of GND cables

Number of GND cables

Direct-Current resistance per meter in the range of A (Ω/m)
Direct-Current resistance per meter in the range of B (Ω/m)
Direct-Current resistance per meter in the range of C (Ω/m)
Cable length (m) in the range of A
Cable length (m) in the range of B
Cable length (m) in the range of C
NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 235
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-016
Sheet 7/41
Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and
Cable Connection

(b) When using Local Power Supply Note
Note:

When using local power supply, DESK CONSOLE cannot be used in case of power failure.

PBX
Installation Cable
A2

ATI

MDF

Installation
Cable

IDF

B2

Installation Cable

DESK CONSOLE

A
B

6-core Modular
Rosette

6-core Modular
Cable
DESK CONSOLE

A3

A

B3

B

Figure 016-4 Cable Connection Diagram (When Using Local Power Supply)

The maximum distance between the ATI circuit card and DESK CONSOLE is as shown below.
Source

0.5 φ Cable

0.65 φ Cable

Local Power Supply

1,200 m (3,937 ft.)

1,500 m (4,921 ft.)

CHAPTER 3
Page 236
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-016
Sheet 8/41
Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and
Cable Connection

Wire the cables to the Modular Block as shown below.
Bottom View

6-core Modular Cable

6-core Modular Block

IDF/MDF

PAGE
LINE
(8-core) REC (6-core)
(8-core)

Modular Jack

DESK CONSOLE
Viewed from direction
to be inserted
1 2 3 4 5 6

DESK CONSOLE
Desk Console
Modular Jack
Transformer

Surge
Protection

DC/DC
Convertor

GND
–48V/–24V

6-core Modular Block
6-core Modular Cable
GND

GND

BN48×0 (–48V)

BN48×0(–48V)

Ax Note

Ax Note

Bx Note

Bx Note

GND

IDF/MDF

GND

BN48×1(–48V)

BN48×1(–48V)

Note:

x represents 2 or 3.

Figure 016-5 Cable Connection Diagram for DESK CONSOLE Modular Block

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 237
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-016
Sheet 9/41
Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and
Cable Connection

3. MOUNTING OF HEADSET (OPTIONAL)

The Headset cable is connected to one of the modular jacks (HAND H/S 0 or H/S 1) on the bottom of DESK
CONSOLE.
Head Band

Slide
Slide

Capsule Unit
(Microphone and
Speaker)
Ear Pad

Slide

Closing
Clip

Voice Tube

Quick Disconnect

Modular Plug Note
PIN1

PIN1 TX (+)
2 RX
3 RX
4 TX (–)

HAND
H/S0
H/S1

Note:

In daily use, use Quick Disconnect when connecting/disconnecting the Headset.
Figure 016-6 Headset

CHAPTER 3
Page 238
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-016
Sheet 10/41
Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and
Cable Connection

4. MOUNTING OF HANDSET (OPTIONAL)

The Handset cable is connected to the modular jack (HAND H/S 0) on the bottom of DESK CONSOLE.
(a) When mounting at the left side of DESK CONSOLE (Standard)

Alarm Postion Availtable

Postion Busy

Nighty

LDN

TIE

Busy

ATND

ANANS

Recall

PAGE

REC

EMG

BV

TRKSL

Call Park

SC

SVC

Start

Mute

Night

Cancel

L6
1

2
ABC

3
DEF

4
GHI

5
JKL

6
MNO

L3

7
PQRS

8
TUV

9
WXYZ

DEST

SRC

L5

L4

Postion Busy

Talk

Release

Hold

Answer

L2
*

0

#

L1

6.

Put the Handset code through the hole as shown below.
Handset code

(DESK CONSOLE side)

(Handset side)

Hole
Side View

Figure 016-7 Mounting of Handset (Left Side of DESK CONSOLE)

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 239
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-016
Sheet 11/41
Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and
Cable Connection

Bottom View

Top View

7.

Connect the Handset code to HAND H/S0 connector as shown below (H/S1 is not used for the Handset).

HAND
H/S0
Handset code

H/S1

Bottom View of DESK CONSOLE

Figure 016-7 Mounting of Handset (Left Side of DESK CONSOLE) (Continued)

CHAPTER 3
Page 240
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-016
Sheet 12/41
Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and
Cable Connection

Mount the Handset Support to DESK CONSOLE with 3 screws as shown below.

projection

projection

Handset Support

Figure 016-7 Mounting of Handset (Left Side of DESK CONSOLE) (Continued)

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 241
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-016
Sheet 13/41
Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and
Cable Connection

(b) When mounting at the right side of DESK CONSOLE
1.

Remove the metal plate from the Handset, turn it over, and mount it to the Handset again.
Refer to the figure below.
Turn over the metal plate.

When mounting at the right side

Screw (1)

When mounting at the left side

Screw (2)

Screw (5)

Handset

Handset
Screw (4)

Screw (3)

Screw (3)

Screw (4)

Metal Plate

Screw (2)

Screw (5)

Screw (1)

Metal Plate

DESK CONSOLE

2.

Put the Handset code through the hole as shown below.
Handset code

(DESK CONSOLE side)

(Handset side)

Hole

Side View

Figure 016-8 Mounting of Handset (Right Side of DESK CONSOLE)

CHAPTER 3
Page 242
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-016
Sheet 14/41
Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and
Cable Connection

Bottom view

3.

Top View

Connect the Handset code to HAND H/S0 connector as shown below (H/S1 is not used for the Handset).

Code

HAND
H/S0
H/S1

Bottom View of DESK CONSOLE

Figure 016-8 Mounting of Handset (Right Side of DESK CONSOLE) (Continued)

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 243
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-016
Sheet 15/41
Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and
Cable Connection

Mount the Handset Support to DESK CONSOLE with 3 screws as shown below.

projection

Handset Support

projection

Figure 016-8 Mounting of Handset (Right Side of DESK CONSOLE) (Continued)

CHAPTER 3
Page 244
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-016
Sheet 16/41
Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and
Cable Connection

5. CONNECTION OF RECORDING EQUIPMENT

The following are required for using recording function:
• The RECC circuit card
• Recording Equipment
• 8-core Line Cable
• Rosette
An RECC card (PA-M87) connects DESK CONSOLEs and recording equipment in the following combinations:
• Six DESK CONSOLEs and one recording equipment × 1 set
• Three DESK CONSOLEs and one recording equipment × 2 set
DESK CONSOLE

8-core Line Cable

MDF
Installation Cable

PIM

50FLT-CHAMP
CABLE

RECC
card

Rosette
8-pin Modular Connector Recording
Equipment

Front
MDF

Rosette
8-core Line Cable

Recording
Equipment

8-pin Modular Connector

PIM

A
B

A0
B0

LA
LB

M0A
M0B

KA

K0A

KB

K0B

R
E
C
C
Circuit Card Front Connector

L0A

Note 1 Telephone
side leads
Note 1 C.O. line
side leads

L0B
T0A
T0B
ZA

Note 3
PIM
L0A Note 2
ZB

REC

L0B
T0A

R
E
C
C

T0B
ZA
ZB

Bottom View of DESK CONSOLE

Note 1: Recording equipment is positioned between the C.O. line and telephones.
Note 2: One recording equipment can be shared with multiple RECC cards.
Note 3: When sharing one recording equipment with multiple RECC cards, multiple connection of ZA and

ZB terminals is required.
Figure 016-9 RECC Card Cable Connection Diagram

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 245
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-016
Sheet 17/41
Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and
Cable Connection

(a) When using three DESK CONSOLEs and one recorder

Note 1

Note 1: Switch settings of SW10, SW12 and SW13 on the PA-M87 card are required. For switch setting and connec-

tor lead accommodation, refer to the NEAX2400 IMX Circuit Card Manual.
PIM
MDF

DESK CONSOLE
Note 2

A

A0

B

B0

LA

M0A

LB

M0B

KA

K0A

KB

K0B

Note 2

RECC
card

Circuit 0
Note 3
Front Connector

Circuit 1
Circuit 2

Recording
Equipment

L0A
C.O. line side
leads Note 4
Telephone side
leads Note 4

L0B
T0A
T0B

Circuit 3
Circuit 4
Circuit 5

Recording
Equipment

L1A
C.O. line side
leads Note 4
Telephone side
leads Note 4

L1B
T1A
T1B

Note 2: Refer to Figure 016-9“RECC Card Cable Connection Diagram” for cable connection.
Note 3: Connections of Circuit 1 through 5 are the same as those of Circuit 0.
Note 4: Recording equipment is positioned between the C.O. line and telephones.
Figure 016-10 Three DESK CONSOLEs and One Recording Equipment

CHAPTER 3
Page 246
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-016
Sheet 18/41
Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and
Cable Connection

(b) When using six DESK CONSOLEs and one recording equipment

Note 1

Note 1: Switch settings of SW10, SW12 and SW13 on the PA-M87 card are required. For switch setting and connec-

tor lead accommodation, refer to the NEAX2400 IMX Circuit Card Manual.

PIM
MDF

DESK CONSOLE
Note 2

A

A0

B

B0

LA

M0A

LB

M0B

KA

K0A

KB

K0B

Note 2

RECC
card

Circuit 0
Note 3
Front Connector

Circuit 1
Circuit 2
Circuit 3
Circuit 4
Circuit 5

Recording
Equipment

L0A
C.O. line side
leads Note 4

L0B
T0A

Telephone side
leads Note 4

T0B

Note 2: Refer to Figure 016-9 “RECC Card Cable Connection Diagram” for cable connection.
Note 3: Connections of Circuit 1 through 5 are the same as those of Circuit 0.
Note 4: Recording equipment is positioned between the C.O. line and telephones.

Figure 016-11 Six DESK CONSOLEs and One Recording Equipment

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 247
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-016
Sheet 19/41
Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and
Cable Connection

6. 8-CORE LINE CABLE (INSTALLATION CABLE)

Note 1

8-pin Modular Connector
8-pin Modular Connector

(Rosette side)

(DESK CONSOLE side)
8-core Line Cable (Installation Cable)

Pin No.

12345678

Pin No.

LEAD NAME

1

A

Speech

MEANING

2

B

Speech

3

–

Not used

4

–

Not used

5

KA

Recording Start Signal (Relay Contact)

6

KB

Recording Start Signal (Relay Contact)

7

LA (Note 2)

Recording Lamp Signal (+)

8

LB (Note 2)

Recording Lamp Signal (–)

Note 1: Cut the cable in proper length. Attach the modular connector to both sides of the 8-core line ca-

ble using installation tool.
Note 2: Be sure to check the polarity of pin numbers 7 (LA) (+) and 8 (LB) (–).
Figure 016-12 8-core Line Cable

CHAPTER 3
Page 248
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-016
Sheet 20/41
Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and
Cable Connection

7. CONNECTION OF AC-DC ADAPTER (OPTIONAL)

The AC-DC adapter is required when the power supply from the distant PBX is not available.
The connector for the AC-DC adapter is on the rear side of DESK CONSOLE.

AC-DC Adapter (

)

Figure 016-13 Connection of AC-DC Adapter

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 249
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-016
Sheet 21/41
Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and
Cable Connection

8. MOUNTING OF ADD-ON CONSOLE (FOR HOTEL SYSTEM)

ADD-ON CONSOLE is used in the Hotel System.
1.

Cable Connection Diagram
(a) Cable Connection Diagram of Add-On Console (When the power is supplied from the PBX)

M
PBX

a

b

c
6-core Modular
Rosette

Installation Cable
ATI

MDF

IDF

A0

A0

B0

B0

BN4800 (–48V)

BN4800

BN4801 (–48V)

BN4801

ADD-ON CONSOLE

6-core Modular Cable

GND
GND

6-core Modular
Rosette
A1

ADD-ON CONSOLE

A1

B1

B1

BN4810

BN4810

BN4811

BN4811

6-core Modular Cable

GND
GND
RPT1

Figure 016-14 Add-On Console Cable Connection Diagram (When the Power Is Supplied from the PBX)

CHAPTER 3
Page 250
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-016
Sheet 22/41
Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and
Cable Connection

(b) Cable Connection Diagram of Add-On Console (When using Local Power Supply) Note
Note:

When using local power supply, DESK CONSOLE cannot be used in case of power failure.

PBX
Installation Cable
ATI

A0

MDF

Installation
Cable

IDF

B0

Installation Cable

ADD-ON CONSOLE

A
B

6-core Modular
Rosette

6-core Modular
Cable
ADD-ON CONSOLE

A1

A

B1

B

Figure 016-15 Add-On Console Cable Connection Diagram (When Using Local Power Supply)

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 251
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-016
Sheet 23/41
Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and
Cable Connection

Wire the cables to the Modular Block as shown below.
Bottom View

6-core Modular Cable

6-core Modular Block

IDF/MDF

LINE
(6-core)

Modular Jack

ADD-ON CONSOLE
Viewed from direction
to be inserted
1 2 3 4 5 6

ADD-ON CONSOLE
Add-On Console
Modular Jack
Transformer

Surge
Protection

DC/DC
Convertor

GND
–48V/–24V

6-core Modular Block
6-core Modular Cable
GND

GND
BN48×0(–48V)

BN48×0(–48V)
Ax Note

Ax Note

Bx Note

Bx Note

GND

GND

BN48×1(–48V)

BN48×1(–48V)

Note:

x represents 0 or 1.

Figure 016-16 Cable Connection Diagram for Add-On Console Modular Block

CHAPTER 3
Page 252
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

IDF/MDF

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-016
Sheet 24/41
Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and
Cable Connection

9. MOUNTING OF ADD-ON CONSOLE

(a) When mounting at the right side of DESK CONSOLE

Alarm

Position Available

LDN

TIE

Busy

AD M

NANS

Recall

HW C

HP

DD

GST

LT

ICPT

Position Busy

Night

PAGE

REC

Start

M ute

T R K SL

SVC

SC

DDC

HWS

BV

Night
TF

Position Busy

WUS

DDS

RCS

MWS

WUR

DDR

RCR

MWR

TG1

TG 6

TG 2

TG 7

TG 3

TG 8

TG 4

TG 9

TG 5

TG 1 0

STS

M R C LR

Cancel

L 6
1

2
AB C

3
DE F

4
G HI

5
JK L

6
MNO

E nte r

7
P Q RS

8
TU V

9
W X YZ

C lea r

L 5

SRC

D EST
Talk

L 4
L 3

Release

H old

Answer

L 2
0

Ex it

#

L 1

TRKSL

SVC

SC

DDC

HWS

BV

W US

DDS

RCS

MW S

W UR

DDR

RCR

MWR

TG1

TG6

TG2

TG7

TG3

TG8

TG4

TG9

TG5

TG10

STS

MR CLR

Enter

Clear

Exit

Bottom View

Top V iew

Figure 016-17 Mounting of Add-On Console (Right Side of DESK CONSOLE)
NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 253
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-016
Sheet 25/41
Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and
Cable Connection

Mount the ADD-ON CONSOLE to DESK CONSOLE with 3 screws as shown below.

Projection

Projection

ADD-ON CONSOLE

DESK CONSOLE

Figure 016-17 Mounting of Add-On Console (Right Side of DESK CONSOLE) (Continued)

CHAPTER 3
Page 254
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-016
Sheet 26/41
Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and
Cable Connection

(b) When mounting at the left side of DESK CONSOLE

T RK S L

SVC

SC

DD C

HW S

BV

WUS

DD S

R CS

MWS

W UR

DD R

RCR

MWR

TG 1

TG 6

TG2

TG 7

M R CLR

Position
Alarm Ava ila ble

STS

Position
Busy Night

LDN

TIE

Busy

ADM

NANS

Recall

HW C

HP

DD

GST

LT

ICPT

TF

C lear

E x it

REC

Start

Mute

Night

Position
Busy

Cancel

L 6
1

L 5

E nter

PAGE

2

ABC

3

DEF

SRC

DEST
Talk

4

5

6

TG3

TG 8

L 4

GHI

JKL

TG4

TG 9

L 3

7
PQ RS

TUV

W X YZ

0

#

8

MNO
9
Release

Hold

Answer

L 2

TG5

TG 10
L 1

1. Remove the metal plate from the ADD-ON CONSOLE, turn it over, and mount it
to the ADD-ON CONSOLE again. Refer to the figure below.
Turn over the metal plate.
When mounting at the right side
Screw(2)

Screw(1)
Screw(3)

When mounting at the left side

Screw(4)

Screw(6)

Screw(5)

Screw(6)

Screw(5)

Screw(3)

Screw(1)

Screw(2)
Screw(4)

Metal Plate

Metal Plate

ADD-ON CONSOLE

ADD-ON CONSOLE

Figure 016-18 Mounting of Add-On Console (Left Side of DESK CONSOLE)

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 255
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-016
Sheet 27/41
Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and
Cable Connection

TRKSL

SVC

SC

DDC

HWS

BV

WUS

DDS

RCS

MWS

WUR

DDR

RCR

MWR

TG1

TG6

TG2

TG7

TG3

TG8

TG4

TG9

TG5

TG10

STS

MR CLR

Enter

Clear

Exit

Top View

Bottom View

2. Mount the ADD-ON CONSOLE to DESK CONSOLE with 3 screws as shown below.

Projection

Projection

DESK CONSOLE
ADD-ON CONSOLE

Figure 016-18 Mounting of Add-On Console (Left Side of DESK CONSOLE) (Continued)

CHAPTER 3
Page 256
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-016
Sheet 28/41
Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and
Cable Connection

10. CONNECTION OF AC-DC ADAPTER FOR ADD-ON CONSOLE (OPTIONAL)

The AC-DC adapter is required when the power supply from the distant PBX is not available.
The connector for the AC-DC adapter is on the rear side of ADD-ON CONSOLE.

AC-DC Adapter (

)

Connector for AC-DC Adapter

Figure 016-19 Connection of AC-DC Adapter for Add-On Console

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 257
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-016
Sheet 29/41
Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and
Cable Connection

11. CONFIGURATION MENU
11.1. General

Configuration Menu is used for assigning configuration data for DESK CONSOLE. The menu has the following items:
1.

HEADSET/HANDSET

2.

HEADSET TYPE

3.

MUTE

4.

REC CONTROL

5.

PAGE CONTROL

6.

SUP CONNECTION

7.

REC VOLUME

8.

BLF

9.

HOLD/START/RELEASE/SWAP

11.2. Selection of Configuration Item

1.

Displaying Configuration Menu

CHAPTER 3
Page 258
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

(a) While pressing the L3 and L6 keys simultaneously, turn on the power.

Position
Busy

Night

NANS

Recall

PAGE

REC

SC

SVC

Start

Mute

Position
Alarm Available

[L6 key]

LDN

TIE

EMG

BV

Busy

ATND

TRKSL Call Park

Night

Position Busy

Cancel

L6
1

2
ABC

3
DEF

4
GHI

5
JKL

6
MNO

7
PQRS

8
TUV

9
WXYZ

*

0

#

L5

SRC

DEST
Talk

L4

[L3 key]

L3

Release

Hold

Answer

L2
L1

Figure 016-20 Displaying the Configuration Menu

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 259
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-016
Sheet 30/41
Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and
Cable Connection

The first page of Configuration Menu appears on the LCD. Configuration Menu has a total of three pages.
•

•

Note:

•

1st Page
[CONFIG MENU P1] VER x
1: HEADSET/HANDSET
2: HEADSET TYPE
3: MUTE

DEST: next page
Release: exit
Answer: update

[CONFIG MENU P2] VER x
1: REC CONTROL
2: PAGE CONTROL Note
3: SUP CONNECTION

SRC: prev page
DEST: next page
Release: exit
Answer: update

2nd Page

Do not change this data.
3rd Page
[CONFIG MENU P3] VER x
SRC: prev page
1: REC VOLUME
Release: exit
2: BLF
Answer: update
3: HOLD/START/RELEASE/SWAP
(b) When the DEST key is pressed, the display changes to the next page. When returning to the previous
page, press the SRC key.
(c) When the Release key is pressed, Configuration Menu disappears and the DESK CONSOLE returns
to normal operation.

CHAPTER 3
Page 260
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-016
Sheet 31/41
Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and
Cable Connection

12. SELECTION OF CONFIGURATION ITEM

Using a numeric key, press the desired number in Configuration Menu. A menu for assigning configuration
data appears. Assign configuration data referring to “Assignment of Configuration Data” on the next page.

Position
Alarm Available
LDN

TIE

EMG

BV

Position
Night
Busy
Busy

ATND

NANS

Recall

PAGE

REC

SVC

Start

Mute

TRKSL Call Park SC

Night

Position Busy

[SRC key]
Cancel

L6
1

2
ABC

3
DEF

4
GHI

5
JKL

6
MNO

7
PQRS

TUV

8

9
WXYZ

*

0

#

L5
L4
L3

SRC

DEST
Talk

Release

Hold

[DEST key]

Answer

[Answer key]

L2
L1

[Numeric keys]

[Release key]

Figure 016-21 Selecting a Configuration Item

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 261
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-016
Sheet 32/41
Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and
Cable Connection

13. ASSIGNMENT OF CONFIGURATION DATA

This section explains how to assign each configuration data. When assigning configuration data, the following shaded keys are used.

Position
Alarm Available
LDN

TIE

EMG

BV

Busy

ATND

TRKSL Call Park

Position
Busy

Night

NANS

Recall

PAGE

REC

SC

SVC

Start

Mute

Night

Position Busy

[SRC key]
Cancel

L6
3

1

2
ABC

DEF

L4

4
GHI

5
JKL

6
MNO

L3

7
PQRS

8
TUV

9
WXYZ

*

0

#

L5

DEST

SRC
Talk

Release

Hold

Answer

L2
L1

[Numeric keys (1-4)]

Figure 016-22 Assigning Configuration Data

CHAPTER 3
Page 262
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-016
Sheet 33/41
Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and
Cable Connection

14. HEADSET/HANDSET

This item specifies an optional device connected to the HAND H/S0 connector.
Note:

With regard to the H/S1 connector, only the Headset is connected. Accordingly, data assignment for H/S1
connector is not required.
(d) Press the desired number. An asterisk shows the selected number.
[HEADSET/HANDSET]
*1: HEADSET
2: HANDSET

1.

Headset is connected to the HAND H/S0 connector

2.

Handset is connected to the HAND H/S0 connector

SRC: menu

SRC: Return to Configuration Menu
Note:

Default setting is “1: HEADSET”.
(b) Press the SRC key. The display returns to Configuration Menu.
[CONFIG MENU P1] VER x
1: HEADSET/HANDSET
2: HEADSET TYPE
3: MUTE

DEST: next page
Release: exit
Answer: update

(c) When configuration data assignment is finished, proceed to UPDATING CONFIGURATION DATA.
When the other item is also specified, return to SELECTION OF CONFIGURATION ITEM.

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 263
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-016
Sheet 34/41
Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and
Cable Connection

15. HEADSET TYPE

This item specifies the type of Headset connected to the H/S1 connector.
(d) Press the desired number. An asterisk shows the selected number.
[HEADSET TYPE]
*1: SUPRA
2: COROLLE

1.

The type of Headset is “SUPRA”

2.

The type of Headset is “COROLLE”

SRC: menu

SRC: Return to Configuration Menu
Note:

Default setting is “1: SUPRA”.
(b) Press the SRC key. The display returns to Configuration Menu.
[CONFIG MENU P1] VER x
1: HEADSET/HANDSET
2: HEADSET TYPE
3: MUTE

DEST: next page
Release: exit
Answer: update

(c) When configuration data assignment is finished, proceed to UPDATING CONFIGURATION DATA.
When the other item is also specified, return to SELECTION OF CONFIGURATION ITEM.

CHAPTER 3
Page 264
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-016
Sheet 35/41
Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and
Cable Connection

16. MUTE

This item specifies On/Off setting of the mute function for the HAND H/S0 or H/S1 connector. While the
mute function is set to On, if the Mute key is pressed, the voice at the DESK CONSOLE side is not sent to
the other party.
(a) Press the desired number. An asterisk shows the selected number.
[MUTE]
*1: H/S0 ON, H/S1 ON
2 : H/S0 ON, H/S1 OFF
3 : H/S0 OFF, H/S1 ON
1.

Both H/S0 and H/S1 are set to On

2.

Only H/S0 is set to On

3.

Only H/S1 is set to Off
SRC:

Note:

SRC: menu

Return to Configuration Menu

Default setting is “1: H/S0 ON, H/S1 ON”.
(b) Press the SRC key. The display returns to Configuration Menu.
[CONFIG MENU P1] VER x
1: HEADSET/HANDSET
2: HEADSET TYPE
3: MUTE

DEST: next page
Release: exit
Answer: update

(c) When configuration data assignment is finished, proceed to UPDATING CONFIGURATION DATA.
When the other item is also specified, return to ASSIGNMENT OF CONFIGURATION DATA.

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 265
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-016
Sheet 36/41
Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and
Cable Connection

17. REC CONTROL

This item specifies the operation mode of a recording device. The following two types of modes are available:
Manual mode
Manual mode is available when the REC circuit card is mounted in the system. When the REC key is
pressed, the system starts recording and the REC lamp lights. When the REC key is pressed again, the recording stops and the REC lamp goes off.
Automatic mode
In Automatic mode, a dedicated recording device is directly connected to the REC connector. When a call
is connected/disconnected, the system starts/ends recording automatically. Note that the REC key is not effective in Automatic mode.
(a) Press the desired number. An asterisk shows the selected number.
[REC CONTROL]
*1: MANUAL
2 : AUTO

1.

Manual mode

2.

Automatic mode

SRC: menu

SRC: Return to Configuration Menu
Note:

Default setting is “1: MANUAL”.
(b) Press the SRC key. The display returns to Configuration Menu.
[CONFIG MENU P2] VER x
1: REC CONTROL
2: PAGE CONTROL Note
3: SUP CONNECTION

Note:

DEST: next page
Release: exit
Answer: update

Do not change this data.
(c) When configuration data assignment is finished, proceed to UPDATING CONFIGURATION DATA.
When the other item is also specified, return to SELECTION OF CONFIGURATION ITEM.

CHAPTER 3
Page 266
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-016
Sheet 37/41
Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and
Cable Connection

18. SUP CONNECTION

This item specifies whether the supervisory console is connected or not.
(a) Press the desired number. An asterisk shows the selected number.
[SUP CONNECTION]
*1: NONE
2 : CONNECTED

1.

Supervisory Console is connected

2.

Supervisory Console is not connected

SRC: menu

SRC: Return to Configuration Menu
Note:

Default setting is “1: NONE”.
(b) Press the SRC key. The display returns to Configuration Menu.
[CONFIG MENU P2] VER x
1: REC CONTROL
2: PAGE CONTROL Note
3: SUP CONNECTION

Note:

SRC: prev page
DEST: next page
Release: exit
Answer: update

Do not change this data.
(c) When configuration data assignment is finished, proceed to UPDATING CONFIGURATION DATA.
When the other item is also specified, return to SELECTION OF CONFIGURATION ITEM.

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 267
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-016
Sheet 38/41
Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and
Cable Connection

19. REC VOLUME ADJUSTMENT

This item specifies the recording level of the received voice from the other party. Note that the voice level at the
operator side cannot be adjusted.
(a) Press the desired number. An asterisk shows the selected number.
[REC VOLUME ADJUSTMENT]
1: +2dB
4: -8dB
*2: 0dB
3: -4dB
1.

+2dB Up

2.

0dB (Standard level)

3.

-4dB Down

4.

-8dB Down

SRC: menu

SRC: Return to Configuration Menu
Note:

Default setting is “2: 0dB”.
(b) Press the SRC key. The display returns to Configuration Menu.
[CONFIG MENU P3] VER x
SRC: prev page
1: REC VOLUME
Release: exit
2: BLF
Answer: update
3: HOLD/START/RELEASE/SWAP
(c) When configuration data assignment is finished, proceed to UPDATING CONFIGURATION DATA.
When the other item is also specified, return to SELECTION OF CONFIGURATION ITEM.

CHAPTER 3
Page 268
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-016
Sheet 39/41
Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and
Cable Connection

20. BLF

This item specifies On/Off setting of the BLF function. When using BLF function, system data assignment is
also required.
(a) Press the desired number. An asterisk shows the selected number.
[BLF]
1: ENABLE
*2: DISABLE

1.

BLF Available

2.

BLF Not available

SRC: menu

SRC: Return to Configuration Menu
Note:

Default setting is “2: DISABLE”.
(b) Press the SRC key. The display returns to Configuration Menu.
[CONFIG MENU P3] VER x
DEST: next page
1: REC VOLUME
Release: exit
2: BLF
Answer: update
3: HOLD/START/RELEASE/SWAP
(c) When configuration data assignment is finished, proceed to UPDATING CONFIGURATION DATA.
When the other item is also specified, return to SELECTION OF CONFIGURATION ITEM.

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 269
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-016
Sheet 40/41
Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and
Cable Connection

21. HOLD/START/RELEASE/SWAP

This item specifies the locations of HOLD, START and RELEASE key.
(a) Press the desired number. An asterisk shows the selected number.
[HOLD/START/RELEASE/SWAP]
*1: ORIGINAL
2: SWAPPED

1.

Original setting

2.

Swapped setting

Note:

SRC: menu

The locations of each key changes as shown below.
ORIGINAL SETTING

SWAPPED SETTING

RELEASE
HOLD
START

START
RELEASE
HOLD

SRC: Return to Configuration Menu
Note:

Default setting is “1: ORIGINAL”.
(b) Press the SRC key. The display returns to Configuration Menu.
[CONFIG MENU P3] VER x
DEST: next page
1: REC VOLUME
Release: exit
2: BLF
Answer: update
3: HOLD/START/RELEASE/SWAP
(c) When configuration data assignment is finished, proceed to UPDATING CONFIGURATION DATA.
When the other item is also specified, return to SELECTION OF CONFIGURATION ITEM.

CHAPTER 3
Page 270
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-016
Sheet 41/41
Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and
Cable Connection

22. UPDATING CONFIGURATION DATA

When configuration data assignment is complete, update configuration data according to the procedure below.
When the RELEASE key is pressed, update is cancelled.
While one of the Configuration Menu is displayed on the LCD, press the ANSWER key.
Configuration data is updated and the DESK CONSOLE is automatically restarted.

Position
Alarm Available
LDN

TIE

EMG

BV

Busy

ATND

TRKSL Call Park

Position
Busy

Night

NANS

Recall

PAGE

REC

SC

SVC

Start

Mute Position Busy

Cancel

L6
1

2
ABC

3
DEF

4
GHI

5
JKL

6
MNO

7
PQRS

8
TUV

9
WXYZ

*

0

#

L5
L4
L3

Night

SRC

DEST
Talk

L2

Release

Hold

Answer

[Answer key] (Update)

L1

[Release key] (Cancel)

Figure 016-23 Updating Configuration Data

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 271
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-017
Sheet 1/9
Installation of Maintenance
Administration Terminal (MAT) and Cable
Connections

This NAP explains the installation of the Maintenance Administration Terminal (MAT) and the System Message
Printer focusing on their cable connections.
1. INSTALLATION OF MAT AND CABLE CONNECTIONS

START
Preparation of the MAT

Set up the Personal Computer, CRT Display, Printer,
and so on.

Cable Connection

Connect the cables between the MAT and the PBX
referring to Figure 017-2.

END

CHAPTER 3
Page 272
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-017
Sheet 2/9
Installation of the Maintenance
Administration Terminal (MAT) and Cable
Connections

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

00 01 02 03 04
PH-IO24 (IOC)

BASEU

PH-PC40 (EMA)

LPR

LANI(PZ-PC19)

10BASET (straight)

MAT

HUB

10BASET (straight)

Figure 017-1 Cabling of MAT when Using Ethernet

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 273
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-017
Sheet 3/9
Installation of the Maintenance
Administration Terminal (MAT) and Cable
Connections


• To connect the PBX and the MAT, the following three
kinds of cables are required. The “RS-232C Cable should
be provided by the customer.

PBX

RS-232C Cable
(customer provided)

MAT

To MISC Connector

SERIAL PORT #0
TYP0

RS-232C CA-(1)

SERIAL PORT #1

TYP1


• The location of the MISC connector to which the “68PH S 2PORTS CA-A” cable
is connected varies depending on the mounting location of the IOC(PH-IO24)
card and the IOC port number (#0 ~ #3). See the table below.
Slot No.

Port No.
IOC Port #0
IOC Port #1
IOC Port #2
IOC Port #3
IOC Port #0
IOC Port #1
IOC Port #2
IOC Port #3

02

03

port #1

MISC 3B
MISC 3B / 4B Connector

MISC 3A

LPM

MISC 4A

TYP0

TYP1

TY0

MISIC 3A / 4A Connector

MISC3B

MISC4A

MISC3A

— Legend —
LPM

: Champ Connector (Male)
: Champ Connector (Female)
: 25-Pin Cannon Connector (Male)
: 25-Pin Cannon Connector (Female)
: 68-Pin Connector (Female)

REAR VIEW

Figure 017-2 Cable Connection Diagram for the MAT

CHAPTER 3
Page 274
Revision 3.0

port #2

TYP1

SIDE VIEW

BASEU
FRONT VIEW

port #0
port #3

MISC 4B

MISC4B

IOC #1

IOC #0

LPR

(2 m / 6 feet)

PIM

MISC Connector

Slot No.s 03 02
00 01 02 03 04

68PH S 2PORTS CA-A

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-017
Sheet 4/9
Installation of the Maintenance
Administration Terminal (MAT) and Cable
Connections

2. INSTALLATION OF MAT AND CABLE CONNECTION BY USING MODEM
Note:

When the distance between the PBX and the MAT (Maintenance Administration Terminal) exceeds 15
meters (50 feet), connect them with Modems as shown in Figure 017-3.

START
Preparation of the MAT

Set up the Personal Computer, CRT Display, Printer,
and so on.

Preparation of the modems

Set up the modems referring to its instruction book.

Cable connection

Connect the cables referring to Figure 017-3.

END

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 275
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-017
Sheet 5/9
Installation of the Maintenance
Administration Terminal (MAT) and Cable
Connections

• To connect the PBX and the MAT, the following three kinds of communication cables are required.
The “RS-232C Cable” should be provided by the customer.
PBX

MAT

Installation Cable
(less than 10 m / 33 feet)

RS-232C Cable
(customer provided)
To the MISC connectors
RS-232C CA-(3)
ANALOG LINE
(2W/4W)
MODEM

TYP0 serial port 0

MODEM

68PH S 2PORTS CA-A
(2 m / 6 feet)

— Legend —
: Champ Connector (Male)
: Champ Connector (Female)
: 25-Pin Cannon Connector (Male)
: 25-Pin Cannon Connector (Female)
: 68-Pin Connector (Female)

TYP1

Figure 017-3 Cabling of MAT Using Modems

CHAPTER 3
Page 276
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

serial port 1

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-017
Sheet 6/9
Installation of the Maintenance
Administration Terminal (MAT) and Cable
Connections

3. INSTALLATION OF SYSTEM MESSAGE PRINTER AND CABLE CONNECTIONS

START
Installing printer

Install printer according to its instructions.

Cable connection

Connect the cable between the PBX and the dedicated
System Message Printer which is equipped with a
parallel port referring to Figure 017-4.

END

• To connect the PBX and the dedicated SYSTEM MESSAGE
PRINTER, the following three kinds of communication cables
are required. The “RS-232C Cable” should be provided by the
customer.

PBX

To the MISC connectors
RS-232C Cable
(customer provided)

RS-232C CA-(0)

TYP0

SERIAL PORT 0

TYP1

SERIAL PORT 1
68PH S 2PORTS CA-A
(2 m / 6.6 feet)
— Legend —

PRINTER

: Champ Connector (Male)
: Champ Connector (Female)
: 25-Pin Cannon Connector (Male)
: 25-Pin Cannon Connector (Female)
: 68-Pin Connector (Female)

Figure 017-4 Connection of System Message Printer

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 277
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-017
Sheet 7/9
Installation of the Maintenance
Administration Terminal (MAT) and Cable
Connections

RS-232C CA-(0)
1500mm (4 feet 1 inch)
DTE

TYP

Champ Connector
(Female)

Connect to
68PH S 2PORTS CA-A

25-Pin Cannon Connector
(Male)

TYPE-1-SD

DTE-3-RD

TYPE-2-RD

TYPE-2-SD

TYPE-3-RS

TYPE-8-CD

TYPE-4-CS

TYPE

TYPE-5-DR

TYPE-20-ER

TYPE-6-SG

TYPE-7-SG

TYPE-7-CD

TYPE-4-RS
-5-CS

TYPE-8-ER

TYPE-6-DR

TYPE-9-PB

TYPE-11-PB
TYPE-24-ST1

TYPE-10-SP0
TYPE-12-SP2

TYPE-17-RT

TYPE-11-SP1

TYPE-15-ST2

Figure 017-5 Detail of RS-232C CA-(0)
CHAPTER 3
Page 278
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

Connect to PRT

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-017
Sheet 8/9
Installation of the Maintenance
Administration Terminal (MAT) and Cable
Connections

RS-232C CA-(1)
1500mm (4 feet 1 inch)
DTE

TYP

Champ Connector
(Female)

Connect to
68PH S 2PORTS CA-A

25-Pin Cannon Connector
(Female)

TYPE-1-SD

DTE-3-RD

TYPE-2-RD

TYPE-2-SD

TYPE-3-RS

TYPE-8-CD

TYPE-4-CS

TYPE

TYPE-5-DR

TYPE-20-ER

TYPE-6-SG

TYPE-7-SG

TYPE-7-CD

TYPE-4-RS

Connect to
RS-232C Cable

-5-CS
TYPE-8-ER

TYPE-6-DR

TYPE-9-PB

TYPE-11-PB
TYPE-24-ST1

TYPE-10-SP0
TYPE-12-SP2

TYPE-17-RT

TYPE-11-SP1

TYPE-15-ST2

Figure 017-6 Detail of RS-232C CA-(1)

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 279
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-017
Sheet 9/9
Installation of the Maintenance
Administration Terminal (MAT) and Cable
Connections

RS-232C CA-(3)
1500mm (4 feet 1 inch)
DTE

TYP

25-Pin Cannon Connector
(Male)

Champ Connector
(Female)

Connect to
68PH S 2PORTS CA-A

TYP-1-SD

DCE-2-SD

TYP-2-RD

DCE-3-RD

TYP-3-RS

DCE-4-RS

TYP-4-CS

DCE-5-CS

TYP-5-DR

DCE-6-DR

TYP-6-SG

DCE-7-SG

TYP-7-CD

DCE-8-CD

TYP-8-ER

DCE-20-ER

TYP-10-SP0

DCE-17-RT

TYP-11-SP2

DCE-24-ST1

TYP-12-SP1

DCE-15-ST2

Figure 017-7 Detail of RS-232C CA-(3)

CHAPTER 3
Page 280
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

Connect to MODEM

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-018
Sheet 1/3
Connections of SMDR

This NAP explains the cable connection of SMDR equipment.
Note:

The IOC circuit card (PH-IO24), which has four RS-232C interfaces, can be mounted in the slot Number
3 and/or 2 of the LPR. Consequently, the system can have maximum eight ports for the RS232C terminals.

RS-232C cable

MISC 3B/4B

Backplane
AMP
AMP

Front

AMP

Circuit 1

Circuit 2

TYP0
TYP0

68PH S 2PORTS CA-A

To RS-232C
Terminal

TYP0
TYP1

IOC (PH-IO24)

TYP0

Circuit 0
68PH S 2PORTS CA-A

MISC 3A/4A
TYP1
TYP1

Circuit 3

Figure 018-1 I/O Port Interface

The SMDR RS-232C interface specifications are:
• Synchronization

— Asynchronous

• Data Speed

— 9600 bps (maximum)

• Code

— ASCII 7-bit + Parity Bit

• Maximum Distance

— 15 meters (50 feet) without Modems.

START
Installation of SMDR equipment
Cable connection

Connect the cables by referring to Figure 018-2.
• Refer to Figure 018-3 when the length of the
cables exceeds 15 meters (49.5 feet).

END

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 281
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-018
Sheet 2/3
Connections of SMDR

• The location of MISC connector to which “68PH S 2PORTS CA-A” cable is connected varies depending on
the mounting location of the IOC (PH-IO24) card and the designated IOC port number (#0~#3).

PBX

Slot Number 03

MISC3B MISC3A

IOC 0
IOC 1

LPM

MISC4B MISC4A

00 01 02 03 04

PIM

02

LPM

FRONT VIEW

BASEU

PBX
FRONT VIEW

IOC

RS 232C Cable
(customer provided)

MISC 3B/4B Connector

SMDR

68PH S 2PORTS CA-A

Port 1
TYP1

Port 0
TYP0

PIM
Port 3
Port 2

TYP1

2400 RS 232C CA-1

TYP0

-- Legend --

SIDE VIEW

: Champ Connector (Male)
: Champ Connector (Female)

MISC 3A/4A Connector

: 25-Pin Cannon Connector (Male)
: 25-Pin Cannon Connector (Female)
: 68-Pin Connector (Female)

Figure 018-2 Cable Connection Diagram for the SMDR Equipment
CHAPTER 3
Page 282
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NAP-200-018
Sheet 3/3
Connections of SMDR

• The location of MISC connector to which “68PH S 2 PORTS CA-A” cable is connected varies depending
on the mounting location of the IOC (PH-IO24) card and the designated IOC number (#0~#3).
PBX

Slot Number

03

IOC 0
IOC 1

LPM

FRONT VIEW

PBX

MISC3B MISC3A

MISC4B MISC4A

00 01 02 03 04

PIM

02

LPM

BASEU
REAR VIEW

MISC 3B/4B Connector
Analog Line
(2W/4W)

68PH S 2PORTS CA-A

MODEM
RS 232C Cable
(customer provided)

MODEM
SMDR
Port 1
Port 0
IOC

TYP1

TYP0

2400 RS 232C CA-(3)

Port 3
TYP1

Port 2
TYP0

-- Legend --

MISC 3A/4A Connector

: Champ Connector (Male)
: Champ Connector (Female)
: 25-Pin Cannon Connector (Male)
: 68-Pin Connector (Female)

Figure 018-3 Connection of SMDR by Using MODEM

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 3
Page 283
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

This page is for your notes.

CHAPTER 3
Page 284
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 4

SYSTEM STARTUP

1. GENERAL
This Chapter describes the method to start up the system initially after completion of the installation of the PBX,
and the method to check as to whether the system has started up normally. Before beginning the system startup,
thoroughly read Section 2., “PRECAUTIONS BEFORE BEGINNING SYSTEM STARTUP” of this Chapter,
and observe the precautions while performing the system startup. Failure to so may delay the system cutover or
may result in damage to the system equipment.
2. PRECAUTIONS BEFORE BEGINNING SYSTEM STARTUP
1.

The system is to be started up using the basic system data.

2.

When starting up the system, it is necessary to start up the MAT.

3.

The following preparatory steps must be completed before the tests are begun:
• All circuit card switches should be correctly set.
• Flat cables should be securely connected.
• CHAMP connectors should be securely connected.
• All connector-ended cables should be secured at both ends.
• The –48 V (Blue) and G (Red) power supply leads must be correctly connected.
• An earth lead (less than 10 ohms) must be connected to the communication ground.
• The installer should confirm at this point that all installation steps have been completed.

4.

Do not place any object (a tool, manual, etc.) on top of the Module Group or within a unit (module).
• An object such as a book, when placed on top of the Module Group, will adversely affect heat dissipation from the Module Group.
• If an object placed on top of the Module Group or left within a unit (module) falls out, it may cause
backplane pins, circuit cards, etc. to short-circuit.

5.

Before initially turning ON power to the system, read the Power On Procedure (NAP-200-019).
• Until the normal operation of all circuit cards has been confirmed, leave power ON only during testing.

6.

Observe the temperature in the switch room.
• Does the air-conditioning function properly at night?
• Does the temperature fluctuate constantly because people go in and out frequently, or rise above the recommended level due to excessive heat being generated by any single piece of equipment?
• The fan should be left ON constantly until the installation tests are completed.

7.

A floppy disk (FD) copy of the programmed Office Data should be created. If a backup is not made, and
the contents of the Data Memory are accidentally altered or destroyed, all the Office Data will have to be
programmed again.

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 4
Page 285
Revision 3.0

SYSTEM STARTUP

8.

If any portion of the Office Data (especially data related to ringing patterns) has been changed via commands “ARTD”, “AKYD”, or “ASYD”, the system must be initialized and tests involving the changed data
must be performed.

9.

After the system is initialized, perform the following.
• Set the current date and time using MAT command “ATIM”.
• When the system is initialized, the system begins operating in Day Mode. To change over to Night
Mode, depress the NITE key on the Attendant Console.
• If no Attendant Console is equipped, the system begins operating in night mode.

10. The following cross connections must be made at the MDF:
• Complete necessary cross connections by extracting the related circuit cards from their mounting slots
or by disconnecting the circuits with a cut plug if test springs are in use.
• If the connection to a Dterm is made incorrectly, the electronic fuse of the circuit card will blow out.
(Repair Method: Correct the cross connections and flip the MB switch on the card Down-Up-Down).
• While a test is in progress, do not perform cross connections without first consulting with the person
conducting the test (Ringing signal: AC 20 Hz, effective value 90 V, may be flowing through the terminals).
• Remove all temporary cross connections after the tests have been performed (If Office Data was assigned for test purposes, restore the original Office Data).
11. Observe the following when connecting cables:
• Before connecting or disconnecting the control cable (Front & Backplane), turn OFF the power to the
Module Group (LPM / PIM etc.).
• Before connecting or disconnecting a CHAMP connector, turn OFF the power to the Module Group.
This will prevent an accident from occurring in the event that a metal object such as a screw, screwdriver,
etc. accidentally contacts the backplane circuitry or pins.
• When connecting or disconnecting the connector cable of the Attendant Console, first set the MB switch
on the ATI circuit card to the UP position, then connect/disconnect the cable.
12. Precautions when Handling Circuit Cards
• When handling a circuit card, use a Field Service Kit to protect against static discharge (example: 3M
No. 8012 Portable Field Service Kit; available from NEC).
• When touching a circuit card, be sure to wear the grounded wrist strap provided with the Portable Field
Service Kit.
• Set the MB switch to the UP position and extract the circuit card from its mounting slot.
• When holding a circuit card with bare hands, do not touch the component mounted side of the card or
the connector portion.

CHAPTER 4
Page 286
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

SYSTEM STARTUP

Wrist Strap
Place the Circuit
Card on a
conductive sheet.

Connector
(Contact) Portion

Connect ground wire to the Earth
terminal of the Module Group.

(Component-Mounted
Side)

Front Side

Card Puller Tab

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 4
Page 287
Revision 3.0

SYSTEM STARTUP

•

When placing a circuit card on a table or other flat surface, spread out a conductive sheet and set the card
on the sheet.

Circuit
Card

Perform work on the conductive sheet
while wearing a grounded wrist strap.

•

Set the MB switch of the circuit card to the UP position and confirm its mounting slot (Note). Then insert
the card into its mounting slot.

Note:

Confirm that the color of the card puller tab is the same as the color of the label showing the Slot Number.

3. SYSTEM STARTUP PROCEDURE
The NAPs indicated in the following flowchart describe the procedures for powering on, starting up the system,
assigning Office Data, and checking the startup conditions.

START
Power On:

NAP-200-019

Program Install/Load:

NAP-200-020

Office Data Assignment:

NAP-200-021

Check of Lamp Indication and System Messages:

NAP-200-022

Check of Alarm Lamps of the TOPU:

NAP-200-023

END

CHAPTER 4
Page 288
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

SYSTEM STARTUP

NAP-200-019
Sheet 1/2
ATTENTION

Power ON

Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

START
Visual Inspection

Check whether any pins are shorting on the backplane of
each Module.
Check whether any foreign matter such as a cleaning fluid
residue is present on the connector portion of the circuit
cards.
On each circuit card equipped with ROM (CPU, etc.),
check whether any pins of the ROM are bent or improperly
seated.

Leave all circuit cards inserted
halfway

Mount all circuit cards (including PWR Supplies) in the
Module, leaving them inserted only halfway. (They should
not be inserted into their connectors.)

Check input voltage

Check insulation across the -48 V and G terminals on the
power receiving terminal of the Base Unit.
Turn power to the rectifier ON and check the voltage (DC
-48V ± 5V) and its polarity on the power receiving terminal
of the Base Unit.

Turn ON Fan Units

Turn FAN UNIT ON.
Verify that air is blown upwards.
If the Fuse blows, the input polarity is reversed.
Turn OFF the FAN UNIT.
Correct polarity, replace the fuse and turn FAN UNIT ON.
Verify that the FAN blows air upwards.

Check PWR Supply

Check the Power Supplies for each Module one at a time.
Check Steps:
1. Turn circuit breaker OFF and insert the PWR Supply.
2. Turn circuit breaker ON (See Note).
3. Various lamps (Green) illuminate.
4. Observe the PWR Supply for a while and confirm that
nothing abnormal (unusual smell, smoke, etc.) occurs.
5. Turn the circuit breaker ON/OFF a few times and
observe the condition.
6. Turn the circuit breaker OFF and remove the PWR
Supply.
Note:

A

NDA-24234

If a Module is equipped with dual PWR Supplies,
they must be turned ON/OFF simultaneously.

CHAPTER 4
Page 289
Revision 3.0

SYSTEM STARTUP

NAP-200-019
Sheet 2/2
ATTENTION

Power ON

Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

A
Insert all PWR Supplies

Insert all PWR Supplies into their positions.
Insertion Steps:
1. Turn each Power Supply’s circuit breaker OFF and insert
them one at a time.
2. Turn circuit breakers ON.
3. Confirm that there are no abnormal indications (unusual
smell, smoke, alarm, etc.)
Insert Line (16LC, etc.) and Trunk (16COT, etc.) circuit
Insert and check Line/Trunk circuit
cards
cards into their backplane connectors one at a time and
confirm that no fuses are blown in the process.
Check Steps:
1. Set MB switch UP and insert the card.
2. Set MB switch DOWN.
3. Confirm that there are no abnormal indications.
4. Set MB switch UP and remove the card.
Insert and check control system
Insert control system circuit cards (TSW, MUX, etc.) one at
cards
a time and confirm that no fuses are blown in the process.
Check Steps:
1. Set MB switch UP and insert the card.
2. Set MB switch DOWN.
3. Confirm that there are no abnormal indications.
4. Set MB switch UP and remove the card.
Note: If a module contains dual PWR Supplies, they must be turned ON or OFF simultaneously.
Power ON Procedure

Power OFF Procedure:

IMG3 →
IMG3:
IMG2:
IMG1:
IMG0:

IMG2 →
PIM0 →
TSWM1 →
TSWM0 →
CPR0 →

IMG1 →
PIM1 →
PIM0 →
PIM0 →
CPR1 →

IMG0
PIM2 →
PIM1 →
PIM1 →
PIM0 →

PIM3
PIM2 →
PIM2 →
PIM1 →

PIM3
PIM3
PIM2 →

PIM3

IMG3 →
IMG3:
IMG2:
IMG1:
IMG0:

IMG2 →
PIM3 →
PIM3 →
PIM3 →
PIM3 →

IMG1 →
PIM2 →
PIM2 →
PIM2 →
PIM2 →

IMG0
PIM1 →
PIM1 →
PIM1 →
PIM1 →

PIM0
PIM0 →
PIM0 →
PIM0 →

TSWM1
TSWM0
CPR1 →

CPR0

END

CHAPTER 4
Page 290
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

SYSTEM STARTUP

NAP-200-020
Sheet 1/6
ATTENTION

Program Install and Load

Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

Procedure for Program Install consists of the following items.

START

Off-Line Start Up

HD Initial

•
•
•

Generic Software 2 ~ 11
Internal MAT Software 1 - 2
TCP/IP Software 1 Install

Application
Software Install

Refer to (a) Procedure for Off-Line Start Up

Refer to (b) Procedure for HD Initial
• HD format
• Generic Software (1) Install
• Making Directory in the HD

Refer to (c) Procedure for Basic Software Install

Refer to (d) Procedure for Application Software Install

END

Note:

The control of 7-seg LED is the next page.(Case of program install and restart processing)

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 4
Page 291
Revision 3.0

SYSTEM STARTUP

NAP-200-020
Sheet 2/6
ATTENTION

Program Install and Load

Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

(a) Procedure for off-line start-up

Status change of 7 Segment LED on the EMA card

START

Set the SENSE switch
for the system to be
initialized (CPU0, CPU1)
to “c” on the CPU Front Panel.

• Push the CPURST
button on the CPU
Front Panel.
or

Startup
end (off-line mode)

• Turn Power-SW ON.

END

CHAPTER 4
Page 292
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

SYSTEM STARTUP

NAP-200-020
Sheet 3/6
ATTENTION

Program Install and Load

Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

(b) Procedure for HD Initial

Status change of 7 Segment LED on the CPU Front
Panel.
START

Set the SENSE switch for the
system to be initialized (CPU0,
CPU1) to “1” on the CPU Front
Panel.

Insert the FD Basic Generic
Disk 1 into the FDD.

Flip the MBR key on the CPU • HD Format
Front Panel [OFF-ON-OFF].

END
Display end

Note:
SENS SW
1

7SEG LED
→

→

FUNCTION
FORMAT → COPY → MAKING DIRECTORY

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 4
Page 293
Revision 3.0

SYSTEM STARTUP

NAP-200-020
Sheet 4/6
ATTENTION

Program Install and Load

(c) Procedure for Generic Software (#2 ~ #11) Internal MAT Software (1 ~ 2), TCP/
IP Software (1) Install

Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

Status change of 7 Segment LED on the CPU Front
Panel.
START

Set the SENSE switch
for the system to have
DATA installed (CPU0, CPU1)
to “3” on the CPU Front Panel.

Insert the FD Basic Generic
Disk 2 into the FDD.

*

Flip the MBR key on the
CPU Front Panel card
OFF–ON–OFF.

* Repeat
Generic Software 3 ~ 11
Internal MAT Software 1 ~ 2
TCP/IP Software 1
END

WARNING: Removal or Make Busy of the HFD card is

not allowed while the Floppy Disk or Hard
Disk is being accessed.

CHAPTER 4
Page 294
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

SYSTEM STARTUP

NAP-200-020
Sheet 5/6
ATTENTION

Program Install and Load

Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

(d) Procedure for Application Software Install

Status change of 7 Segment LED on the CPU Front
Panel.

START

Set the SENSE switch
for the system to have DATA
installed (CPU0, CPU1)
to “3” on the CPU Front Panel.

Insert the FD “Application
Software into the FDD.

Flip the MBR Key on the
CPU Front Panel
[OFF–ON–OFF].

END

WARNING: Removal or Make Busy of the HFD card is

INSTALL END

not allowed while the Floppy Disk or Hard
Disk is being accessed.

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 4
Page 295
Revision 3.0

SYSTEM STARTUP

NAP-200-020
Sheet 6/6
ATTENTION

Program Install and Load

•

Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

Procedure for Program Load
This section describes system start-up procedure in which a program is loaded from the HD to the MEM
and the data memory is cleared.

START
Program Load

Set the SENSE switch to “1” (restart with data
memory clear) on the CPU Front Panel and press the
CPURST button.
The system is initialized when LOADING from the
HD to the MEM is completed.
Verify that the OPE lamp on the CPU Front Panel
starts flashing.

Set On-Line mode

Set the SENSE switch to “2” (restart without data
memory clear) on the CPU Front Panel.

END

CHAPTER 4
Page 296
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

SYSTEM STARTUP

NAP-200-021
Sheet 1/2
ATTENTION

Assignment of Office Data

Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

START
Start up the MAT
Enter basic data

Assign the following data via the MAT per the office data
programming sheet.
“ATIM”: Assignment of Date and Time
“ASYD” (SYS 1, 2, & 3) /ASYDL (SYS 1 & 2):
System Data assignment
“AUNT”: Unit Data assignment

Save basic data

Save the above data onto the hard disk (HD) using the
“MEM_HDD” Command.

Initialize

Make sure that the SENSE switch on the CPU Front
Panel has been set to “2”.
Press the CPURST button on the CPU Front Panel.
Clear the alarm by pressing the ALM RST button on the
TOPU.

Assign Office Data

Assign data according to the office data programming
sheet.

A

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 4
Page 297
Revision 3.0

SYSTEM STARTUP

NAP-200-021
Sheet 2/2
ATTENTION

Assignment of Office Data

Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

A
Save Office Data onto HD

Save the Office Data onto the hard disk (HD) from the
MEM using the “MEM_HDD” command.

Save Office Data onto FD

Save the Office Data onto a floppy disk (FD) from the
HD using the “HDD_MAT” command.

END

CHAPTER 4
Page 298
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

SYSTEM STARTUP

NAP-200-022
Sheet 1/5
ATTENTION

Check of Lamp Indications and System
Messages

Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

START
Check lamp indications on Line/
Trunk circuit cards

Check lamp indications on each of the assigned Line/
Trunk circuit cards.
OPE lamp (G):

ON

BL lamp (R):

OFF

If the lamp indications are other than above, investigate
per Chapter 6: “FAULT RECOVERY DURING
TESTS.”
Check lamp indications on control
system circuit cards

The OPE lamps (G) are shown in Figure 022-1 through
Figure 022-4.
If any alarm lamp illuminates, check switch settings on
the circuit card, mounting positions of the cards within
that module, control cable connections (Front &
Backplane), and Office Data assignments.

Confirm that no alarm lamps (R) / (Y)
are illuminating on the TOPU

For explanations of the TOPU (Top Unit) lamp
indications, refer to the System Operations and
Maintenance Manual.

Check System Messages

Display System Messages using MAT command
“DFTD.”
If a System Message which indicates a fault is displayed,
investigate and recover the fault referring to the System
Operations and Maintenance Manual.

END
START

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 4
Page 299
Revision 3.0

SYSTEM STARTUP

This figure shows the LED indications for a fully expanded system as an example.
System State
CPU 0 -) ACT
TSW 0 -) ACT
PLO 0 -) ACT

TOPU
13

14

MUX ACT
MUX(PH-PC36)

MUX(PH-PC36)

PIM3

13

14

MB

FRONT

MUX
MUX ACT

MUX ACT
MUX(PH-PC36)

MUX(PH-PC36)

13

14

MUX(PH-PC36)

MUX(PH-PC36)

PIM2

13

14

FANU
MUX ACT

PIM1

TSW
TSW ACT
MUX ACT
PLO ACT
MB

TSW ACT
MUX ACT

PIM0

TSW(PH-SW10)

03

PLO MBR

FRONT

04

OPE OPE/MB
EMA(PH-PC40)

IOC(PH-IO24)

LPR

TSW(PH-SW10)

DSP 1 (PZ-DK224)

BSCM

TSW MBR

PLO ACT

IMG0

CPU OPE

IMG1

CPU OPE

BASEU

DSP 0 (PZ-DK224)
FRONT VIEW

Legend
: Lamp is ON (Green)

: Lamp is Flashing (Green)

: Lamp is OFF

Figure 022-1 LED Indications in Normal Operation (Single IMG Configuration)

CHAPTER 4
Page 300
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

SYSTEM STARTUP

This figure shows the LED indications (example) for a fully expanded IMG0 system.
System State
CPU 0 → ACT
PLO 0 → ACT
TSW 0 → ACT

TOPU
13

14

MUX ACT
MUX(PH-PC36)

MUX(PH-PC36)

13

14

MB

MUX(PH-PC36)

MUX(PH-PC36)

PIM3

FRONT

13

14

MUX
MUX ACT

MUX ACT

PIM2

FANU
MUX ACT
MUX(PH-PC36)

MUX(PH-PC36)

13

14

MUX(PH-PC36)

MUX(PH-PC36)

PIM1

MUX ACT

PIM0

DSP 1 (PZ-DK224)
03

04
IMG 0

OPE OPE/MB
IOC(PH-IO24)

EMA(PH-PC40)

LPM

CPU OPE

IMG 0
CPU OPE

BASEU

DSP 0 (PZ-DK224)
FRONT VIEW

Legend
: Lamp is ON (Green)

: Lamp is Flashing (Green)

: Lamp is OFF

Figure 022-2 LED Indications of IMG0 in Normal Operation (Multiple IMG Configuration)
NDA-24234

CHAPTER 4
Page 301
Revision 3.0

SYSTEM STARTUP

This figure shows the LED indications (example) for a fully expanded IMG1 system. Note that this example
assumes that all of the four IMGs are used in an integrated multimedia exchange service.
IMG1

System State

TOPU

TSW 0 -> ACT
PLO 0 -> ACT
DLKC 0 -> ACT

13 14

MUX(PH-PC36)

MUX(PH-PC36)

PIM3

MUX
MUX ACT

13 14
MB
MUX(PH-PC36)

MUX(PH-PC36)

PIM2

FRONT

FANU
13 14

GT

MUX(PH-PC36)

MUX(PH-PC36)

PIM1

TSW
TSW ACT

OPE/MB
13 14

MB
TSW ACT

PIM0

FRONT

MUX(PH-PC36)

MUX(PH-PC36)

MB
MBR
MBR

FRONT

08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PLO Note

MB

(RES)

BASEU

ACT

PLO Note

TSW 13 (PH-SW12)

TSW 12 (PH-SW12)

TSW 11 (PH-SW12)

TSW 10 (PH-SW12)

TSW 03 (PH-SW12)

TSW 02 (PH-SW12)

TSW 01 (PH-SW12)

TSW 00 (PH-SW12)

GT (PA-GT09)

GT (PA-GT09)

OPE/MB

DLKC (PH-PC20)

DLKC

DLKC (PH-PC20)

TSWM

PLO

FRONT

MB

FRONT VIEW
Legend
: Lamp is ON

: Lamp is OFF

FRONT

Note:

PH-CK16/PH-CK17, or PH-CK16-A/PH-CK17-A
Figure 022-3 LED Indications of IMG1 in Normal Operation (Multiple IMG Configuration)

CHAPTER 4
Page 302
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

SYSTEM STARTUP

This figure shows the LED indications (example) of a fully expanded system of IMG 2/3.
System State
TSW 0 -> ACT

IMG 2/3
TOPU
13 14

MUX(PH-PC36)

MUX(PH-PC36)

PIM3

MUX
MUX ACT

13 14

MUX(PH-PC36)

MUX(PH-PC36)

PIM2

MB

FRONT

FANU
13 14

MUX(PH-PC36)

MUX(PH-PC36)

PIM1

13 14

MUX(PH-PC36)

MUX(PH-PC36)

PIM0

DUMMY

BASEU
FRONT VIEW

Legend
: Lamp is ON

: Lamp is OFF

Figure 022-4 LED Indications of IMG 2/3 in Normal Operation (example) (Multiple IMG Configuration)

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 4
Page 303
Revision 3.0

SYSTEM STARTUP

NAP-200-023
Sheet 1/2
ATTENTION

Check of Alarm Lamps of the TOPU

Test Outline:

Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

The System has Alarm Lamps on the TOPU. Figure 023-1 shows the Alarm
Lamps on the TOPU. For more information about each lamp, see the
NEAX2400 IMX System Operations and Maintenance Manual.

G

G

PWR SMJ
ON

G

R

SMN

MJ

R

Y

MN

SUP

ALM

Figure 023-1 Alarm Lamps on the TOPU
Note:

SMJ and SMN are used in multiple IMG configuration only.

CHAPTER 4
Page 304
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

SYSTEM STARTUP

NAP-200-023
Sheet 2/2
ATTENTION

Check of Alarm Lamps of the TOPU

Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

START
Test of MJ (MAJOR) Lamp

Set the circuit breakers of the Power Supplies (PWR0, 1)
in a PIM to OFF (About 10 seconds later, set the circuit
breaker(s) back ON.
Confirm that the MJ lamp (red) on the TOPU turns ON.
Cancel the alarm indicating by pressing the ALM RST
button on the TOPU.

Test of MN (MINOR) Lamp

Take an act side RGU Fuse out of the PWR card.
Confirm that the MN lamp (red) on the TOPU turns ON.
Cancel the alarm indication by pressing the ALM RST
button on the TOPU.

Test of SUP (SUPERVISORY)
Lamp

On the EMA Circuit card, flip the MB switch DOWNUP-DOWN
Confirm that the SUP lamp (yellow) on the TOPU turns
ON.
Cancel the alarm indication by pressing the ALM RST
button on the TOPU.

END

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 4
Page 305
Revision 3.0

SYSTEM STARTUP

This page is for your notes.

CHAPTER 4
Page 306
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 5

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

1. HOW TO ENTER DATA IN THE TEST CHECK COLUMN
Each NAP in this Chapter has check column for test result entry for each test item (see Figure 5-1). This paragraph explains the method of entering test result into the check column concerned using Figure 5-1 as an example.
1.

Method of Entry
Each check column consists of two sections of “PROVIDED” and “CHECK”. If the equipment or service
feature pertaining to the test item is provided in the system, enter “*” in the PROVIDED section. At the
time of performing installation tests, the test item with “*” marked in the PROVIDED section must be tested without exception.
In the “CHECK” column, enter the results of each test as follows:
• When the test result is good:

“OK”

• When the test result is no good: “×”
2.

Fault Recovery
If a fault is discovered as a result of an installation test, enter “√” into the related check sheet. After finishing all tests in the same category, be sure to repair the detected fault before proceeding to the next test.

3.

Entry into Check Column after Fault Recovery
After fault recovery work has been completed, a test must be performed to confirm that the fault has been
completely corrected. If the result of this confirmation indicates that the fault has been corrected, enter
“OK” next to the “×” entered previously. This entry should appear as: “× OK”.

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 5
Page 307
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

•

This example is NAP-200-024: DT Connection Test
When “*” is already printed in the “PROVIDED” section, the item concerned
is a basic function of the system. Test the item without exception.

START
Check whether the OPE lamp (G) is turning ON on the RST circuit
cards.

*

Check whether the OPE lamp (G) is turning ON on the LC circuit
cards.

*

Lift handset.

*

Confirm DT (Dial Tone).

*

Check whether the Busy lamp (R) is turning ON for the
connected ORT and LC.
Continue listening to DT for about 12 seconds.
Confirm that DT changes to Reorder Tone (ROT).
Continue listening to ROT for about 30 seconds.
When System Data (SYS1,
INDEX 64, b3 = 0, b4 = 0)
are assigned.

Confirm that ROT changes to
“no tone.”

When System Data (SYS1,
INDEX 64, b3 = 0, b4 = 1 or
b3 = 1, b4 = 0) are assigned.

Confirm that howler tone is
heard after ROT stops.
(Analog Ports only)

Hang up and release the connection.
END
When “PROVIDED” section is blank, the installer should enter “*”
mark as per the Job Specification.
The item marked with “*” must be tested without exception.

Figure 5-1 Example of Entry to Test Check Column

CHAPTER 5
Page 308
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

*

These are the
Test Check
Columns, the
left column is
“PROVIDE”
column and the
right columns is
the “CHECK”
columns.

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

2. BASIC CONNECTION TEST
2.1 Outline

After the system has been started up, establish some basic connections and verify that the system operates normally.
2.2 Basic Connection Test Procedure

Perform tests on the operations of the processors and the system by referring to the NAP Number indicated to
the right of each item in the following flowchart. If an operation cannot be performed satisfactorily, perform the
necessary repair procedure(s) based on Chapter 6, “FAULT RECOVERY DURING TESTS”.

START
DT (Dial Tone) Connection Test:

NAP-200-024

Station-to-Station Connection Test:

NAP-200-025

END

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 5
Page 309
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

DT, ROT

NAP-200-024
Sheet 1/1
DT (Dial Tone) Connection Test

A

LC

ORT

START
Check whether the OPE lamp (G) is turning ON on the RST circuit cards.
Check whether the OPE lamp (G) is turning ON on the LC circuit cards.

*
*

Lift handset.
Confirm DT (Dial Tone).

*

Check whether the Busy lamp (R) is turning ON for the connected ORT and LC.

*

Continue listening to DT for about 12 seconds.
Confirm that DT changes to Reorder Tone (ROT).
Continue listening to ROT for about 30 seconds.
When System Data (SYS1,
INDEX 64, b3 = 0, b4 = 0) are
assigned.

Confirm that ROT changes to “no tone”.

When System Data (SYS1,
INDEX 64, b3 = 0, b4 = 1 or
b3 = 1, b4 = 0) are assigned.

Confirm that howler tone is heard after ROT
stops. (Analog Ports only)

Hang up and release the connection.
END

CHAPTER 5
Page 310
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

*

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

DT, ROT

NAP-200-025
Sheet 1/1

ORT

Station to Station Connection Test
A

LC

B

LC
RG

START
Confirm that a connection can be established between Station “A” and Station “B.”
Station “A” goes off-hook.
Station “A” hears DT.

*

Station “A” dials the station number of Station “B.”
Station “A” confirms that DT stops when the first digit has been dialed.

*

Station “A” confirms that RBT (Ring Back Tone) is heard after dialing ends.

*

Station “B” hears ringing on the telephone set.

*

Station “B” lifts handset and answers the call.
After answering, both Stations “A” and “B” confirm that they can talk with
each other.

*

Stations “A” and “B” hang up. The connection is released.
END

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 5
Page 311
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

3. SYSTEM INITIALIZED TEST
3.1 Outline

Tests are to be performed on the restart processing (reinitialization) and system changeover functions which enable the system to restart its operations and services.
3.2 System Initialized Test Procedure

The System Changeover Test and Initialization Tests are to be performed per the NAP Numbers indicated to the
right of each item in the following flowchart.
START
System Changeover Test:

NAP-200-026

System Initialization Test:

NAP-200-027

Circuit Card Initialization Test:

NAP-200-028

END

CHAPTER 5
Page 312
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

NAP-200-026
Sheet 1/7
System Changeover Test

Single IMG and Multiple IMG Configuration

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

Test Outline:
Tests are performed to see if a changeover of the dual systems (Control Systems and Speech Path Systems) of the
PBX can be executed.
START
Perform a Control System Changeover test by switch operations
Control System changeover via MBR switch on
the DSP (PZ-DK224)
card

On the DSP card of which OPE lamp is turning ON, flip the
“MBR” switch DOWN➝UP➝DOWN (OFF➝ON➝OFF).
The lamp indication of the DSP changes to “DSP in ST-BY
mode” shown in Figure 026-1.
System message “7-C” and “7-D” are displayed in
succession.

CPU changeover via
switch (Forced Changeover)

Designate CPU changeover via the “CPU SEL” switch on
the EMA (PH-PC 40) card.
• CPU SEL SW UP Position: No. 0 ACT
• CPU SEL SW DOWN Position: No. 1 ACT
System Messages “7-C” and “7-D” are displayed in
succession.

A

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 5
Page 313
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

NAP-200-026
Sheet 2/7
System Changeover Test

ATTENTION

Single IMG and Multiple IMG Configuration

Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

CPUOPE WDT IMG0

CPUOPE WDT IMG0
MBR

MBR

IMG1 IMG2 IMG3

IMG1 IMG2 IMG3
Flip the MBR switch
on the DSP.

DSP in ACT mode

DSP in ST-BY mode

Legend
: Lamp is ON (Green)

: Lamp is Flashing (Green)

: Lamp is OFF

Figure 026-1 How to Perform a Control System Changeover (Single IMG Configuration)

CPUOPE WOT IMG0
MBR

CPUOPE WDT IMG0
MBR
IMG1 IMG2 IMG3

IMG1 IMG2 IMG3
Flip the MBR switch
on the DSP.

DSP in ACT mode

DSP in ST-BY mode

Legend
: Lamp is ON (Green)

: Lamp is Flashing (Green)

: Lamp is OFF

Figure 026-2 How to Perform a Control System Changeover (Multiple IMG Configuration)

CHAPTER 5
Page 314
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

NAP-200-026
Sheet 3/7
System Changeover Test

ATTENTION

Single IMG Configuration

Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

A
Perform a TSW system changeover test by means of switch operations. (Refer to Figure 026-3)
TSW changeover via
switch.

On the TSW (PH-SW10) card on which the “TSW
ACT” lamp is turning ON, flip the “TSW MBR” switch
DOWN-UP-DOWN.
System Messages “7-E,” “7-F” and “1-T” are displayed
in succession.

Perform a PLO system changeover test, if TSW (PH-SW10) is provided in dual.
On the TSW card of which PLO ACT lamp is turning
ON, flip the “PLO MBR” switch DOWN-UP-DOWN.
System message “7-G” and “7-H” are displayed in
succession.
END

TSW (PH-SW10)

MUX (PH-PC36)

TSW ACT
MUX ACT
PLO ACT

MUX ACT
MB

MB
TSW MBR
PLO MBR

FRONT VIEW

Figure 026-3 LEDs and Switches on TSW/MUX

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 5
Page 315
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

NAP-200-026
Sheet 4/7
System Changeover Test

Multiple IMG Configuration

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

A
Perform a Speech Path system changeover test by switch operations. (Refer to Figure 026-4)
TSW changeover via
switch

On the active GT (PA-GT09) card on which the “OPE/MB”
lamp is illuminating, flip the “MBR” switch DOWN-UPDOWN.
Make sure that the active Speech Path system has been
changed over to the ST-BY mode. (Check all the related
circuit cards, which were formerly active, have been totally
changed over to the ST-BY mode.
Circuit Cards to be affected
• TSW (PH-SW12)
• DLKC (PH-PC20)
• MUX (PH-PC36)
Note: Refer to Figure 026-4.
Analyze the system messages “7-E,” “7-F” and “1-T” to be
displayed automatically.

Perform a PLO system changeover test by switch operations. (Refer to Figure 026-3)
PLO changeover via
switch.

On the PLO card on which the “ACT/OPE” lamp is
illuminating, flip the “MB” switch DOWN-UP-DOWN.
Note

Make sure that the active PLO system has been changed over
to the ST-BY mode (“ACT/OPE” lamp goes OFF).
Analyze the system messages “7-U” and “7-V” to be
displayed automatically.
Note:

As the PLO, any of the following cards can be used:
• PH-CK16
• PH-CK17

END

• PH-CK16-A
• PH-CK17-A

CHAPTER 5
Page 316
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

NAP-200-026
Sheet 5/7
System Changeover Test

DLKC (PH-PC20)
OPE/MB

ATTENTION

Multiple IMG Configuration

GT (PA-GT09)

MUX (PH-PC36)

OPE/MB

MUX ACT

Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

TSW (PH-SW12)

PLO Note 1

TSW ACT

OPE/ACT Note 2

MB

MB

MB
MB

MB

TSW MBR

MBR

FRONT VIEW

Note 1: PH-CK16/PH-CK17, or PH-CK16-A/PH-CK17-A
Note 2: “OPE” for PH-CK16-A/PH-CK17-A, “ACT” for PH-CK16/PH-CK17
Figure 026-4 LEDs and Switches for System Changeover (Multiple IMG Configuration)

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 5
Page 317
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

NAP-200-026
Sheet 6/7
System Changeover Test

Single IMG Configuration

MUX

PCM HW
PM BUS

MUX

PCM HW
PM BUS

MUX

PCM HW
PM BUS

CPR

TSW/INT/PLO

CPU
GT
LANI

MUX

LC/TRK

PCM HW
PM BUS

LC/TRK

LC/TRK

LC/TRK

From EMA
MUSIC
LVDS

D
T
G

MUX

TSW/INT

LC/TRK
MUX
PLO

CFT

PHSW10
DTI

DCS

Figure 026-5 System Block Diagram (TSW and MUX) (Multiple IMG Configuration)

CHAPTER 5
Page 318
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

NAP-200-026
Sheet 7/7
System Changeover Test

Multiple IMG Configuration

This figure shows a system block diagram centering on the CPU and its controlling GT. Although each side appears to have complicated connections, the controlling route of CPU 0 goes directly to GT 0, and that of CPU 1
to GT 1. Therefore, if the system of CPU is once changed over, the ACT/ST-BY of GT is also changed over.
IMG 0
MUX

MUX

IMG 1

MUX

MUX

MUX

MUX

IMG 2

MUX

TSW 10

MUX

MUX

MUX

TSW 11

TSW 00

TSW 01

IMG 3

MUX

MUX

MUX

MUX

MUX

MUX

TSW 13

TSW 12
TSW 03

TSW 02
TSW I/O BUS

DLKC 1

TSW I/O BUS

DLKC 0

PLO 1

PLO 0

As shown below, though an external cable is physically connected between ISAGT #0 and
GT #1, the actual control signal
is sent/received only between ISAGT 0 and GT 0 via the backboard bus.

GT 1
GT 0
ISAGT
CPR 0

CPU 1

CPU 0

GT 1

GT 0

ISAGT

LANI
IOP0
Backboard Bus

T
ISAGT0

LANI

Backboard

CPU

ISAGT: PZ-GT13
DLKC: PH-PC20

LANI

LANI
MISC BUS
EMA
IOC/
MISC

External Cable

Note:

CPR 1

LANI: PZ-PC19
EMA: PH-PC40

GT: PH-GT09
IOC: PH-IO24

TSW: PH-SW12
MUX: PH-PC36
PLO: PH-CK16/17, or PH-CK16-A/17A

Because the ACT/ST-BY changeover of CPU also affects the GT status, the MBR key on the GT card is
not used for GT system changeover. The key is used to switch over the Speech Path System, involving the
TSW, DLKC, and MUX circuit cards. (See the next page.)

Figure 026-6 System Block Diagram (GT and Other Controlling Blocks) (Multiple IMG Configuration)
NDA-24234

CHAPTER 5
Page 319
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

NAP-200-026
Sheet 8/8
System Changeover Test

Multiple IMG Configuration

This figure shows a system block diagram centering on the GT and its controlling Speech Path System. By changing over the ACT/ST-BY of the Speech Path System, all the related systems, such as TSW/INT, DLKC, and MUX,
are totally switched over. The changeover can be executed by a key operation on the active GT card.
IMG 0

IMG 1

Line/Trunk PM

Line/Trunk PM

Line/Trunk PM
PM BUS

MUX

PCM HW

MUX

PM BUS

PCM HW

PCM HW

MUX

PM BUS

PM BUS

MUX

PCM HW

PM BUS

MUX

PCM HW

PM BUS

PCM HW

MUX

TSW 11
TSW 01

PM BUS

MUX

IMG 3

PCM HW

PM BUS

MUX

PCM HW

PM BUS

MUX

PCM HW

TSW 10
TSW 00

PM BUS

MUX

PCM HW

PM BUS

MUX

PCM HW

PM BUS

MUX

PCM HW

PM BUS

MUX

PCM HW

PM BUS

MUX

PCM HW

PM BUS

PCM HW

PM BUS

PCM HW

MUX

Line/Trunk PM

IMG 2

MUX

TSW 13

TSW 12
TSW 02

TSW 03
TSW I/O BUS

DLKC 0

DLKC 1

TSW I/O BUS
PLO 1
PLO 0

GT 1
GT 0
CPR 0

ISAGT

ISAGT
CPU 1

CPU 0
LANI

ISAGT: PZ-GT13
DLKC: PH-PC20

Note:

CPR 1

LANI

LANI

LANI

LANI: PZ-PC19
GT: PH-GT09
PLO: PH-CK16/17, or PH-CK16-A/17A

TSW: PH-SW12

MUX: PH-PC36

If the MBR key is once flipped on the active GT card, all the Speech Path related systems (TSW/INT,
DLKC, and MUX) in the same switching block are totally changed over. However, the ACT/ST of GT and
PLO is not affected.
Figure 026-7 System Block Diagram (Speech Path) (Multiple IMG Configuration)

CHAPTER 5
Page 320
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

NAP-200-027
Sheet 1/2
ATTENTION

System Initialization Test

Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

Test Outline:
Tests are performed to see if system initialization can be executed. There are two kinds of test method; test by using
START button on the TOPU, and test by Power ON/OFF.

START
Perform system initialization (via “START” button)

*

Set the SYSTEM DATA key on the TOPU to NON LOAD side, and set the PROGRAM key to
NON LOAD side.
Perform system initialization by pressing the “START” button on the TOPU.
Confirm

When the system is initialized, the “CPU OPE” lamp (Green)
on the DSP circuit card lights.
When the system is initialized, System Message “7-B” is
displayed on the MAT.

A

To perform system initialization, set the switch keys on the TOPU as shown below, then press the START button.

PFT
ALM
RST

ON

PROGRAM
LOAD

SYSTEM DATA

INITIAL

NON LOAD

START

EFFECT

ON
OFF

OFF

NON LOAD
PZ-DK222

Figure 027-1 System Initialization via ‘Start’ Button

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 5
Page 321
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

NAP-200-027
Sheet 2/2
ATTENTION

System Initialization Test

Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

A
Perform system initialization (by powering ON/OFF).
Initialization by powering
ON/OFF.

*

On all PWR Supplies, set the circuit breaker OFF
(Down). If a module contains two PWR Supplies,
they must be turned ON/OFF simultaneously.
Turn ON the PWR Supplies in each module in the
following order. If a module contains two PWR
Supplies, they must be turned ON/OFF
simultaneously.
• LPM→PIM0→PIM1→PIM2 →PIM3

Confirm

When the system is initialized, the CPU OPE lamp
(Green) on the DSP turns ON.
When the system is initialized, System Message “7B” is displayed on the MAT.

Assignment of Date and Time

Upon completion of all the initialization tests,
assign data and time via MAT command “ATIM.”

END

CHAPTER 5
Page 322
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

NAP-200-028
Sheet 1/1
Circuit Card Initialization Test

START
Make the No. 0 CPU the ACT system.
In each PIM, initialize any
Line/Trunk circuit card.
*

On the selected Line/Trunk circuit card, set the MB switch UP.
The OPE lamp goes out.
System Message “7-K” is displayed.
Set the MB switch DOWN.
The OPE lamp turns ON.
System Message “7-L” is displayed.

Clear the alarm

Clear the alarm indication by pressing the “ALM RST” button
on the TOPU.

Make the No. 1 CUP the ACT system.
In each PIM, initialize any
Line/Trunk circuit card.

On the selected Line/Trunk circuit card, set the MB switch UP.
The OPE lamp goes out.
System Message “7-K” is displayed.
Set the MB switch DOWN.
The OPE lamp turns ON.
System Message “7-L” is displayed.

Clear the alarm

Clear the alarm indication by pressing the “ALM RST” button
on the TOPU.

END

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 5
Page 323
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

4. PORT CONNECTION TEST
4.1 Outline

Tests are to be performed on all the circuits of LC and Trunk circuit cards and PWR Supplies. LC and Trunk
circuit cards are tested with respect to their operations and speech path conditions. PWR Supplies are tested with
respect to howler tone and ringing signal.
While tests are in progress, the No. 0 CPU and TSW systems must be ACT (active).
4.2 Port Connection Test Procedure

The connection test procedure for each type of circuit card is described in the NAP indicated to the right of each
item in the following flowchart.

START
ORT (RST Card) Connection Test:

NAP-200-029

ATTCON (ATI Card) Connection Test:

NAP-200-030

Line (LC, ELC Card) Connection Test:

NAP-200-031

Outgoing Trunk (COT, TLT, DTI Card) Connection Test:

NAP-200-032

Incoming Trunk (COT, TLT, DTI Card) Connection Test:

NAP-200-033

Direct-In Termination Trunk (COT Card) Connection Test:

NAP-200-034

SND (RST Card) Connection Test:

NAP-200-035

3-Party Conference Trunk Function Test:

NAP-200-036

Connection Test - Announcement Trunk for Announcement Service:

NAP-200-037

Connection Test - Digital Announcement Trunk for Announcement Service:

NAP-200-038

Connection Test - Paging Trunk for Paging Access Service:

NAP-200-039

Connection Test - Paging Trunk for Paging Transfer Service:

NAP-200-040

Radio Paging Trunk (COT Card) Connection Test:

NAP-200-041

Howler and Ringing Signal Test:

NAP-200-042

END

CHAPTER 5
Page 324
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

NAP-200-029

DT, RBT

Sheet 1/2

ORT

ORT (RST Card) Connection Test

A (DP)

LC

B (PB)

LC
RG

START
Make busy all ORTs

On the front of the RST card, set all MBR switches (0-7) to
the OFF position, making all ORTs busy.

From Station “A” (DP), test
ORTs one circuit at a time.

Un-busy (make idle) only the ORT to be tested.

*

Station “A” goes off-hook and after hearing DT, dials the
station number of Station “B.”
Station “A” confirms ringing to Station “B” and Station “B”
answers.
Stations “A” and “B” go on-hook.

From Station “B” (PB), test
ORTs on circuit at a time.
*

Un-busy only the ORT to be tested.
Station “B” goes off-hook and after hearing DT, dials the
station number of Station “A.”
Station “B” confirms ringing to Station “A” and Station “A”
answers.
Stations “A” and “B” go on-hook.

A

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 5
Page 325
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

NAP-200-029
Sheet 2/2
ORT (RST Card) Connection Test

A
Perform tests for a situation where all ORTs are busy.
System Data SYS1,
INDEX 4, b0 =0

Station “A” goes off-hook.
Station “A” confirms that Reorder Tone (ROT) is heard
Station “A” goes off-hook.

System Data SYS1,
INDEX 4, b0 =1
*

Station “A” goes off-hook.
Station “A” confirms that no tone is heard.
Un-busy (make idle) a single ORT circuit.
Station “A” confirms that DT is heard.
Station “A” goes off-hook.

END

CHAPTER 5
Page 326
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

NAP-200-030

ATTCON
ATI

Sheet 1/1

DT, RBT

ATTCON (ATI Card) Connection Test

ATI

A

LC

START
A station repeats an ATTCON
call. Each ATTCON answers
the call.
*

Station “A” dials the operator access code (normally, “0”).
At each ATTCON, the operator confirms that the ATT lamp
flashes and the ringer sounds.
At each ATTCON, the operator answers the call by pressing
the ATND key.
Station “A” confirms speech with each ATTCON.
The operator at each ATTCON releases by pressing the
CANCEL key.
Station “A” goes on-hook.

Each ATTCON calls a station
by pressing LOOP keys one at a
time.
*

At each ATTCON, the operator dials the number of Station
“A” by using LOOP keys (L1-L6) one at a time.
Ringing at Station “A” is confirmed.
Station “A” answers the call and confirms speech.
The operator at the ATTCON releases by pressing the
CANCEL key.
Station “A” goes on-hook.

END

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 5
Page 327
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

NAP-200-031

LC/ELC

Sheet 1/1
Line (LC, ELC, DLC, Card) Connection
Test

Line being
tested
(XXXX)
ATTCON
D term
ATI/ELC

DT, RBT

A
An ATTCON or Dterm is called
from each station. The called
party confirms the station
number.
*

On the MDF, a telephone set is connected to the line circuit
to be tested
The station (XXXX) to be tested goes off-hook and
confirms DT (Dial Tone).
The station (XXXX) calls an ATTCON or Dterm.
The called ATTCON or Dterm answers the call, and confirms
speech and the station number of the calling station.
The call is released.

The ATTCON or Dterm calls a
station being tested.

The ATTCON or Dterm dials the station number of the
station being tested.
The called station answers and confirms speech.

*

The ATTCON or Dterm confirms that the number dialed and
the number of the station being tested are the same.
The call is released.

The test conducted when the
station involved is assigned as a
Hot Line/House Phone.

The station being tested goes off-hook and confirms Ring
Back Tone (RBT).
The station checks whether the call is routed to the
predetermined station/ATTCON or that a call is originated
to a predetermined trunk.
The called side answers the call and confirms speech.
The call is released.

END

CHAPTER 5
Page 328
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

NAP-200-032
Sheet 1/3
Outgoing Trunk (COT, TLT, DTI Card)
Connection Test

Test Outline:
The purpose of this test is to confirm, by setting up an outgoing connection test for each outgoing trunk, that speech
can be made and that the call can be released.
Outgoing trunks must be tested one at a time using the sequence of Routes and Trunk Numbers assigned at each
office

START
When a C. O. Line or Tie Line is
not connected with a trunk circuit,
temporary cross connections
between the Outgoing trunk being
tested and the terminating trunk
should be set up on the MDF as a
loop-back circuit.

Referring to Figures 032-1 through 032-3, make temporary
cross connections on the MDF for a loop-back circuit.

Make busy all Outgoing Trunks.

On the front of the Trunk circuit card, set the MB switch to
the OFF position, making the trunk busy.

Test the trunk circuits one at a
time by establishing access from a
station.

Un-busy (make idle) only the trunk to be tested.

Temporarily assign Office Data from the MAT so that a loopback connection from the trunk can be established.

The station dials the Access Code of the trunk being tested
and the number for the call destination.
The called side answers.
The station confirms speech.
The call is released.
Make temporary cross connections for the next trunk to be
tested.

Restore the temporary
connections, temporary Office
Data, etc. to the original.
END

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 5
Page 329
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

NAP-200-032
Sheet 2/3
Outgoing Trunk (COT, TLT, DTI Card)
Connection Test

•

Set up a loop-back connection between the COT (C.O. Trunk) to be tested and a station line.

A

LC

C

LC

B

LC

COT

Figure 032-1 COT Test Configuration

•

The trunk route must be assigned for Loop Start.

A

LC

TLT

B

LC

TLT

Figure 032-2 TLT Test Configuration

•

Set up a loop-back connection between the TLT (Tie Line Trunk) to be tested and another EMT.

•

If the TLT is a DID (Direct Inward Dialing) Trunk, connected the related leads as shown below.

TLT

•

T

T

R

R

TLT

If the TLT is a 2W E&M System, connect the related leads as shown below.

T

T

R

R

TLT

CHAPTER 5
Page 330
Revision 3.0

TLT
E

E

M

M

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

NAP-200-032
Sheet 3/3
Outgoing Trunk (COT, TLT, DTI Card)
Connection Test

•

If the TLT is a 4W E&M System, connect the related leads as shown below.
Receive
TLT
Send

•

T
R

T
R

T
R
E
M

T
R
E
M

Receive
TLT
Send

Set up a loop-back connection between the DTI Trunk to be tested and another DTI Trunk as shown below:

A

LC

DTI

B

LC

DTI

Figure 032-3 DTI Test Configuration

Receive

RA
RB

RA
RB

Receive

Send

TA
TB

TA
TB

Send

DTI

•

DTI

If the office is the primary office (Clock-Source-Office), perform the tests by disconnecting the PLO and the
M-OSC. (The mode of the PLO becomes “Self Operation Mode.”)

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 5
Page 331
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

NAP-200-033
Sheet 1/2
Incoming Trunk (COT, TLT, DTI Card)
Connection Test

Test Outline:
The purpose of this test is to confirm, by setting up an incoming trunk connection test for each incoming trunk, that
speech can be made with the ATTCON when a Ringdown Signal Interface is used, or with a station when a Dial-In
Signal Interface is used. This test also confirms that the call can be released. Incoming trunks must be tested one at
a time using the sequence of Route and Trunk Numbers assigned at each office.
START
On the MDF, make temporary
cross connections between the
Incoming Trunk to be tested and an
outgoing trunk as a loop-back
circuit.

Referring to Figures 032-1 through 032-3 in NAP-200-032,
make temporary cross connections on the MDF for a loopback circuit.
Temporarily assign Office Data from the MAT so that a loopback connection from the trunk can be established.

Make busy all outgoing trunks other than the cross-connected trunk.
Test Incoming trunk circuits one at a time.
For Ringdown Signal
Interface.

Station “A” dials the station number of Station “C”.
The call terminates to an Attendant Console.
The Attendant Console answers the call and confirms
speech.
The call is released.
Make temporary connections for the next trunk to be tested.

B

A

CHAPTER 5
Page 332
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

NAP-200-033
Sheet 2/2
Incoming Trunk (COT, TLT, DTI Card)
Connection Test

A

B
For a Dial-In Signal
Interface.

Station “A” dials the access code for the outgoing trunk and
the number of Station “B”.
Station “B” answers the call and confirms speech.
The call is released.
Make temporary cross connections for the next trunk to be
tested.

Restore the temporary cross connections, temporary Office Data, etc. to the original.

END

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 5
Page 333
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

NAP-200-034

COT
DIT

Sheet 1/1
Direct-In Termination Trunk (COT Card)
Connection Test

A

LC

B

LC

C

LC

START
On the MDF, make temporary cross connections between the Trunk for Direct-In Termination (DIT) and
an LC.
C.O.Line Incoming Call

Station “B” dials the number of LC “C” (Station “C”).

Incoming Call to Station via
DIT Trunk.

The call terminates to Station “A”; Station “A” rings.
Confirm that the ringing is distinct from that of an intraoffice call or ordinary C.O. call.
• The ringing signal for Direct-In Termination calls can be
the same as that used for C.O. calls if the related Office
Data is assigned.
System Data SYS1, INDEX 72, SYS3, INDEX 0, and
parameter DR of Command “ARTD”.

Answer and Talk

Station “A” goes off-hook.
Stations “A” and “B” talk with each other.

Release

Station “A” and “B” both go on-hook.

Remove the temporary cross connections.
END

CHAPTER 5
Page 334
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

NAP-200-035
SND

Sheet 1/1

COT

SND (RST Card) Connection Test
A

LC

B

LC

ORT

LC
MAT

START
When a C.O. Line or Tie Line is
not connected with the trunk,
make an arrangement for trunk
loop-back as illustrated above.

On the MDF, make temporary cross connections for a
loop back circuit.

Make busy all SNDs

On the front of the RST circuit card, set all MBS switches
(0-7) to the OFF position, thereby making all SNDs busy.

Test SNDs one after another

Un-busy (make idle) only the SND to be tested.

Temporarily assign Office Data from the MAT so that a
connection can be set up with Station “B” via a SND.

Station “A” dials the access code of the trunk and the
station number of Station “B”.
Station “B” answers and talks
The call is released.
Restore the temporary cross connections, temporary Office Data etc. to the original.
END

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 5
Page 335
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

SPDT,RBT

NAP-200-036
Sheet 1/1

A

LC

B

LC

C
F
T

C

LC

TSW/INT
CARD

3-party Conference Trunk Function Test

RC

START
Made busy all CFTs

Made busy all CFTs using MAT command “MBTK”.

Test CFTs one at a time

Un-busy (make idle) only the CFT to be tested.
Stations “A” and “B” are engaged in a station to station
connection.
Station “A” makes a Switch Hook Flash (SHF) and after hearing
DT, dials the station number of Station “C”.
Station “C” answers the call.
Station “A”, after having talked with Station “C”, makes a SHF
and confirms that a three-way connection has been set up.
The call is released.

Cancel the Make Busy of
the CFT

Un-busy (make idle) the CFT using the “MBTK” command.

END

CHAPTER 5
Page 336
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

NAP-200-037
Sheet 1/1

A

LC

Connection Test-Announcement Trunk for
Announcement Service

B

LC

ANNOUNCEMENT
TRK

ANNOUNCEMENT
MACHINE

START
Dial the announcement service
code

Station “A” dials the announcement service code.

Check the contents of the
announcement

Station “A” is connected to the announcement machine
and hears the announcement.

Dial the announcement service
code

Station “B” dials the announcement service code.

Check the contents of the
announcement

Station “B” is connected to the announcement machine
and hears the announcement.

Release

Confirm that the announcement machine stops when both
Stations “A” and “B” goes on-hook.

END

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 5
Page 337
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

NAP-200-038
A

Sheet 1/1

LC

ANNOUNCEMENT
TRK
DAT

Connection Test-Digital Announcement
Trunk for Announcement Service

B

LC

START
Dial the announcement service code

Station “A” dials the announcement service code.

Check the contents of the
announcement

Station “A” is connected to the announcement trunk and
hears the announcement.

Dial the announcement service code

Station “B” dials the announcement service code.

Check the contents of the
announcement

Station “B” is connected to the announcement trunk and
hears the announcement.

Release

Confirm that the announcement stops when both
Stations “A” and “B” goes on-hook.

END

CHAPTER 5
Page 338
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

NAP-200-039
Sheet 1/1
Connection Test-Paging Trunk for Paging
Access Service

A

LC
PGT
AMP

SP

ATTCON

START
Dial the paging access code

Station “A”/ATTCON dials the paging access code and hears
CRBT (Continuous Ringback Tone).
In about 1 second, CRBT stops.

Speaker Paging

Check whether speaker paging is possible after CRBT has
stopped.

Release

Station “A” goes on-hook or the ATTCON depresses the
CANCEL key.

END

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 5
Page 339
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

NAP-200-040
Sheet 1/2
Connection Test-Paging Trunk for Paging
Transfer Service

Paged Station
C

LC

Hold Station
B

LC

Paging Station
A

LC
PGT
AMP

SP

• Paging Transfer Service can be selected according to System Data (SYS1, INDEX 73).
1.

Non-Delay System

2.

Delay and Non-Delay System

3.

Paging Transfer Supervision

START
Call the Paging Trunk

Stations “A” and “B” are engaged in a station to station
connection.
Station “A” makes a Switch Hook Flash (SHF) and hears
SPDT. Station “B” is held on the line.
Station “A” dials the paging access code and hears CRBT. In
about 1 sec., CRBT is no longer heard and Station “A” is able
to page through the loudspeaker.

The paging party

For a Non-Delay System:
Station “A” remains on hold.
For a Delay System with Paging Transfer Supervision:
Station “A” hangs up.

The paged party answers

Station “C” (the paged party) dials the paging access code
(answer).

A

CHAPTER 5
Page 340
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

NAP-200-040
Sheet 2/2
Connection Test-Paging Trunk for Paging
Transfer Service

A
Connection
For Non-Delay-System
Station “C” is connected to Station “A”.
When Station “A” hangs up, Stations “B” and “C” are automatically connected
with each other.
For a Delay-System
Station “A” rings and picks up handset
Station “A” is connected to Stations “C”.
When Station “A” hangs up, Stations “B” and “C” are automatically connected
with each other.
For Paging Transfer Supervision
Station “C” is connected to Station “B”.
Release
END

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 5
Page 341
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

NAP-200-041
RG

Sheet 1/1

COT

Radio Paging Trunk (COT Card)
Connection Test

A

LC
COT

B

LC

RBT
RADIO PAGING
SLAVE STATION

START
Call the Radio Paging Equipment

Station “A” dials the radio paging access code and hears
Special Dial Tone from the Radio Paging Equipment, then
dials the slave station number.
The paging radio of the slave station starts ringing.
By hearing CRBT (Continuous Ring Back Tone) from the
Radio Paging Equipment, Station “A” confirms that the slave
station is being paged, then goes on-hook.

The paged party answers

The slave station (the radio-pages party) dials the paging answer code at the nearby Station “B”, hears SPDT through the
Radio Paging Equipment, then dials the paging answer code.
Station “A” rings and picks up the handset.
Confirm that Stations “A” and “B” can talk with each other.

Release

Stations “A” and “B” both go on-hook.

END

CHAPTER 5
Page 342
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

Howler Signal

NAP-200-042
Sheet 1/2
A

Howler & Ringing Signal Test

LC
RG

B

LC

C

LC
RBT

Test Outline:
The Howler Tone Generator and the Ringing Generator are equipped on the PWR Supply.
The purpose of the test is to confirm ringing signal by setting up a station to station connection and a howler tone
connection from a station accommodated in any PIM.

START
Check PWR0 in each PIM.
While both PWR Supplies are OFF, turn power to PWR0 ON. Leave PWR1 OFF.
Check howler tone.

*

A station accommodated in the PIM for which the PWR Supply is to be tested goes offhook. (analog port only)
The station hears DT.
In about 12 seconds, the station hears ROT.
About 30 seconds later, the station should confirm hearing howler tone.
Check ringing signal.

*

Set up a station-to-station connection between two stations accommodated in the IM
inm which the PWR Supply is to be tested. (analog port only)
Confirm that ringing signal is sent out.
A

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 5
Page 343
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

NAP-200-042
Sheet 2/2
Howler & Ringing Signal Test

A
Check PWR1 in each PIM.
While both PWR Supplies are OFF, turn power to PWR1 ON. Leave PWR0 OFF.
Check howler tone.

*

A station accommodated in the PIM for which the PWR Supply is to be tested goes offhook. (analog port only)
The station hears DT.
In about 12 seconds, the station hears ROT.
About 30 seconds later, the station should confirm hearing howler tone.
Check ringing signal.

*

Set up a station-to-station connection between two stations accommodated in the IM
inm which the PWR Supply is to be tested. (analog port only)
Confirm that ringing signal is sent out.
END

CHAPTER 5
Page 344
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

5. OVERALL TEST
5.1 Outline

Tests are to be performed to check C.O. Lines and/or Tie Lines by connecting them to a trunk on an individual
basis.
The speech path conditions (speech level, presence of noise, one-way speech, no speech, etc.) over the connection to the distant office will be checked. Release of the trunk used will also be checked.
5.2 Overall Test Procedure

The procedure for performing the Overall Test is described in the NAPs indicated to the right of each item in
the following flowchart.

START
Overall Test of C.O. Line Outgoing Call:

NAP-200-043

Overall Test of C.O. Line Incoming Call:

NAP-200-044

Overall Test of CCIS Tie Line Outgoing Call:

NAP-200-045

Overall Test of CCIS Tie Line Incoming Call:

NAP-200-046

Test of Connection Alternate Routing to All Tie Lines:

NAP-200-047

Test of Tandem Connection to Tie Line:

NAP-200-048

PAD Setting:

NAP-200-049

END

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 5
Page 345
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

NAP-200-043

Central
Office
Exchange

PBX

Sheet 1/1
Overall Test for C.O. Line Outgoing Call

A

LC

COT

ATI

COT

ATI

COT

ATTCON

ATTCON

START
Seizure of trunk to be tested
When seizing from a
station

Place the trunk to be tested into idle state, and make all other
trunks busy.
Station “A” dials the trunk access number.
Station “A”, after hearing dial tone from the C.O., dials the
pilot number for the local office and allows the call to be
terminated to that office via loop-back at the C.O.

When seizing from an
ATTCON

An ATTCON sets up the connection with a specific trunk
designated via Individual Trunk Access service.
The ATTCON, after hearing dial tone from the C.O., dials
the pilot number for the local office and allows the call to be
terminated to that office via loop-back at the C.O.

Call termination to ATTCON

The call looped back at the C.O. terminates to the
ATTCON.

Check of speech conditions

After the call has been answered at the ATTCON, check the
speech conditions including speech level, presence of noise,
and one-way speech state.

Release
When all COTs have been
checked and a fault is detected.

Perform a trunk loop-back test at the C.O., and determine
whether the trunk side or the C.O. Line side is faulty.
If the C.O. Line is faulty, make a request to the C.O. for
repair.

END

CHAPTER 5
Page 346
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

NAP-200-044

Central
Office
Exchange

PBX

Sheet 1/1
Overall Test for C.O. Line Incoming Call

LC

COT

ATTCON
COT

ATI

COT

ATTCON

Test Outline:
The tests comprising this NAP are to be performed according to the C.O. Line Number Table provided by the C.O.
If the C.O. Line Numbers are not known, tests cannot be performed because loop-back cannot be performed at the
C.O.
In addition, tests cannot be performed which involve Direct Inward Dialing. Under such circumstances, the C.O.
must be asked to perform an incoming test.

START
Seizure of trunk to be tested

From the ATTCON, set up a connection with a specific trunk
designated via Individual Trunk Access.
After hearing dial tone from the C.O., dial the C.O. Line
number of the trunk being tested from the ATTCON.

Call termination to ATTCON

The call looped back at the C.O. terminates to the
ATTCON.

Speech Condition Check

After the call has been answered at the ATTCON, check the
speech conditions including speech level, presence of noise,
and one-way speech.

Release
When all COT trunks have been
checked and a fault is detected.

Perform a trunk loop-back test at the C.O. and identify
whether the trunk side or the C.O. Line side is faulty.
If the C.O. Line side is faulty, make a request to the C.O. for
repair.

END

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 5
Page 347
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

NAP-200-045
Sheet 1/2
Overall Test of CCIS Tie Line Outgoing
Call

PBX-A

Station A

PBX-B

Station B
LC

LC
ATTCON
ATI
(PBX to be tested)

START
Seizure of trunk to be tested
When seizing from a
station

Place the trunk to be tested into idle state, and make busy all
other trunks.
Station “A” dials the number for station “B” in the PBX-B

When seizing from an
ATTCON

An ATTCON sets up the connection with a specific trunk
designated by Individual Trunk Access for CCIS TRK
service and dials the number for Station “B” in the PBX-B.

Call termination to Station “B”
in the PBX-B

The call terminates to Station “B” via a CCIS Tie Line.

Check of speech conditions

After the call has been answered at the ATTCON, check the
speech conditions including speech level, presence of noise
and one-way speech state.

Release
When all CCIS Tie Line Trunks
have been checked and a fault
has been detected

Perform fault localization procedure when a fault has
occurred to CCIS Tie Line (See Procedure A).
If the distant office is faulty, make a request to the distant
office for repair.

END

CHAPTER 5
Page 348
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

NAP-200-045
Sheet 2/2
Overall Test of CCIS Tie Line Outgoing
Call

(Procedure A)
START
On the DTI/CCT card, set its MB switch UP.
In any office other than the Primary Office (Clock-Source-Office), disconnect the DTI/CCT cable
connector at the DTI/CCT side (Backplane of PIM)
PLO alarm is generated, but ignore it.
The PLO starts running by itself.
Make the following connection at the MDF using a paired wire.
DTI/CCT
LEADS

MDF

TA

CROSS
CONNECTION

TB
RA
RB

The DTI does not recover. (CCH/
CCT Link Failure may occur, but
ignore it.)

System message “3-J” is not displayed.

The DTI recovered. (CCH/CCT
Link Failure may occur, but ignore
it.)

System message “3-J” is displayed.

The DTI/CCT is faulty.

The DTI/CCT is normal.
Call the distant office and ask for repair.

END

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 5
Page 349
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

NAP-200-046
Sheet 1/1
Overall Test of CCIS Tie Line Incoming
Call

PBX-A

Station A
LC

PBX-B

Station B
LC

(PBX to be tested)

START
Seizure of trunk to be tested

Place the trunk to be tested into idle state, and make busy all
other trunks.

Termination of incoming call to
station “A” in the self office

An incoming call from the distant office terminates to
Station “A”.

Check of speech

After the call has been answered at Station “A”, check the
speech conditions including speech level, presence of noise
and one-way speech state.

Release
When all CCIS Tie Line Trunks
have been checked and a fault has
been detected

Perform fault localization procedure when a fault has
occurred to CCIS Tie Line. (See Procedure A of NAP-200045.)
If the distant office is faulty, make a request to the distant
office for repair.

END

CHAPTER 5
Page 350
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

NAP-200-047
Sheet 1/2
Test of Connection and Alternate Routing
to All Tie Lines

START
Test the trunks in the primary
route one at a time.

Make busy all trunks in the primary route except the trunk to
be tested.
Station “A” calls Station “B” via the primary route.
After Station “B” answers, check the normality of the speech
condition including the speech level, presence of noise, and
one-way speech.
Release.

Make all the trunks in the primary route busy.
Test the trunks in the alternate
route one at a time.

Make busy all trunks in the alternate route except the trunk
to be tested.
Station “A” calls Station “B” via the alternate route.
After Station “B” answers, check the normality of the speech
condition including the speech level, presence of noise, and
one-way speech.
Release.

Cancel the Make Busy condition of the trunks.
END

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 5
Page 351
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

NAP-200-047
Sheet 2/2
Test of Connection and Alternate Routing
to All Tie Lines

Basic Route
Tie Line
Network
TRKs
Station A

PBX to
be tested

Alternate
Route

PBX

Station B

TRKs
Public
Network

Figure 047-1 Combination of Tie Line Network and Public Network

BASIC ROUTE
PBX

TRKs

Station A

ALTERNATE
ROUTE

PBX to be
tested
TRKs

PBX

Figure 047-2 Tie Line Network

CHAPTER 5
Page 352
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

PBX

Station B

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

NAP-200-048
Sheet 1/2
Test of Tandem Connection to Tie Line

IRT

Primary Route
PBX

(1)
Station A

PBX

TRKs
Alternate
Route

TRKs
(3)

PBX
Station B

TRKs
(2)
PBX
ATTCON

(1):
(2):
(3):

PBX to
be tested

Station C

Direct tandem connection by dial-in
Tandem connection via ATTCON
Tandem connection via Station

Figure 048-1 Test of Tandem Connection to Tie Line

START
Test of direct dial-in tandem
connection

Test of Primary Route
Station “A” calls Station “B”.
Confirm speech between Stations “A” and “B”.
Release.
Test of Alternate Route
Make busy all the trunks in the primary route.
Station “A” calls Station “B”.
Confirm speech between Stations “A” and “B”.
Release.
Un-busy (make idle) all the trunks.

A

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 5
Page 353
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

NAP-200-048
Sheet 2/2
Test of Tandem Connection to Tie Line

A
Test of tandem connection via
ATTCON

Station “A” dials the access code for the ATTCON.
The ATTCON answers and sets up a tandem connection to
Station “B”.
The ATTCON releases, and speech between Stations “A”
and “B” is confirmed.
Release.

Test of tandem connection via
station

Station “A” calls Station “C”.
Station “C”, after answering, makes a Switch Hook Flash
(SHF) and calls Station “B”.
After Station “B” answers, Station “C” release. Speech
between Stations “A” and “B” is confirmed.
Release.

END

CHAPTER 5
Page 354
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

NAP-200-049
Sheet 1/2
PAD Setting

For the PBX, PADs can be set according to the connecting status of the Tie Line involved.
(a) For an outgoing/incoming call via a Tie Line:
• Via MAT command “ARTD” and switch settings on the TLT circuit card.
(b) For a tandem Tie Line connection:
• Via command “APAD” or switch settings on the TLT circuit card(s).
At both the originating and terminating offices, an 8 dB PAD is set for the EMT route via the “ARTD” command or
switch settings. At the tandem office, a 4 dB PAD is set for the terminating and originating sides of each EMT route
via command “APAD”.
Through this arrangement, an 8 dB PAD is in service for outgoing and incoming connections, and 4 dB PADs are in
service for each line in a tandem connection (total: 8 dB). This arrangement is shown in Figure 049-1

Originating Office
0 dB

Carrier
Terminal

EMT
8 dB –8
8 dB

Tandem Office
Carrier
Terminal
0

0

–8

EMT
4 dB
PAD

4 dB

8 dB

Terminating Office
0 dB

8 dB –8

0

8 dB

–8

0

4 dB
PAD

4 dB

8 dB
EMT

Carrier
Terminal

Carrier
Terminal

EMT

Figure 049-1 Example of PAD Setting

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 5
Page 355
Revision 3.0

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

NAP-200-049
Sheet 2/2
PAD Setting

When setting up a No. 7 CCIS Network, PAD setting differs from that in the analog network.
(c) For an outgoing call to/incoming call from a Tie Line:
• Via “ARTD” command.
(d) For a tandem Tie Line connection:
• Via “APAD” command.
At both the originating and terminating offices, 0 dB is set to the outgoing side and 8 dB is set to the terminating of
the DTI/CCT route via “ARTD” command.
At the tandem office, 0 dB is set for both the terminating and originating sides of each DTI/CCT route via “APAD”
command.
This arrangement is shown in Figure 049-2.

Tandem Office

Originating Office
DTI/CCT
0 dB

0 dB
–8 dB

DTI/CCT
0 dB
0 dB

–8 dB

Terminating Office
DTI/CCT
0 dB

0 dB
–8 dB

0 dB
0 dB

–8 dB

Figure 049-2 Example of PAD Setting for CCIS

CHAPTER 5
Page 356
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 6

FAULT RECOVERY DURING TESTS

1. GENERAL
The fault recovery procedures described in this Chapter are used when a connection cannot be established in the
normal manner or an abnormal connection is discovered as a result of the tests designated in Chapter 4, ”SYSTEM STARTUP”, and Section 2., “BASIC CONNECTION TEST” of CHAPTER 5.
2. OUTLINE OF PROCEDURE FOR FAULT RECOVERY
The procedures for performing fault recovery are described in the NAPs indicated to the right of each item in
the following flowchart.

START
Abnormal Lamp Indication After System Startup:

NAP-200-050

Faulty DT (Dial Tone) Connection:

NAP-200-051

Faulty Station To Station Connection:

NAP-200-052

END

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 6
Page 357
Revision 3.0

FAULT RECOVERY DURING TESTS

NAP-200-050
Sheet 1/2
ATTENTION

Abnormal Lamp Indications After System
Startup

Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

START
Check conducted when the OPE lamp (Green) does not turn ON on any circuit cards mounted in a PIM
Using MAT command “AUNT”, check whether UNIT data has been assigned.
Replace the TSW/MUX card in the PIM with a spare.
Check whether the flat cable connected to the “BUSXX” terminal on the PIM backplane is
securely connected.
A PIM will occasionally malfunction due to a single circuit card mounted in the PIM.
Therefore, check the circuit cards via the following steps:
Extract all circuit cards from the PIM other than the TSW/MUX and the PWR Supplies.
Insert one circuit card into its mounting slot and see if its OPE lamp turns ON. Repeat
this procedure for the remaining circuit cards.
Check conducted when the OPE lamp (Green) does not turn ON on a Line Circuit card
Confirm that the MB switch of the circuit card is DOWN.
Using command “ASDT”, check whether station data is assigned to the circuits on the card.
Replace the card with a spare.
Check conducted when OPE lamp of a Line Circuit card illuminates, but the BL lamp (Red) for an
individual line flashes
Using command “MBST”, confirm that the specific line is not in Make Busy state.
Using command “ASDT”, check whether station data has been assigned to the line circuit.
Replace the circuit card with a spare.
A

CHAPTER 6
Page 358
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

FAULT RECOVERY DURING TESTS

NAP-200-050
Sheet 2/2
ATTENTION

Abnormal Lamp Indications After System
Startup

Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

A
Check conducted when the OPE lamp (Green) does not turn ON on a Trunk circuit card.
Confirm that the MB switch of the circuit card is DOWN.
Using command “ATRK”, check whether Trunk data has been assigned for the circuits on the
card.
Replace the circuit card with a spare.
Check conducted when the OPE lamp of a Trunk circuit card turns ON, but the BL lamp (Red) for an
individual circuit flashes.
Confirm that the MB switch for each circuit of the card is OFF.
Using command “MBTK”, confirm that the trunk circuit is not in Make Busy state.
Using command “ATRK”, check whether trunk data has been assigned for the trunk circuit.
Replace the circuit card with a spare.
Perform the following check before replacing a circuit card which is considered defective with a spare.
Confirm the switch settings on the circuit card.
Poor contact at the connector portion of the circuit card may be responsible for the malfunction.
Check the circuit card once again by inserting and extracting it two or three times.
END

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 6
Page 359
Revision 3.0

FAULT RECOVERY DURING TESTS

NAP-200-051
Sheet 1/1
ATTENTION

DT (Dial Tone) Connection Fault

Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

START
Dial tone is not heard.
On the MDF, check the cross connections between the telephone and the corresponding line
circuit.
Check whether the LT cable is securely connected to the PIM.
Replace the LC card with a spare.
DT cannot be heard from one or more lines of the same circuit card.
Replace the LC card with a spare.
DT cannot be heard from the lines accommodated by a specific PIM.
Check the switch settings on the TSW/MUX circuit card.
Replace the TSW/MUX card with a spare.
Check the switch settings on the TSW circuit card.
Replace the TSW card with a spare.
Check whether the “MT24 TSW” cable is securely inserted to the connectors on the front edge
of TSW and MUX cards.
END

CHAPTER 6
Page 360
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

FAULT RECOVERY DURING TESTS

NAP-200-052
Sheet 1/2
ATTENTION

Station to Station Connection Fault

Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

START
Dial Tone (DT) is still heard after a digit is dialed (cannot break dial tone)
A specific RST card is involved
A specific LC card is involved
A specific UNIT card is involved
Entire System is involved
Reorder Tone (ROT) is heard after a station number is dialed.
Using MAT command “ANPD/ANPDL/ANPDN,” check “Necessary Number of Digits” data.
Using command “ASPA/ASPAL/ASPAN,” check “Special Number” data.
Using command “ASDT,” check “Station” data.
Using command “ATNR,” check “Tenant Restriction Class” data.
Ring Back Tone (RBT) is heard, but the bell at the called station remains silent.
Check whether the called station is assigned the correct LENS data in command “ASDT.”
When all the stations accommodated in a specific PIM do not ring, replace the PWR circuit card
with a spare.
If the fault involves one or more lines within the same LC circuit card, replace the LC card with
a spare.

A

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 6
Page 361
Revision 3.0

FAULT RECOVERY DURING TESTS

NAP-200-052
Sheet 2/2
ATTENTION

Station to Station Connection Fault

Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

A
After the call has been answered, noise is heard or the speech path is one-way.
If the fault involves one or more lines within the same LC circuit card, replace the card with a
spare.
If the fault involves a specific PIM, replace either the MUX or TSW circuit card with a spare.
If noise is heard throughout the entire system, replace the TSW circuit card with a spare.
END

CHAPTER 6
Page 362
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 7

WORK AFTER INSTALLATION TESTS

This Chapter explains various kinds of work and site cleaning, etc. which the installer must perform after completion
of installation tests so that the system can be cut over normally.
Upon completion of all the required tests, the technician must confirm or perform the following.
1.

Office Data Management

2.

Preparation of Test Result Reports

3.

Mounting of the Front and Rear Covers

4.

Attachment of Inter-frame Brackets

5.

Site Cleaning

1. OFFICE DATA MANAGEMENT
This paragraph explains the method of creating backup of the Office Data and the method of protecting the Office Data.
The PBX executes various kinds of processing according to the results of access by the CPU to the Data Memory
in which the Office Data are stored. If the contents of Data Memory become faulty. It may result in erroneous
operation of the system or in a system down. If any part of the Office Data has been illegally changed, it may
also bring about a trouble the same as in the case of a fault occurrence to the Data Memory.
Thus, upon completion of the installation tests, ensure to create backup of the Office Data and provide a proper
measure of office data protection.
1.1 Preservation of Office Data

The following items be kept at the job site after the installation test has been completed for preservation of office
data.
1.

Office Data Programming Sheets
Since the office data programming sheets should reflect the most up-to-date data at all times, entries into
the office data programming sheets must be made in pencil.

2.

Floppy Disks for Storing Data
If a major change is made to the office data, especially a change involving System Data (command “ASYD/
ASYDL/ASYDN”), the system may not function as expected afterward. To prepare for such an occurrence,
an FD containing the office data before the change and one containing the data after the change should be
kept on hand. The FD containing the data before the change allows the technician to restore the previous
(running) condition if the system will not operate properly with the new data.

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 7
Page 363
Revision 3.0

WORK AFTER INSTALLATION TESTS

Note:

Cautions pertaining to Floppy Disks.
(1) Do not place a heavy object on an FD or the FD will be damaged.
(2) When taking an FD out of its protective envelope, hold the top edge of the disk and gently pull it out.
(3) Do not expose the FD to direct sunlight or to a high temperature (above 65°C (150°F)).
(4) Do not pinch the FD with a clip.
(5) Do not touch the recorded surface of the floppy disk with bare hands; fingerprints left by bare hands
will attract dust.
(6) Avoid cleaning of the floppy disk.
(7) Do not place the floppy disk near a magnet, etc. If an FD is exposed to a magnetic field of more than
50 Oe, the data on the disk is likely to be altered or destroyed.
(8) Do not bend the floppy disk.
(9) Do not apply force to outer edge of the floppy disk.

2. PREPARATION OF TEST RESULT REPORT
When submitting a report of test results to the end user or when performing test with customer’s representatives
attending, prepare Test Result Report and record the test results into the prepared Test Result Report.

CHAPTER 7
Page 364
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

WORK AFTER INSTALLATION TESTS

3. MOUNTING OF THE FRONT AND REAR COVERS
When mounting the front cover and the rear cover of the PBX, follow the procedure below.
START
Inspection

Set all MB switches back to their positions prior to the
installation tests. Confirm that all circuit cards are
mounted in the proper slots according to the Bayface
Layout.

Mounting of Side Covers

Referring to Figure 7-1 through Figure 7-3, mount the
side covers onto the Modules and the Fan Unit.

Mounting of Rear Covers

Mounting of Front Covers
Check

Modules

Referring to Figure 7-4 and Figure 7-5, mount the rear
covers.

Fan Unit

Referring to Figure 7-6 mount the rear covers.

Modules

Referring to Figure 7-7 through Figure 7-9, mount the
front cover (A).
Confirm that the mounted covers do not contact any of
the cables, circuit cards, etc.

END

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 7
Page 365
Revision 3.0

WORK AFTER INSTALLATION TESTS

Figure 7-1 Mounting of the Covers

CHAPTER 7
Page 366
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

WORK AFTER INSTALLATION TESTS

SIDE COVER

REAR

FRONT

SCREW

Figure 7-2 Side Cover Mounting Method (BASEU+LPR+PIM0)

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 7
Page 367
Revision 3.0

WORK AFTER INSTALLATION TESTS

SIDE COVER

REAR

Figure 7-3 Side Cover Mounting Method (PIM)

CHAPTER 7
Page 368
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

WORK AFTER INSTALLATION TESTS

SCREW
SCREW

SCREW
SCREW

SCREW

REAR SIDE
SCREW

REAR COVER
SIDE VIEW

Figure 7-4 Rear Cover Mounting Method (BASEU+LPR+PIM0)
NDA-24234

CHAPTER 7
Page 369
Revision 3.0

WORK AFTER INSTALLATION TESTS

MODULE

SCREW
SCREW
REAR SIDE
REAR COVER

MODULE

REAR COVER
SIDE VIEW

Figure 7-5 Rear Cover Mounting Method (PIM)

CHAPTER 7
Page 370
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

WORK AFTER INSTALLATION TESTS

FANU

REAR COVER
SCREW

SCREW

FANU

REAR COVER

Figure 7-6 Rear Cover Mounting Method (FANU)

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 7
Page 371
Revision 3.0

WORK AFTER INSTALLATION TESTS

FRONT COVER

Figure 7-7 Front Cover Mounting Method (BASEU+LPR+PIM0)

CHAPTER 7
Page 372
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

WORK AFTER INSTALLATION TESTS

Mount the Front Cover onto the module using screws.

SCREW

FRONT COVER

Note:

The Front Cover can be set to open
to either the “left side” or “right
side”. The Front Cover shown in
this figure is set to open to the left
side. When it is to be set to open to
right side, mount the Front Cover
onto the frame by setting the respective hinges on the left side of the
frame and the Front Cover.

Figure 7-8 Front Cover Mounting Method (PIM)

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 7
Page 373
Revision 3.0

WORK AFTER INSTALLATION TESTS

FANU

FRONT COVER C(U)

Figure 7-9 Front Cover Mounting Method (FANU)

CHAPTER 7
Page 374
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

WORK AFTER INSTALLATION TESTS

4. ATTACHMENT OF INTER-FRAME BRACKETS
This section covers how to attach inter-frame brackets between the cabinets.
When the maximum four-IMG configuration is adopted, the inter-frame brackets should be attached in the
following locations.

IMG0

IMG1

IMG2

IMG3

TOPU

TOPU

TOPU

TOPU

PIM3

PIM3

PIM3

PIM3

PIM2

PIM2

PIM2

PIM2

FANU

FANU

FANU

FANU

PIM1

PIM1

PIM1

PIM1

PIM0

PIM0

PIM0

PIM0

LPM

BASEU

DUMMY

DUMMY

BASEU

TSWM

BASEU

BASEU

Inter-frame Brackets

Figure 7-10 Locations of Inter-frame Brackets

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 7
Page 375
Revision 3.0

WORK AFTER INSTALLATION TESTS


STEP 6: Referring to the Figure 7-11 through Figure 7-11, fix the brackets (E) between the modules.

(PIM)

Dedicated screws for
inter-module stabilization.
Note
Bracket (E)

(LPM/PIM)

Note:

These screws are appended when obtaining the module components from NEC.

Figure 7-11 How to Attach Inter-frame Brackets

STEP 7: Referring to Figure 7-11 and Figure 7-11, fix the brackets (A) with the screws.
STEP 8: Referring to Figure 7-11 and Figure 7-11, fix the brackets (B) with the screws.

CHAPTER 7
Page 376
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

WORK AFTER INSTALLATION TESTS

SL-C.P.B.M.S x 4 x 8 x 3GF
Bracket (D)

Bracket (A)

(PIM)
Bracket (A)

Bracket (B)

(FANU)

Bracket (B)
Bracket (B)

Bracket (F)
(BASEU)
PL-C.P.I.M.S x 4 x 10 x 15 BF
P.I.WA x 4 x 15 BF
#2.ST.L.WA x 4 x 15 BF
A.HEX.I.N. x 4 x 15 BF

Bracket (F)

Figure 7-11 How to Attach Inter-frame Brackets (Continued)
NDA-24234

CHAPTER 7
Page 377
Revision 3.0

WORK AFTER INSTALLATION TESTS

Bracket (D)

Bracket (A)

Bracket (A)
Bracket (B)

Bracket (E)

Bracket (A)

Bracket (A)
Bracket (A)
Bracket (A)
Bracket (A)
Bracket (B)
Bracket (B)
Bracket (F)
Bracket (A)

Bracket (A)

Bracket (A)

Bracket (B)
Bracket (F)

Figure 7-11 How to Attach Inter-frame Brackets (Continued)

STEP 9: Referring to Figure 7-11 and Figure 7-11, fix the brackets (D) with the screws.
STEP 10:Referring to Figure 7-11 and Figure 7-11, fix the brackets (F) with the screws.

CHAPTER 7
Page 378
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234

WORK AFTER INSTALLATION TESTS

5. SITE CLEANING
Upon completion of the works described in Section 1 to 4 of this Chapter, execute or confirm the following
items.
•

Restore the cross connections arranged for test purposes to their original conditions.

•

Clean around the Module Group and the MDF.

•

Collect and organize all test equipment, tools, etc. used during the installation tests.

•

Dispose of dust, trash, etc.

NDA-24234

CHAPTER 7
Page 379
Revision 3.0

This page is for your notes.

CHAPTER 7
Page 380
Revision 3.0

NDA-24234



Source Exif Data:
File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.4
Linearized                      : No
Page Count                      : 410
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Page Layout                     : SinglePage
Creation Date                   : 1999:12:10 10:56:23Z
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 4.0 for Windows
Mod Date                        : 2002:01:30 09:03:35-06:00
Subject                         : NEAX2400 IMX Installation Manual
Author                          : EZ Manuals
Create Date                     : 1999:12:10 10:56:23Z
Modify Date                     : 2002:01:30 09:03:35-06:00
Metadata Date                   : 2002:01:30 09:03:35-06:00
Title                           : NEAX2400 IMX Installation Manual
Description                     : NEAX2400 IMX Installation Manual
Creator                         : EZ Manuals
EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Navigation menu